Материал из BikesWiki — энциклопедия японских мотоциклов
Перейти к: навигация, поиск
Yamaha FZS 600 Fazer
Ниже представлены прямые ссылки на скачку сервисной документации.
Для Yamaha FZS 600
- Руководство пользователя (Owners Manual) на Yamaha FZS 600 (на русском языке)
- Сервисный мануал (Service Manual) на Yamaha FZS 600 (1998)
- Дополнение к сервисному мануалу (Supplementary Service Manual) на Yamaha FZS 600 (2000)
- Дополнение к сервисному мануалу (Supplementary Service Manual) на Yamaha FZS 600 (2002)
- Информация по обслуживанию (Service Information) на Yamaha FZS 600 (2002)
- Руководство по ремонту и обслуживанию (Haynes Service & Repair Manual) на Yamaha YZF600 Thundercat
- Каталог запчастей (микрофиши) на Yamaha FZS 600 (1999)
- Каталог запчастей (микрофиши) на Yamaha FZS 600 (2003)
Обзор модели
- Yamaha FZS 600
Источник — «https://bikeswiki.ru/index.php?title=Yamaha_FZS600:_мануалы&oldid=9955»
Категория:
- Сервисная документация
- Manuals
- Brands
- YAMAHA Manuals
- Motorcycle
- FAZER FZS600
Manuals and User Guides for YAMAHA FAZER FZS600. We have 3 YAMAHA FAZER FZS600 manuals available for free PDF download: Owner’s Manual
- Manuals
- Brands
- Yamaha Manuals
- Motorcycle
- FZS600’98
- Service manual
-
Contents
-
Table of Contents
-
Troubleshooting
-
Bookmarks
Quick Links
Related Manuals for Yamaha FZS600’98
Summary of Contents for Yamaha FZS600’98
-
Page 3
EB000000 FZS600 SERVICE MANUAL 1997 by Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd. First edition, December 1997 All rights reserved. Any reproduction or unauthorized use without the written permission of Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd. is expressly prohibited. -
Page 4: Important Information
It is not possible to include all the knowledge of a mechanic in one manual, so it is assumed that anyone who uses this book to perform maintenance and repairs on Yamaha scooter has a basic understanding of the mechanical ideas and the procedures of scooter repair.
-
Page 5: Periodic Inspections And
YP002000 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL This manual is intended as a handy, easy-to-read reference book for the mechanic. Comprehensive explanations of all installation, removal,disassembly, assembly, repair and inspection procedures are laid out with the individual steps in sequential order. 1 The manual is divided into chapters.
-
Page 6
EB003000 SYMBOLS The following symbols are not relevant to every vehicle. Symbols 1 to 9 indicate the subject of each chapter. General information Specifications Periodic inspection and adjustment Engine Cooling system Carburetor(-s) Chassis Electrical system Troubleshooting Symbols indicate the following. Serviceable with engine mounted Filling fluid Lubricant… -
Page 7
INDEX GENERAL INFORMATION INFO SPECIFICATIONS SPEC PERIODIC INSPECTIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM COOL CARBURETORS CARB CHASSIS CHAS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ELEC TROUBLESHOOTING TRBL SHTG… -
Page 9
INFO… -
Page 10: Table Of Contents
INFO CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION MOTORCYCLE IDENTIFICATION ……… . VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER .
-
Page 11
INFO… -
Page 12: Motorcycle Identification
MOTORCYCLE IDENTIFICATION INFO EB100000 GENERAL INFORMATION MOTORCYCLE IDENTIFICATION EB100010 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number 1 is stamped into the right side of the steering head. EB100020 MODEL CODE The model code label 1 is affixed to the frame. This information will be needed to order spare parts.
-
Page 13: Important Information
5. Keep all parts away from any source of fire. EB102010 REPLACEMENT PARTS 1. Use only genuine Yamaha parts for all re- placements. Use oil and grease recom- mended by Yamaha for all lubrication jobs. Other brands may be similar in-function and appearance, but inferior in quality.
-
Page 14: Lock Washers/Plates And Cotter Pins
IMPORTANT INFORMATION INFO EB102030 LOCK WASHERS/PLATES AND COTTER PINS 1. After removal, replace all lock washers/ plates 1 and cotter pins. After the bolt or nut has been tightened to specification, bend the lock tabs along a flat of the bolt or nut. EB102040 BEARINGS AND OIL SEALS 1.
-
Page 15: Checking The Connections
CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS INFO EB103000 CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS Check the leads, couplers, and connectors for stains, rust, moisture, etc. 1. Disconnect: S lead S coupler S connector 2. Check: S lead S coupler S connector Moisture !Dry with an air blower. Rust/stains ! Connect and disconnect several times.
-
Page 16: Special Tools
SPECIAL TOOLS INFO EB104000 SPECIAL TOOLS The following special tools are necessary for complete and accurate tune-up and assembly. Use only the appropriate special tools as this will help prevent damage caused by the use of inappropriate tools or improvised techniques. When placing an order, refer to the list provided below to avoid any mistakes.
-
Page 17
SPECIAL TOOLS INFO Tool No. Tool name/Usage Illustration 90890-01399 Special thickness gauge This tool is used to measure the valve clearance. 90890-01401 Spark plug wrench This tool is used for removing or installing the spark plug. 90890-01403 Ring nut wrench This tool is used to tighten the steering ring nut. -
Page 18
SPECIAL TOOLS INFO Tool No. Tool name/Usage Illustration 90890-03141 Timing light This tool is necessary for checking ignition timing. 90890-04044 Piston ring compressor This tool is used to compress piston rings when installing the cylinder. 90890-03158 Carburetor angle driver This tool is used to adjust the pilot screw. 90890-04086 Clutch holding tool This tool is used for holding the clutch boss. -
Page 19
SPECIAL TOOLS INFO Tool No. Tool name/Usage Illustration 90890-85505 Yamaha bond No.1215 This sealant (bond) is used for crankcase mating surface, etc. -
Page 20
SPEC… -
Page 21
SPEC CHAPTER 2 SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ……….MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS . -
Page 22
SPEC… -
Page 23: Specifications
SPEC GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Model FZS600 Model code: 5DM1 Dimensions: Overall length 2,080 mm Overall width 710 mm Overall height 1,170 mm Seat height 790 mm Wheelbase 1,415 mm Minimum ground clearance 130 mm Minimum turning radius 2,900 mm Basic weight: With oil and full fuel tank 210 kg…
-
Page 24
SPEC GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Model FZS600 Carburetor: Type/quantity BSR 33/4 Manufacturer MIKUNI Spark plug: Type CR9E, CR8E/U27ESR-NU24ESR-N Manufacturer NGK/DENSO 0.7 X 0.8 mm Spark plug gap Clutch type: Wet, multiple-disc Transmission: Primary reduction system Spur gear Primary reduction ratio 82/48 (1.708) Secondary reduction system Chain drive Secondary reduction ratio… -
Page 25
SPEC GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Model FZS600 Brake: Front brake type Dual disc brake operation Right hand operation Rear brake type Single disc brake operation Right foot operation Suspension: Front suspension Telescopic fork Rear suspension Swingarm (link suspension) Shock absorber: Front shock absorber Coil spring/Oil damper Rear shock absorber Coil spring/Gas-oil damper… -
Page 26: Maintenance Specifications
SPEC MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE Item Standard Limit Cylinder head: Warp limit 0.05 mm Cylinder: 62.00 X 62.01 mm Bore size 62.1 mm Taper limit 0.09 mm Out of round limit 0.07 mm Camshaft: Drive method Chain drive (center) 23.000 X 23.021 mm Cam cap inside dia.
-
Page 27
SPEC MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS Item Standard Limit 0.010 X 0.037 mm Stem-to-guide clearance 0.08 mm 0.025 X 0.052 mm 0.1 mm Stem runout limit 0.04 mm 0.9 X 1.1 mm Valve seat width 1.6 mm 0.9 X 1.1 mm 1.6 mm Valve spring: Free length IN/EX… -
Page 28
SPEC MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS Item Standard Limit Clutch: 2.94 X 3.06 mm Friction plate thickness Quantity 8 pcs Wear limit 2.8 mm 2.94 X 3.06 mm Friction plate thickness Quantity 1 pcs 1.9 X 2.1 mm Clutch plate thickness Quantity 8 pcs Warp limit 0.1 mm Clutch spring free length… -
Page 29
SPEC MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS Item Standard Limit Lubrication system: Oil filter type Paper type Oil pump type Trochoid type 0.03 X 0.09 mm Tip clearance “A” or “B” 0.15 mm 0.03 X 0.08 mm Side clearance 0.15 mm 80 X 120 kPa (0.8 X 1.2 kg/cm Bypass valve setting pressure 450 X 550 kPa (4.5 X 5.5 kg/cm Relief valve operating pressure… -
Page 30
SPEC MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS TIGHTENING TORQUES ENGINE Tightening Thread torque Part to be tightened Part name Q’ty Remarks size size mSkg Camshaft cap Bolt Cylinder head Spark plug – Cylinder head cover Bolt Cylinder head side cover Bolt Connecting rod cap See NOTE Camshaft sprocket Bolt… -
Page 31
SPEC MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS Tightening Thread torque Part to be tightened Part name Q’ty Remarks size size mSkg Starter cover Bolt Oil gallery – Clutch cover Bolt Clamp (A.C magneto cover) Screw Starter clutch assembly Bolt Starter clutch outer Bolt Pressure plate Screw Clutch boss Bolt… -
Page 32
SPEC MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS CHASSIS Item Standard Limit Steering system: Angular bearing Steering bearing type Front suspension: Front fork travel 120 mm Fork spring free length 323 mm 319 mm Fitting length 315.9 mm Collar length 200 mm Spring Rate (K1) 7.5 N/mm (0.75 kg/mm) (K2) 14 N/mm (1.4 kg/mm) -
Page 33
SPEC MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS Item Standard Limit Front disc brake: Type Dual Disc outside dia. thickness 4 mm Disc deflection limit 0.2 mm Pad thickness Inner 5.5 mm 0.5 mm Pad thickness Outer 5.5 mm 0.5 mm Master cylinder inside dia. 14 mm Caliper cylinder inside dia. -
Page 34
SPEC MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS TIGHTENING TORQUES CHASSIS Tightening Remarks torque Part to be tightened Thread size mSkg Upper bracket and inner tube 1.25 Upper bracket and steering stem 11.0 Handlebar under holder 1.25 Handlebar upper holder 1.25 Under bracket and inner tube 1.25 Ring nut (steering stem) –… -
Page 35
SPEC MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS Tightening torque Part to be tightened Thread size Remarks mSkg Side cover and frame Garb bar 1.25 Front wheel axle Front wheel axle pinch bolt Front brake caliper 1.25 Front brake disc 1.25 Front brake caliper bleed screw Compression bar 1.25 Rear wheel sprocket… -
Page 36
SPEC MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS ELECTRICAL Item Standard Limit Voltage 12 V Ignition system: Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) 10_/1,250 r/min Advanced timing (B.T.D.C.) 50_/4,500 r/min Advance type TPS and electrical type T.C.I.: 189 X 231 Ω Y-L Pickup coil resistance T.C.I. unit model/manufacturer J4T085/MITSUBISHI Ignition coil: Model/manufacturer… -
Page 37
SPEC MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS Item Standard Limit Starter motor: Model/manufacturer SM-13/MITSUBA I.D. number SM-13 Output 0.7 kW 0.0015 X 0.0025 Ω at 20_C Armature coil resistance Brush overall length 10 mm 4 mm 7.8 X 10.2 N (780 X 1.020 gf) Brush spring pressure Commutator dia. -
Page 38
SPEC MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS Item Standard limit Amperage for individual circuit: Main 30 A Headlight 20 A Signal 20 A Ignition 20 A 10 A Back up Reserve 30 A 20 A 10 A 2-16… -
Page 39: General Tightening Torque Specifications
SPEC GENERAL TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS EB201000 GENERAL TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS This chart specifies tightening torques for standard fasteners with a standard ISO thread pitch. Tight- ening torque specifications for special components or assemblies are provided for each chapter of this manual.
-
Page 40
Starter idrer gear shaft 1 Neutral switch O-ring Push rod Push rod 1 O-ring Shift pedal Shift shaft Water pump O-ring Cylinder head cover gasket Yamaha bond No. 1215 Shift cam plug Breather plate Crankcase Yamaha bond No. 1215 Taper plug Bearing plate 2-18… -
Page 41
SPEC LUBRICATION POINT AND LUBRICATION TYPES CHASSIS Lubrication Point Symbol Steering bearing and bearing race (upper and lower) Pivot shaft Rear arm bearing Rear arm oil seal Rear arm cover oil seal lips Relay arm bearing Relay arm oil seal Rear shock absorber (upper/lower) Front wheel oil seal Speed sensor oil seal… -
Page 42
SPEC COOLING SYSTEM DIAGRAMS EB203000 COOLING SYSTEM DIAGRAMS 1 Engine outlet hose 8 Radiator outlet hose 2 Engine outlet hose 9 Radiator 3 Carburetor inlet hose 10 Radiator inlet hose 4 Carburetor outlet hose 5 Water pump 6 Coolant drain bolt 7 Water pump outlet hose 2-20… -
Page 43
SPEC COOLING SYSTEM DIAGRAMS 1 Radiator 2 Water pump outlet hose 3 Oil cooler inlet hose 4 Oil cooler outlet hose 5 Carburetor outlet hose 2-21… -
Page 44
SPEC LUBRICATION DIAGRAMS EB204000 LUBRICATION DIAGRAMS 1 Oil nozzle (main nozzle) 2 Oil nozzle (drive axle) 3 Projection 4 Oil filter 5 Relief valve 6 Oil strainer 7 Oil pump 2-22… -
Page 45
SPEC LUBRICATION DIAGRAMS 1 Main axle 2 Drive axle 3 Camshaft 4 Oil delivery pipe 2-23… -
Page 46
SPEC LUBRICATION DIAGRAMS 1 Camshaft 2 Crankshaft 2-24… -
Page 47
SPEC CABLE ROUTING EB205000 CABLE ROUTING 1 Throttle cable 9 Handlebar switch (left) 2 Clutch cable A Use a plastic clamp to fasten 3 Handlebar switch (right) together the handlebar switch 4 Starter cable lead (left), clutch cable and 5 Main switch starter cable. -
Page 48
SPEC CABLE ROUTING 1 Main switch lead 11 Battery 21 Speed sensor lead 2 Starter cable 12 Starting circuit cut-off relay 22 Horn 3 Handlebar switch lead (left) 13 Battery positive (+) lead 23 Starter relay 14 Seat lock cable 24 Fuse box 4 Clutch cable 5 Rectifier/ regulator… -
Page 49
SPEC CABLE ROUTING A Use a plastic clamp to fasten Position the band end to out side of D Use a steel holder to fasten the handlebar switch lead (left), chassis. together the AC magneto lead, main switch lead, clutch cable C Use a plastic locking tie to sidestand lead and oil and starter cable to the frame. -
Page 50: Cable Routing
SPEC CABLE ROUTING 1 Battery negative (–) lead 10 Throttle cable A Use a plastic clamp to fasten 2 Rear brake switch lead 11 Brake hose together the throttle cables, 3 Battery 12 Headlight lead headlight lead handlebar switch 13 Speed sensor lead 4 Reservoir tank hose (right) and speed sensor lead.
-
Page 51
SPEC CABLE ROUTING C Pass the main switch lead under E Pass the battery negative (–) the throttle cables, headlight lead inside of the reservoir lead, handlebar switch lead hose. (right) and speed sensor lead, then insert it right side of the box. D Pass the reservoir tank over flow hose, fuel tank breather hose and fuel tank drain hose… -
Page 52
SPEC CABLE ROUTING 1 Throttle cable 11 Battery negative (–) lead 21 Starter relay 2 Handlebar switch lead (right) 12 Battery 22 Starting circuit cut-off relay 3 Headlight lead 13 Rear brake reservoir tank 23 Flasher relay 14 Rear brake switch lead 24 Fuel pump lead coupler 4 Speed sensor lead 5 Carburetor heater hose… -
Page 53
SPEC CABLE ROUTING 31 Starter cable B Pass the rectifier / regulator turn signal light lead and clamp 32 Clutch cable lead, fan motor lead, handlebar 33 Handlebar switch lead (left) switch lead (left), main switch D Pass the reservoir hose left side 34 Main switch lead lead, headlight lead, handlebar of thermo stat housing. -
Page 54
SPEC… -
Page 56
CHAPTER 3 PERIODIC INSPECTIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS INTRODUCTION …………PERIODIC MAINTENANCE/LUBRICATION INTERVALS . -
Page 58: Periodic Inspections And Adjustments
INTRODUCTION / PERIODIC MAINTENANCE/LUBRICATION INTERVALS EB300000 PERIODIC INSPECTIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS INTRODUCTION This chapter includes all information necessary to perform recommended inspections and adjust- ments. If followed, these preventive maintenance procedures will ensure more reliable vehicle opera- tion, a longer service life and reduce the need for costly overhaul work. This information applies to ve- hicles already in service as well as to new vehicles that are being prepared for sale.
-
Page 59: Brake Fluid Replacement
S Change coolant every 24,000 km or 24 months (whichever comes first). *Since these items require special tools, data and technical skills, they should be serviced by a Yamaha dealer. NOTE: S The air filter needs more frequent service if you are riding in unusually wet or dusty areas.
-
Page 60: Front Cowling/Seat/Side Cover/Fuel Tank
FRONT COWLING/ SEAT/SIDE COVER/FUEL TANK FRONT COWLING/SEAT/SIDE COVER/FUEL TANK FRONT COWLING 33 Nm (3.3 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the front cowling Remove the parts in the order listed. View mirror (left/right) Inner panel (left/right) Cowling stay (left/right) Head light lead NOTE: Front flasher light lead (left/right)
-
Page 61
FRONT COWLING/ SEAT/SIDE COVER/FUEL TANK SEAT, SIDE COVER AND FUEL TANK 19 Nm (1.9 mSkg) 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) 4 Nm (0.4 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the seat, side cover Remove the parts in the order listed. and fuel tank Seat Fuel tank… -
Page 62: Engine
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE EB303001 ENGINE ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE The following procedure applies to all of the valves. NOTE: S Valve clearance adjustment should be made on a cold engine, at room tempera- ture. S When the valve clearance is to be mea- sured or adjusted, the piston must be at top dead center (TDC) on the compression stroke.
-
Page 63
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE a. Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise. b. When piston #1 is at TDC on the com- pression stroke, align the TDC mark a on the generator rotor with the mark b on the crankcase. NOTE: TDC on the compression stroke can be found when the camshaft lobes are turned away from each other. -
Page 64
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE 7. Remove: S timing chain tensioner bolt 1 S timing chain tensioner assembly 2 8. Remove: S timing chain guide 1 S timing chain guide (upper) 2 S camshaft cap 3 9. Remove: S camshaft 1 NOTE: S Refer to “DISASSEMBLING THE ENGINE –… -
Page 65
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE NOTE: S The thickness a of each valve pad is marked in hundredths of millimeters on the side that touches the valve lifter. S Since valve pads of various sizes are origi- nally installed, the valve pad number must be rounded in order to reach the closest equivalent to the original. -
Page 66
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE VALVE PAD SELECTION TABLE INTAKE Measured INSTALLED PAD NUMBER clearance 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 0.00 X 0.02 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 0.03 X 0.07 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230… -
Page 67
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE e. Install the new valve pad 1 and the valve lifter 2 . NOTE: S Apply molybdenum disulfide grease to the valve pad. S Lubricate the valve lifter with molybdenum disulfide oil. S The valve lifter must turn smoothly when rotated by hand. -
Page 68: Synchronizing The Carburetors
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE/ SYNCHRONIZING THE CARBURETORS 14. Install: S cylinder head cover S spark plugs Bolt (cylinder head cover): 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) Spark plug: 13 Nm (1.3 mSkg) EB303010 SYNCHRONIZING THE CARBURETORS NOTE: Prior to synchronizing the carburetors, the valve clearance and the engine idling speed should be properly adjusted and the ignition timing should be checked.
-
Page 69
SYNCHRONIZING THE CARBURETORS 6. Adjust: S carburetor synchronization a. Synchronize carburetor #1 to carburetor #2 by turning the synchronizing screw 1 in either direction until both gauges read the same. NOTE: After each step, rev the engine two or three times, each time for less than a second, and check the synchronization again. -
Page 70: Adjusting The Engine Idling Speed
ADJUSTING THE ENGINE IDLING SPEED EB303020 ADJUSTING THE ENGINE IDLING SPEED NOTE: Prior to adjusting the engine idling speed, the carburetor synchronization should be adjusted properly, the air filter should be clean, and the engine should have adequate compression. 1. Start the engine and let it warm up for sever- al minutes.
-
Page 71: Adjusting The Throttle Cable Free Play
ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY EB303032 ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY NOTE: Prior to adjusting the throttle cable free play, the engine idling speed and carburetor syn- chronization should be adjusted properly. 1. Check: S throttle cable free play a Out of specification ! Adjust.
-
Page 72: Checking The Spark Plugs
ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY/ CHECKING THE SPARK PLUGS After adjusting the throttle cable free play, turn the handlebar to the right and to the left to ensure that this does not cause the engine idling speed to change. 4.
-
Page 73: Checking The Ignition Timing
CHECKING THE SPARK PLUGS/ CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING 8. Connect: S spark plug cap EB303053 CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING NOTE: Prior to checking the ignition timing, check the wiring connections of the entire ignition system. Make sure that all connections are tight and free of corrosion.
-
Page 74: Measuring The Compression Pressure
MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE EB303060 MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE The following procedure applies to all of the cyl- inders. NOTE: Insufficient compression pressure will result in a loss of performance. 1. Check: S valve clearance Out of specification ! Adjust. Refer to “ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE”.
-
Page 75: Checking The Engine Oil Level
MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE/ CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL Compression pressure (at sea level) Standard 1,500 kPa (15.0 kg/cm Minimum 1,200 kPa (12.0 kg/cm a. Turn the main switch to “ON”. b. With the throttle wide open, crank the en- gine until the reading on the compression gauge stabilizes.
-
Page 76: Changing The Engine Oil
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL/ CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL Recommended engine oil Refer to the chart for the TEMP engine oil grade which is best suited for certain atmospheric SAE 10W-30 temperatures. API standard ! SAE 10W-30 SE or higher grade SAE 10W-30 ACEA standard ! G4 or G5 CAUTION:…
-
Page 77
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL a. Remove the oil filter cartridge 1 with an oil filter wrench 2 . Oil filter wrench 90890-01469 b. Apply a thin coat of engine oil onto the O- ring 3 of the new oil filter cartridge. CAUTION: Make sure that the O-ring 3 is positioned correctly in the groove of the oil filter car-… -
Page 78: Measuring The Engine Oil Pressure
MEASURING THE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE EB303090 MEASURING THE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE 1. Check: S engine oil level Below the minimum level mark ! Add the recommended engine oil to the proper lev- 2. Start the engine, warm it up for several min- utes, and then turn it off.
-
Page 79: Adjusting The Clutch Cable Free Play
MEASURING THE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE/ ADJUSTING THE CLUTCH CABLE FREE PLAY 6. Install: S oil gallery bolt 8 Nm (0.8 mSkg) EB303100 ADJUSTING THE CLUTCH CABLE FREE PLAY 1. Check: S clutch cable free play a Out of specification ! Adjust. Clutch cable free play (at the end of the clutch lever) 10 X 15 mm…
-
Page 80: Cleaning The Air Filter Element
CLEANING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT EB303130 CLEANING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT 1. Remove: S Seat S Fuel tank S Cover 1 2. Remove: S air filter case cover 1 S air filter element 2 3. Clean: S air filter element Apply compressed air to the outer surface of the air filter element.
-
Page 81: Checking The Carburetor Joints And Intake Manifolds
CLEANING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT/ CHECKING THE CARBURETOR JOINTS AND IN TAKE MANIFOLDS/ CHECKING THE FUEL HOSES AND FUEL FILTER NOTE: When installing the air filter element into the air filter case cover, be sure their sealing sur- faces are aligned to prevent any air leaks. 6.
-
Page 82: Checking The Crankcase Breather Hose
CHECKING THE CRANKCASE BREATHER HOSE/ CHECKING THE EXHAUST SYSTEM EB303190 CHECKING THE CRANKCASE BREATHER HOSE 1. Remove: S seat S fuel tank S carburetor 2. Check: S crankcase breather hose 1 Cracks/damage ! Replace. Loose connection ! Connect properly. CAUTION: Make sure that the crankcase breather hose is routed correctly.
-
Page 83: Checking The Coolant Level
CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL/ CHECKING THE COOLING SYSTEM EB303220 CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL 1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface. S Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand. S Make sure that the motorcycle is upright. 2. Remove: S side cover (right) 3.
-
Page 84: Changing The Coolant
CHANGING THE COOLANT EB303240 CHANGING THE COOLANT 1. Remove: S seat S fuel tank 2. Disconnect: S coolant reservoir hose 1 3. Drain: S coolant (from the coolant reservoir) 4. Remove: S radiator cap A hot radiator is under pressure. There- fore, do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.
-
Page 85
CHANGING THE COOLANT 9. Coonect: S coolant reservoir hose 10. Fill: S cooling system (with the specified amount of the recom- mended coolant) Recommended antifreeze High-quality ethylene glycol anti- freeze containing corrosion inhibi- tors for aluminum engines Mix ratio 50% antifreeze/50 % water Quantity Total amount 1.95 L… -
Page 86
CHANGING THE COOLANT 12. Fill: S coolant reservoir (with the recommended coolant to the maximum level mark a ) 13. Install: S coolant reservoir cap 14. Start the engine, warm it up for several min- utes, and then turn if off. 15. -
Page 87: Chassis
ADJUSTING THE FRONT BRAKE/ ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE EB304001 CHASSIS ADJUSTING THE FRONT BRAKE 1. Adjust: S brake lever position (distance a from the throttle grip to the brake lever) a. While pushing the brake lever forward, turn the adjusting dial 1 until the brake lever is in the desired position.
-
Page 88: Checking The Brake Fluid Level
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE/ CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL After adjusting the brake pedal position, check that the end of the adjusting bolt 2 is visible through the hole c . c. Tighten the locknut 1 to specification. A soft or spongy feeling in the brake ped- al can indicate the presence of air in the brake system.
-
Page 89: Adjusting The Rear Brake Light Switch
CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL / ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH S Use only the designated brake fluid. Other brake fluids may cause the rub- ber seals to deteriorate, causing leak- age and poor brake performance. S Refill with the same type of brake fluid that is already in the system.
-
Page 90: Checking The Brake Hoses
CHECKING THE BRAKE HOSES/ BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM EB304062 CHECKING THE BRAKE HOSES The following procedure applies to all of the brake hoses and clamps. 1. Check: S brake hose Cracks/damage/wear ! Replace. 2. Check: S brake hose clamp Loose connection ! Tighten.
-
Page 91: Adjusting The Shift Pedal
BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM/ ADJUSTING THE SHIFT PEDAL 2. Bleed: Front S hydraulic brake system a. Add the recommended brake fluid to the proper level. b. Install the diaphragm (brake master cylin- der reservoir or brake fluid reservoir). c. Connect a clear plastic hose 1 tightly to the bleed screw 2 .
-
Page 92: Adjusting The Drive Chain Slack
ADJUSTING THE DRIVE CHAIN SLACK EB304090 ADJUSTING THE DRIVE CHAIN SLACK NOTE: The drive chain slack must be checked at the tightest point on the chain. CAUTION: A drive chain that is too tight will over- load the engine and other vital parts, and one that is too loose can skip and dam- age the swingarm or cause an accident.
-
Page 93: Lubricating The Drive Chain
ADJUSTING THE DRIVE CHAIN SLACK/LUBRICATING THE DRIVE CHAIN/CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE STEERING HEAD c. Tighten the wheel axle nut to specifica- tion. Wheel axle nut 117 Nm (11.7 mSkg) Locknut 16 Nm (1.6 mSkg) EB304100 LUBRICATING THE DRIVE CHAIN The drive chain consists of many interacting parts.
-
Page 94: Checking And Adjusting The Steering Head
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE STEERING HEAD 4. Adjust: S steering head a. Remove the lock washer 1 , the upper ring nut 2 , and the rubber washer 3 . b. Loosen the lower ring nut 4 and then tighten it to specification with a ring nut wrench 5 .
-
Page 95: Checking The Front Fork
CHECKING ADJUSTING THE STEERING HEAD/CHECKING THE FRONT FORK/ADJUSTING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY 5. Install: S upper bracket S handlebar Steering stem nut 110 Nm (11.0 mSkg) Upper bracket pinch bolt 30 Nm (3.0 mSkg) Handlebar upper holder bolt 23 Nm (2.3 mSkg) EB304140 CHECKING THE FRONT FORK 1.
-
Page 96
ADJUSTING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY/CHECKING THE TIRES a. Turn the adjusting ring 1 in direction a or adjusting position b. Align the desired position on the adjusting ring with the stopper. ! Spring preload is Direction increased (suspension is harder). ! Spring preload is Direction decreased (suspension… -
Page 97: Checking The Tires
CHECKING THE TIRES Basic weight (with oil and a 210 kg full fuel tank) Maximum load 187 kg Cold tire Front tire Rear tire pressure 225 kPa 250 kPa Up to 90 kg load* (2.25 (2.50 kg / cm kg / cm 225 kPa 280 kPa 90 kg maximum…
-
Page 98: Checking The Wheels
No guarantee concerning han- dling characteristics can be given if a tire combination other than one ap- proved by Yamaha is used on this mo- torcycle. Front tire Manufacturer Size…
-
Page 99: Checking And Lubricating The Cables
CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THE CABLES / LUBRICATING THE LEVERS AND PEDALS / LUBRICATING THE SIDESTAND/ LUBRICATING THE CENTER STAND/ LUBRICATING THE REAR SUSPENSION EB304200 CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THE CABLES The following procedure applies to all of the cable sheaths and cables. Damaged cable sheaths may cause the cable to corrode and interfere with its movement.
-
Page 100: Electrical System
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY EB305020 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY Batteries generate explosive hydrogen gas and contain electrolyte which is made of poisonous and highly caustic sulfuric acid. Therefore, always follow these preven- tive measures: S Wear protective eye gear when han- dling or working near batteries.
-
Page 101
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY NOTE: Since MF batteries are sealed, it is not pos- sible to check the charge state of the battery by measuring the specific gravity of the elec- trolyte. Therefore, the charge of the battery has to be checked by measuring the voltage at the battery terminals. -
Page 102
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY Do not quick charge a battery. S Make sure that the battery vent is free of obstructions. S Never remove the MF battery sealing caps. S Do not use a high-rate battery charger. They force a high-amperage current into the battery quickly and can cause battery overheating and battery plate damage. -
Page 103
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY Charging method using a variable-current (voltage) type charger Measure the open-circuit NOTE: voltage prior to charging. Voltage should be measured 30 minutes after the machine is stopped. Connect a charged and NOTE: AMP meter to the battery Set the charging voltage at 16 X 17 V. -
Page 104
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY Charging method using a constant-voltage type charger Measure the open-circuit NOTE: voltage prior to charging. Voltage should be measured 30 minutes after the machine is stopped. Connect a charger and AMP meter to the battery and start charging. -
Page 105: Checking The Fuses
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY/ CHECKING THE FUSES 6. Install: S battery 7. Connect: S battery leads (to the battery terminals) CAUTION: First, connect the positive lead 1 , then the negative lead 2 . 8. Check: S battery terminals Dirt ! Clean with a wire brush.
-
Page 106
CHECKING THE FUSES/ REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BLUBS 3. Replace: S blown fuse a. Turn off the ignition. b. Install a new fuse of the correct amperage rating. c. Turn on the switches to verify if the electri- cal circuit is operational. d. -
Page 107: Replacing The Headlight Bulbs
REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULBS/ ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAMS 2. Remove: S headlight bulb holder 1 3. Remove: S headlight bulb 2 Since the headlight bulb gets extremely hot, keep flammable products and your hands away from the bulb until it has cooled down.
-
Page 108
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAMS 2. Adjust: S headlight beam (horizontally) a. Turn the adjusting knob 2 4 in direction a or b . Left headlight 2 ! Headlight beam Direction moves to the right. ! Headlight beam Direction moves to the left. Right headlight 4 ! Headlight beam Direction… -
Page 111
CHAPTER 4 OVERHAULING THE ENGINE REMOVING THE ENGINE ……….DRIVE SPROCKET AND EXHAUST PIPE . -
Page 112
AC MAGNETO AND STARTER CLUTCH ……..4-41 STATOR COIL . -
Page 113: Overhauling The Engine
REMOVING THE ENGINE OVERHAULING THE ENGINE REMOVING THE ENGINE DRIVE SPROCKET AND EXHAUST PIPE 25 Nm (2.5 mSkg) 70 Nm (7.0 mSkg) 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) 17 Nm (1.7 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the drive sprocket and…
-
Page 114
REMOVING THE ENGINE 25 Nm (2.5 mSkg) 70 Nm (7.0 mSkg) 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) 17 Nm (1.7 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Shift arm Refer to “INSTALLING THE ENGINE” Drive sprocket cover section. -
Page 115: Leads And Hoses
REMOVING THE ENGINE LEADS AND HOSES Engine right side Engine left side 12 Nm (1.2 mSkg) 12 Nm (1.2 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Disconnecting the leads and hoses Disconnect the parts in the order listed. Magneto/sidestand/neutral/engine oil 1/1/1/1 level switch lead Ground lead…
-
Page 116: Engine Bracket And Engine
REMOVING THE ENGINE ENGINE BRACKET AND ENGINE 33 Nm (3.3 mSkg) 55 Nm (5.5 mSkg) 33 Nm (3.3 mSkg) 55 Nm (5.5 mSkg) 33 Nm (3.3 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the engine bracket and Remove the parts in the order listed. engine Engine mounting bolt (front left) Engine mounting bolt (front right)
-
Page 117: Installing The Engine
REMOVING THE ENGINE EB400700 INSTALLING THE ENGINE 1. Install: S bolt 1 S bolt 2 S bolt 3 S bolt 4 S engine bracket 5 S engine bracket 6 NOTE: Do not fully tighten the bolts. 2. Tighten the bolts in the following order. Bolt 1 55 Nm (5.5 mSkg) Bolt 2…
-
Page 118: Camshaft
CAMSHAFT CAMSHAFT CYLINDER HEAD COVERS 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) 9 Nm (0.9 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the cylinder head cover Remove the parts in the order listed. Front cowling Refer to “FRONT COWLING/SEAT/ SIDE COVER/FUEL TANK” section Seat and fuel tank in chapter 3.
-
Page 119: Camshafts
CAMSHAFT CAMSHAFT 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) 20 Nm (2.0 mSkg) 13 Nm (1.3 mSkg) 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the camshafts Remove the parts in the order listed. Spark plug Magneto cover Timing chain guide (upper) Timing chain tensioner assembly…
-
Page 120: Removing The Camshafts
CAMSHAFT EB401102 REMOVING THE CAMSHAFTS 1. Remove: S magneto cover 2. Align: S “T” mark on the magneto rotor (with the stationary pointer on the crank- case) a. Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise. b. When piston #1 is at TDC on the com- pression stroke, align the “T”…
-
Page 121: Checking The Camshafts
CAMSHAFT CAUTION: To prevent damage to the cylinder head, camshafts or camshaft caps, loosen the camshaft cap bolts in stages and in a crisscross pattern, working from the out- side in. 8. Remove: S intake camshaft 1 S exhaust camshaft 2 NOTE: To prevent the timing chain from falling into the crankcase, fasten it with a wire 3 .
-
Page 122: Checking The Timing Chain, Camshaft Sprockets, And Timing Chain Guides
CAMSHAFT 4. Measure: S camshaft-journal-to-camshaft-cap clear- ance Out of specification ! Measure the cam- shaft journal diameter. Camshaft-journal-to- camshaft-cap clearance 0.08 mm a. Install the camshaft into the cylinder head (without the dowel pins and camshaft caps). b. Position a strip of Plastigauge 1 onto the camshaft journal as shown.
-
Page 123: Checking The Timing Chain Tensioner
CAMSHAFT EB401430 CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER 1. Check: S timing chain tensioner Cracks/damage ! Replace. 2. Check: S one-way cam operation Rough movement ! Replace the timing chain tensioner housing. 3. Check: S cap bolt 1 S copper washer 2 S ball 3 S spring 4 S ball 5…
-
Page 124
CAMSHAFT CAUTION: The camshaft cap bolts must be tight- ened evenly or damage to the cylinder head, camshaft caps, and camshafts will result. Camshaft cap bolt 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) 4. Install: S intake camshaft sprocket S exhaust camshaft sprocket a. -
Page 125
CAMSHAFT Always use a new gasket. Timing chain tensioner bolt 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) d. Install the springs 3 , washer 2 , and cap bolt 1 . Cap bolt 20 Nm (2.0 mSkg) 7. Turn: S crankshaft (several full turns counterclockwise) 8. -
Page 126: Cylinder Head
CYLINDER HEAD CYLINDER HEAD 35 Nm (3.5 mSkg) 20 Nm (2.0 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the cylinder head Remove the parts in the order listed. Camshaft Refer to “CAMSHAFT”section. Union bolt Copper washer Oil delivery pipe Cylinder head Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE Cylinder head gasket…
-
Page 127: Removing The Cylinder Heads
CYLINDER HEAD EB402101 REMOVING THE CYLINDER HEADS 1. Remove: S cylinder head nuts NOTE: S Loosen the nuts in the proper sequence as shown. S Loosen each nut 1/2 of a turn at a time. After all of the nuts are fully loosened, re- move them.
-
Page 128: Installing The Cylinder Head
CYLINDER HEAD EB402702 INSTALLING THE CYLINDER HEAD 1. Install: S gasket (New) 1 S dowel pins 2 NOTE: The “UP” mark a on the gasket must face 2. Install: S cylinder head NOTE: S Apply engine oil onto the threads of the cyl- inder head nuts.
-
Page 129: Valves And Valve Springs
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the valves and valve Remove the parts in the order listed. springs Camshaft Refer to “CAMSHAFT” section. Cylinder head Refer to “CYLINDER HEAD” section. Valve lifter Adjusting pad Valve cotters Upper spring seat…
-
Page 130: Removing The Valves
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS EB403100 REMOVING THE VALVES The following procedure applies to all of the valves and related components. NOTE: Before removing the internal parts of the cylinder head (e.g., valves, valve springs, valve seats), make sure that the valves properly seal.
-
Page 131: Checking The Valves And Valve Guides
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS EB403400 CHECKING THE VALVES AND VALVE GUIDES The following procedure applies to all of the valves and valve guides. 1. Measure: S valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance Valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance = Valve guide inside diameter – Valve stem diameter Out of specification ! Replace the valve guide.
-
Page 132: Checking The Valve Seats
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS 4. Check: S valve face Pitting/wear ! Grind the valve face. S valve stem end Mushroom shape of diameter larger than the body of the valve stem ! Replace the valve. 5. Measure: S valve margin thickness a Out of specification ! Replace the valve.
-
Page 133
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS a. Apply Mechanic’s blueing dye (Dykem) b onto the valve face. b. Install the valve into the cylinder head. c. Press the valve through the valve guide and onto the valve seat to make a clear pattern. -
Page 134: Checking The Valve Springs
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS EB403420 CHECKING THE VALVE SPRINGS The following procedure applies to all of the valve springs. 1. Measure: S valve spring free length a Out of specification ! Replace the valve spring. Valve spring free length (intake and exhaust) Spring 40.09 mm (Limit 37.5 mm) 2.
-
Page 135: Checking The Camshaft Cap
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS EB403440 CHECKING THE CAMSHAFT CAP 1. Check: S camshaft case S camshaft caps 1 Cracks/damage ! Replace th camshaft case and camshaft caps as a set, and check the camshafts (Refer to “CHECK- ING THE CAMSHAFTS”.). S camshaft bearing surfaces 2 Damage/pitting/scratches ! Replace the camshaft case and camshaft caps as a…
-
Page 136
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS Valve spring compressor 90890-04019 Attachment 90890-04114 5. To secure the valve cotters 1 onto the a valve stem, lightly tap the valve tip with a soft-face hammer. CAUTION: Hitting the valve tip with excessive force could damage the valve. 6. -
Page 137: Cylinder And Piston
CYLINDER AND PISTON CYLINDER AND PISTON 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the cylinder and pistons Remove the parts in the order listed. Cylinder head Refer to “CYLINDER HEAD” section. Water jacket joint O-ring Cylinder Cylinder gasket Refer to “INSTALLING THE PISTON AND Dowel pin…
-
Page 138: Removing The Cylinders And Pistons
CYLINDER AND PISTON EB404101 REMOVING THE CYLINDERS AND PISTONS The following procedure applies to all of the cyl- inders and pistons. 1. Remove: S piston pin clip 1 S piston pin 2 S piston 3 CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to drive the piston pin out.
-
Page 139: Checking The Piston Rings
CYLINDER AND PISTON Standard Wear limit Cylinder 62.00 X 62.01 62.1 mm bore “C” X + Y “C” = b. If out of specification, replace the cylin- der, piston and piston rings as a set. c. Measure piston skirt diameter “P” with the micrometer.
-
Page 140: Checking The Piston Pins
CYLINDER AND PISTON 2. Install: S piston ring 1 (into the cylinder) NOTE: Level the piston ring in the cylinder with the piston crown as shown. 20 mm 3. Measure: S piston ring end gap Out of specification ! Replace the piston ring.
-
Page 141: Installing The Piston And Cylinder
CYLINDER AND PISTON 3. Calculate: S piston-pin-to-piston clearance Out of specification ! Replace the piston pin. Piston-pin-to-piston clearance = Piston pin bore size b – Piston pin outside diameter a Piston-pin-to-piston clearance 0.011 X 0.013 mm <Limit>: 0.023 mm EB404701 INSTALLING THE PISTON AND CYLINDER The following procedure applies to all of the pis- tons and cylinders.
-
Page 142
CYLINDER AND PISTON 5. Offset: S piston ring end gaps Top ring Lower oil ring rail Upper oil ring rail 2nd ringe Oil ring expander 6. Install: S cylinder 1 S O-ring 2 NOTE: S First, install pistons #2 and #3. S Pass the timing chain and timing chain guide (exhaust side) through the timing chain cavity. -
Page 143: Clutch
CLUTCH CLUTCH CLUTCH COVER 12 Nm (1.2 mSkg) 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the clutch cover Remove the parts in the order listed. Drain the engine oil Refer to “CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL” section in chapter 3. Clutch cover Clutch cover gasket Dowel pin…
-
Page 144: Clutch
CLUTCH CLUTCH 70 Nm (7.0 mSkg) 8 Nm (0.8 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the clutch Remove the parts in the order listed. Compression spring Pressure plate Short clutch push rod O-ring Ball Long clutch push rod Refer to “INSTALLING THE CLUTCH”…
-
Page 145
CLUTCH 70 Nm (7.0 mSkg) 8 Nm (0.8 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Lock washer Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING Clutch boss THE CLUTCH” section. Thrust washer Refer to “INSTALLING THE CLUTCH” section. Spacer Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING Bearing THE CLUTCH” section. Clutch housing Refer to “INSTALLING THE CLUTCH”… -
Page 146: Removing The Clutch
CLUTCH EB405100 REMOVING THE CLUTCH 1. Straighten the lock washer tab. 2. Loosen: S clutch boss nut 1 NOTE: While holding the clutch boss 2 with the uni- versal clutch holder 3 , loosen the clutch boss nut. Universal clutch holder 3 90890-04086 3.
-
Page 147: Checking The Clutch Springs
CLUTCH EB405420 CHECKING THE CLUTCH SPRINGS The following procedure applies to all of the clutch springs. 1. Check: S clutch spring Damage ! Replace the clutch springs as a set. 2. Measure: S clutch spring free length a Out of specification ! Replace the clutch springs as a set.
-
Page 148: Checking The Clutch Boss
CLUTCH EB405450 CHECKING THE CLUTCH BOSS 1. Check: S clutch boss splines 1 Damage/pitting/wear ! Replace the clutch boss. NOTE: Pitting on the clutch boss splines will cause erratic clutch operation. EB405450 CHECKING THE PRESSURE PLATE 1. Check: S pressure plate 1 Cracks/damage ! Replace.
-
Page 149
CLUTCH 2. Tighten: S clutch boss nut 1 70 Nm (7.0 mSkg) NOTE: While holding the clutch boss with the uni- versal clutch holder 2 , tighten the clutch boss nut. Universal clutch holder 90890-04086 3. Bend the lock washer 3 tab along a flat side of the nut. -
Page 150
CLUTCH 9. Install: S clutch cover 1 12 Nm (1.2 mSkg) NOTE: Tighten the clutch cover bolts in stages and in a crisscross pattern. 4-38… -
Page 151: Shift Shaft
SHIFT SHAFT SHIFT SHAFT Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the shift shaft Remove the parts in the order listed. Oil pump Refer to “OIL PUMP” section. Drive sprocket cover Refer to “REMOVING THE ENGINE” section. Collar Shift shaft Shift lever spring Refer to “INSTALLING THE SHIFT Stopper lever…
-
Page 152: Checking The Shift Shaft
SHIFT SHAFT EB408400 CHECKING THE SHIFT SHAFT 1. Check: S shift shaft 1 S shift lever 2 Bends/damage/wear ! Replace. S shift lever spring 3 S stopper lever spring 4 Damage/wear ! Replace. EB408700 INSTALLING THE SHIFT SHAFT 1. Install: S stopper lever 1 S stopper lever spring 2 S shift shaft lever…
-
Page 153: Stator Coil
AC MAGNETO AND STARTER CLUTCH AC MAGNETO AND STARTER CLUTCH STATOR COIL 5 Nm (0.5 mSkg) 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) 12 Nm (1.2 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the stator coil Remove the parts in the order listed. Seat Refer to “FRONT COWLING/SEAT/ Fuel tank…
-
Page 154: Starter Clutch
AC MAGNETO AND STARTER CLUTCH STARTER CLUTCH 12 Nm (1.2 mSkg) 80 Nm (8.0 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the starter clutch Remove the parts in the order listed. Generator cover Starter clutch cover Dowel pin Gasket Starter clutch assembly Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE STARTER CLUTCH”…
-
Page 155: Ac Magneto Rotor
AC MAGNETO AND STARTER CLUTCH AC MAGNETO ROTOR 130 Nm (13.0 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the generator roter Remove the parts in the order listed. Bolt/washer Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING Rotor THE AC MAGNETO” section. Woodruff key For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
-
Page 156: Removing The Starter Clutch
AC MAGNETO AND STARTER CLUTCH EB410100 REMOVING THE STARTER CLUTCH 1. Remove: S starter clutch cover 1 NOTE: Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a time, in stages and in a crisscross pattern. After all of the bolts are fully loosened, remove them. 2.
-
Page 157: Checking The Starter Clutch
AC MAGNETO AND STARTER CLUTCH 2. Remove: S AC magneto rotor 1 S Woodruff key NOTE: Use a flywheel puller 2 to remove the AC magneto rotor 1 . Flywheel puller: 90890-01362 EB410401 CHECKING THE STARTER CLUTCH 1. Check: S starter clutch idle gear 1 S starter clutch drive gear 2 S starter clutch gear 3 Burrs/chips/roughness/wear ! Replace…
-
Page 158: Installing The Ac Magneto
AC MAGNETO AND STARTER CLUTCH INSTALLING THE AC MAGNETO 1. Install: S Woodruff key 1 S AC magneto rotor 2 S Bolt (AC magneto rotor) NOTE: S Clean the tapered portion of the crankshaft and the AC magneto rotor. S When installing the AC magneto rotor, make sure that the woodruff key is properly seated in the key way of the crankshaft.
-
Page 159: Oil Pan And Oil Strainer
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER OIL STRAINER 7 Nm (0.7 mSkg) 43 Nm (4.3 mSkg) 12 Nm (1.2 mSkg) 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) 63 Nm (6.3 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the oil strainer Remove the parts in the order listed.
-
Page 160: Oil Pump
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER OIL PUMP 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the oil pump Remove the parts in the order listed. Clutch Refer to “CLUTCH” section. Oil pump assembly Refer to “INSTALLING THE OIL PUMP” Oil pump gasket section.
-
Page 161
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Disassembling the oil pump Disassembly the parts in the order listed. Oil pump rotor housing Dowel pin Inner rotor/outer rotor Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE OIL PUMP” Dowel pin section. Oil pump shaft assembly Oil pump cover Washer… -
Page 162: Removing The Oil Pan
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER EB411100 REMOVING THE OIL PAN 1. Remove: S oil level switch 1 S oil pan 2 S gasket S dowel pins NOTE: Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a time, in stages and in a crisscross pattern. After all of the bolts are fully loosened, remove them.
-
Page 163: Checking The Oil Strainer
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER EB411430 CHECKING THE OIL STRAINER 1. Check: S oil strainer 1 Damage ! Replace. Contaminants ! Clean with engine oil. EB411470 CHECKING THE OIL NOZZLE 1. Check: S oil nozzle 1 S check ball 2 Damage/wear ! Replace the oil nozzle.
-
Page 164: Installing The Oil Pump
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER EB411710 INSTALLING THE OIL PUMP Install: S oil pump 1 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) CAUTION: After tightening the bolts, make sure that the oil pump turns smoothly. NOTE: Align the projection a on the oil pump shaft with the slot b on the water pump shaft.
-
Page 165
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER NOTE: S Tighten the oil pan bolts in stages and in a crisscross pattern. S Lubricate the oil level switch’s O-ring with engine oil. Oil pan bolt 12 Nm (1.2 mSkg) Oil level switch bolt 7 Nm (0.7 mSkg) 4-53… -
Page 166: Crankcase
CRANKCASE CRANKCASE 24 Nm (2.4 mSkg) 12 Nm (1.2 mSkg) 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) 24 Nm (2.4 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Disassembling the crankcase Disassembly the parts in the order listed. Engine Refer to “REMOVING THE ENGINE” section.
-
Page 167: Assembling The Crankcase
CRANKCASE 24 Nm (2.4 mSkg) 12 Nm (1.2 mSkg) 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) 24 Nm (2.4 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks O-ring Upper crankcase Refer to “DISASSEMBLING/ Dowel pin ASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE” Oil seal section. Oil jet O-ring For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
-
Page 168
CRANKCASE EB412100 DISASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE 1. Remove: S crankcase bolts 1 X A Upper crankcase NOTE: S Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a time, in stages and in a crisscross pattern. After all of the bolts are fully loosened, remove them. -
Page 169
Recommended lubricant Engine oil 2. Apply: S sealant (onto the crankcase mating surfaces) Yamaha bond No. 1215 90890-85505 NOTE: Do not allow any sealant to come into con- tact with the oil gallery or crankshaft journal bearings. Do not apply sealant to within 2 X 3 mm of the crankshaft journal bearings. -
Page 170
CRANKCASE 7. Install: S upper crankcase bolts S lower crankcase bolts NOTE: S Lubricate the bolt threads with engine oil. S Tighten the bolts in increasing numerical order. S Install washers on bolts 1 X S Install the cable holder on bolt #35. A Upper crankcase B Lower crankcase M8 bolt… -
Page 171: Crankshaft
CRANKSHAFT CRANKSHAFT 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the crankshaft Remove the parts in the order listed. Disassembly the crankcase Refer to “CRANKCASE” section. Timing chain guide (intake side) Crankshaft assembly Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE Oil seal CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY”…
-
Page 172: Connecting Rod
CRANKSHAFT CONNECTING ROD 15 Nm (1.5 mSkg) + 90_ Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the connecting rod Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to “INSTALLING THE Connecting rod bolt CONNECTING RODS” section. Connecting rod Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING Connecting rod cap THE CONNECTING RODS”…
-
Page 173: Removing The Crankshaft Assembly
CRANKSHAFT EB412110 REMOVING THE CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY 1. Remove: S crankshaft assembly 1 S crankshaft journal upper bearing 2 (from the upper crankcase) S timing chain guide (intake side) NOTE: Identify the position of each crankshaft jour- nal upper bearing so that it can be reinstalled in its original place.
-
Page 174
CRANKSHAFT Crankshaft-journal-to-crank- shaft-journal-bearing clearance 0.025 X 0.043 mm Limit 0.08 mm CAUTION: Do not interchange the crankshaft jour- nal bearings. To obtain the correct crank- shaft journal-to-crankshaft-journal-bear- clearance prevent engine damage, the crankshaft journal bearings must be installed in their original posi- tion. -
Page 175
CRANKSHAFT f. Tighten the bolts to specification in the tightening sequence cast on the crank- case. Crankcase bolt 24 Nm (2.4 mSkg) 12 Nm (1.2 mSkg) A Upper crankcase B Lower crankcase NOTE: Lubricate the crankcase bolt threads (M8) and (M6) with engine oil. g. -
Page 176
CRANKSHAFT For example, if the crankcase “J ” and crankshaft web “J1” numbers are “6” and “2” respectively, then the bearing size for “J1” is: Bearing size for J1: (crankcase) – J1 (crankshaft web) + 1 = 6 – 2 + 1 = 5 (yellow) CRANKSHAFT JOURNAL BEARING… -
Page 177
CRANKSHAFT NOTE: S Do not move the connecting rod or crank- shaft until the clearance measurement has been completed. S Apply molybdenum disulfide grease onto the bolts, threads, and nut seats. S Make sure that the “Y” mark c on the con- necting rod faces towards the left side of the crankshaft. -
Page 178: Installing The Connecting Rods
CRANKSHAFT For example, if the connecting rod “P ” and the crankshaft web “P1” numbers are “4” and “1” respectively, then the bearing size for “P ” is: Bearing size for P (connecting rod) – P1 (crankshaft- web) = 4 – 1 = 3 (brown) BIG END BEARING COLOR CODE…
-
Page 179
CRANKSHAFT 4. Align: S bolt heads 1 (with the connecting rod caps) 5. Tighten: S Nuts (connecting rod) Nut (connecting rod): 15 Nm (1.5 mSkg) + (turn the nut another 90_) a. Replace the connecting rod bolts and nuts with new ones. CAUTION: Tighten the connecting rod bolts using the plastic-region tightening angle meth-… -
Page 180: Installing The Crankshaft
CRANKSHAFT EB412720 INSTALLING THE CRANKSHAFT 1. Install: S crankshaft journal upper bearings 1 (into the upper crankcase) NOTE: S Align the projections a on the crankshaft journal upper bearings with the notches b in the crankcase. S Be sure to install each crankshaft journal upper bearing in its original place.
-
Page 181: Transmission
TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the transmission Remove the parts in the order listed. Disassembly the crankcase Refer to “CRANKCASE” section. Main axle assembly Refer to “INSTALLING THE Circlip TRANSMISSION” section. Bearing Bearing Drive axle assembly Refer to “INSTALLING THE Circlip TRANSMISSION”…
-
Page 182
TRANSMISSION Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Disassembling the transmission Disassembly the parts in the order listed. 1st wheel gear 5th wheel gear Circlip Washer 4th wheel gear 3rd wheel gear 6th wheel gear 2nd wheel gear Washer Circlip Drive axle 2nd pinion gear 6th pinion gear 4-70… -
Page 183
TRANSMISSION Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks 3rd/4th pinion gear Circlip Washer Main axle For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. 4-71… -
Page 184: Checking The Transmission
TRANSMISSION EB413422 CHECKING THE TRANSMISSION 1. Measure: S main axle runout (with a centering device and dial gauge Out of specification ! Replace the main axle. Main axle runout limit 0.02 mm 2. Measure: S drive axle runout (with a centering device and dial gauge Out of specification ! Replace the drive axle.
-
Page 185: Installing The Transmission
TRANSMISSION EB413710 INSTALLING THE TRANSMISSION 1. Install: S oil baffle plate 1 S crankcase breather hose 2 NOTE: Insert the metal clamp 3 on the crankcase breather hose into the slots 4 in the crank- case. 2. Install: S main axle assembly 1 S drive axle assembly 2 S oil seals S circlips…
-
Page 186: Shift Drum And Shift Forks
SHIFT DRUM AND SHIFT FORKS SHIFT DRUM AND SHIFT FORKS 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the shift drum and Remove the parts in the order listed. shift forks Disassembly the crankcase Refer to “CRANKCASE”…
-
Page 187: Checking The Shift Forks
SHIFT DRUM AND SHIFT FORKS EB413400 CHECKING THE SHIFT FORKS The following procedure applies to all of the shift forks and related components. 1. Check: S shift fork cam follower 1 S shift fork pawl 2 Bends/damage/scoring/wear ! Replace the shift fork. 2.
-
Page 188
SHIFT DRUM AND SHIFT FORKS 2. Install: S shift fork guide bars 1 S shift fork “L” 2 S shift fork “C” 3 S shift fork “R” 4 NOTE: S The embossed marks on the shift forks should face towards the left side of the en- gine and be in the following sequence: “L”, “C”, “R”. -
Page 189
COOL… -
Page 190
COOL CHAPTER 5 COOLING SYSTEM RADIATOR …………. . . CHECKING THE RADIATOR . -
Page 191
COOL… -
Page 192: Cooling System
COOL RADIATOR COOLING SYSTEM RADIATOR 7 Nm (0.7 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the radiator Remove the parts in the order listed. Seat Refer to “FRONT COWLING/SEAT/SIDE Fuel tank COVER/FUEL TANK” section in chapter Drain the coolant Refer to “CHANGING THE COOLANT”…
-
Page 193
COOL RADIATOR EB500010 CHECKING THE RADIATOR 1. Check: S radiator fins Obstruction ! Clean. Apply compressed air to the rear of the ra- diator. Damage ! Repair or replace. NOTE: Straighten any flattened fins with a thin, flat- head screwdriver. 2. -
Page 194
COOL RADIATOR EB500020 INSTALLING THE RADIATOR 1. Fill: S cooling system (with the specified amount of the recom- mended coolant) Refer to “CHANGING THE COOLANT” in chapter 3. 2. Check: S cooling system Leaks ! Repair or replace any faulty part. a. -
Page 195
COOL THERMOSTAT THERMOSTAT 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the thermostat Remove the parts in the order listed. Seat Refer to “FRONT COWLING/SEAT/ Fuel tank SIDE COVER/FUEL TANK” section in chapter 3. Drain the coolant Refer to “CHANGING THE COOLANT”… -
Page 196
COOL THERMOSTAT 23 Nm (2.3 mSkg) 8 Nm (0.8 mSkg) 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Disassembling the thermostat Disassembly the parts in the order listed. Thermo switch (fan motor) Thermo switch (engine temperature) Thermostat housing cover Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE O-ring THERMOSTAT”… -
Page 197
COOL THERMOSTAT EB502021 CHECKING THE THERMOSTAT 1. Check: S thermostat 1 Does not open at 80.5 X 83.5_C ! Replace. a. Suspend the thermostat in a container filled with water. b. Slowly heat the water. c. Place a thermometer in the water. d. -
Page 198
COOL THERMOSTAT EB502030 ASSEMBLING THE THERMOSTAT 1. Install: S thermostat housing 1 S thermostat 2 S O-ring (New) 3 S thermostat housing cover 4 NOTE: Install the thermostat with its breather hole a facing up. 2. Install: S thermo switch (fan motor) 1 23 Nm (2.3 mSkg) S thermo switch (engine temperature) 2 8 Nm (0.8 mSkg) -
Page 199: Water Pump
COOL WATER PUMP WATER PUMP 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the water pump Remove the parts in the order listed. Drain the coolant Refer to “CHANGING THE COOLANT” section in chapter 3. Shift arm, drive chain cover Refer to “REMOVING THE ENGINE”…
-
Page 200
COOL WATER PUMP EB503020 REMOVING THE WATER PUMP 1. Remove: S water pump housing 1 NOTE: Tap out the water pump seal from the inside of the water pump housing. EB503032 CHECKING THE WATER PUMP 1. Check: S water pump housing cover S water pump housing 1 S impeller 2 2. -
Page 201
COOL WATER PUMP NOTE: S Align the slot a on the impeller shaft with the projection b on the oil pump shaft. S Before installing the water pump housing, apply a thin coat of lithium soap base grease onto the O-ring. 2. -
Page 202
CARB… -
Page 203
CARB CHAPTER 6 CARBURETORS CARBURETORS …………AIR FILTER CASE . -
Page 204
CARB… -
Page 205
CARB CARBURETORS CARBURETORS CARBURETORS AIR FILTER CASE Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the air filter case Remove the parts in the order listed. Seat, fueltank and sidecovers Refer to “FRONT COWLING/SEAT/ SIDE COVER/FUEL TANK” section in chapter 3. Drain the coolant Refer to “CHANGING THE COOLANT”… -
Page 206
CARB CARBURETORS CARBURETORS Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the carburetors Remove the parts in the order listed. NOTE: Throttle position sensor lead Air filter joint screw Disconnect the coupler. Carburetors joint screw Carburetor inlet/outlet hose Carburetors assembly Starter cable Throttle cable For installation, reverse the removal procedure. -
Page 207
CARB CARBURETORS Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Disassembling the carburetors Disassembly the parts in the order listed. Starter plunger link Carburetors assembly #1, #2, #3, #4 Vacuum chamber cover Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE Piston valve spring CARBURETERS” section. Piston valve Needle kit Float chamber Float chamber gasket… -
Page 208
CARB CARBURETORS Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Main jet holder Needle jet Pilot jet Pilot screw set Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE CARBURETORS” section. Starter plunger kit For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. -
Page 209
CARB CARBURETORS EB600031 CHECKING THE CARBURETORS The following procedure applies to all of the car- buretors. 1. Check: S carburetor body S float chamber S main jet holder Cracks/damage ! Replace. 2. Check: S fuel passages Obstruction ! Clean. a. Wash the carburetor in a petroleumbased solvent. -
Page 210
CARB CARBURETORS 8. Check: S piston valve 1 Damage/scratches/wear ! Replace. S rubber diaphragm 2 Cracks/tears ! Replace. 9. Check: S vacuum chamber cover 1 S piston valve spring 2 S jet needle holder 3 Cracks/damage ! Replace. 10. Check: S jet needle kit 1 S needle jet 2 S main jet 3… -
Page 211
CARB CARBURETORS EB600041 ASSEMBLING THE CARBURETORS The following procedure applies to all of the car- buretors. CAUTION: S Before assembling the carburetors, wash all of the parts in a petroleum- based solvent. S Always use a new gasket. 1. Install: S O-ring (New) S washer S pilot screw spring… -
Page 212
CARB CARBURETORS 4. Install: S fuel feed joints 1 S hose joints 2 S spacer 3 S connecting bolt 4 S starter plunger link 5 S throttle cable holder 6 S spacer 7 S connecting bolt 8 NOTE: S Do not tighten the connecting bolts yet. S Install the throttle arm 9 onto carburetors #1, #2, and #4 between the spring synchronizing screw… -
Page 213
CARB CARBURETORS EB600062 MEASURING AND ADJUSTING THE FUEL LEVEL 1. Measure: S fuel level a Out of specification ! Adjust Fuel level (above the float chamber mating surface) 4.5 mm a. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface. b. Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand to ensure that the motorcycle is standing straight up. -
Page 214
CARB CARBURETORS EB600070 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR NOTE: S Before adjusting the throttle position sen- sor, the engine idling speed should be properly adjusted. S When installing the throttle position sen- sor, adjust its angle according to the RPM which is displayed on the tachometer. -
Page 215
CARB CARBURETORS b. Disconnect the throttle position sensor coupler. c. Reconnect the throttle position sensor coupler. NOTE: After reconnecting the throttle position sen- sor coupler, the tachometer switches to the throttle position sensor adjustment mode. d. Loosen the throttle position sensor screws 1 . -
Page 216
CARB 6-12… -
Page 217
CHAS… -
Page 218
CHAS CHAPTER 7 CHASSIS FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISCS ……..FRONT WHEEL . -
Page 219
CHAS STEERING HEAD …………7-53 LOWER BRACKET . -
Page 220: Front Wheel And Brake Discs
CHAS FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC CHASSIS FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC 40 Nm(4.0 mSkg) 67 Nm (6.7 mSkg) 20 Nm (2.0 mSkg) 23 Nm(2.3 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the flont wheel and brake Remove the parts in the order listed. discs Wheel axle pinch bolt NOTE:…
-
Page 221: Front Wheel
CHAS FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC FRONT WHEEL Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Disassembling the front wheel Disassembly the parts in the order listed. Oil seal Bearing Spacer Bearing For assembly, reverse the disassembly prodedure.
-
Page 222: Removing The Front Wheel
CHAS FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC EB700102 REMOVING THE FRONT WHEEL 1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface. Securely support the motorcycle so that there is no danger of it falling over. NOTE: Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand so that the front wheel is elevated.
-
Page 223
CHAS FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC 3. Measure: S front wheel radial runout 1 S front wheel lateral runout 2 Over the specified limits ! Replace. Front wheel radial runout limit 1.0 mm Front wheel lateral runout limit 0.5 mm 4. -
Page 224: Checking The Brake Discs
CHAS FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC EB700414 CHECKING THE BRAKE DISCS The following procedure applies to all of the brake discs. 1. Check: S brake disc Damage/galling ! Replace. 2. Measure: S brake disc deflection a Out of specification ! Correct the brake disc deflection or replace the brake disc.
-
Page 225: Installing The Front Wheel
CHAS FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC EB700722 INSTALLING THE FRONT WHEEL 1. Lubricate: S wheel axle S wheel bearings S oil seal lips Recommended lubricant Lithium soap base grease 2. Install: S Speed sensor unit NOTE: Make sure that the speed sensor unit and the wheel hud are installed with the two pro- jections a meshed into the two slots b re- spectively.
-
Page 226: Adjusting The Front Wheel Static Balance
CHAS FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC EB700901 ADJUSTING THE FRONT WHEEL STATIC BALANCE NOTE: S After replacing the tire. wheel or both, the front wheel static balance should be ad- justed. S Adjust the front wheel static balance with the brake discs installed. 1.
-
Page 227: Rear Wheel, Brake Disc And Rear Wheel Sprocket
REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISC CHAS AND REAR WHEEL SPROCKET REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISC AND REAR WHEEL SPROCKET REAR WHEEL 117 Nm (11.7 mSkg) 40 Nm (4.0 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the rear wheel Remove the parts in the order listed. Brake caliper Washer Wheel axle…
-
Page 228: Brake Disc And Rear Wheel Sprocket
REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISC CHAS AND REAR WHEEL SPROCKET BRAKE DISC AND REAR WHEEL SPROCKET 60 Nm (6.0 mSkg) 23 Nm (2.3 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the brake disk and rear Remove the parts in the order listed. wheel sprocket Collar (left/right) Brake disc…
-
Page 229
REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISC CHAS AND REAR WHEEL SPROCKET DIASSEMBLY THE REAR WHEEL Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Disassembling the rear wheel Disassembly the parts in the order listed. Oil seal Bearing Collar Bearing For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. -
Page 230: Removing The Rear Wheel
REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISC CHAS AND REAR WHEEL SPROCKET EB701100 REMOVING THE REAR WHEEL 1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface. Securely support the motorcycle so. that there is no danger of it falling over. NOTE: Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand so that the rear wheel is elevated.
-
Page 231: Checking And Replacing The Rear Wheel Sprocket
REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISC CHAS AND REAR WHEEL SPROCKET 3. Measure: S rear wheel radial runout S rear wheel lateral runout Refer to “FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC”. EB701440 CHECKING AND REPLACING THE REAR WHEEL SPROCKET 1. Check: S rear wheel sprocket More than 1/4 tooth a wear ! Replace the rear wheel sprocket.
-
Page 232: Adjusting The Rear Wheel Static Balance
REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISC CHAS AND REAR WHEEL SPROCKET EB701900 ADJUSTING THE REAR WHEEL STATIC BALANCE NOTE: S After replacing the tire, wheel or both, the rear wheel static balance should be ad- justed. S Adjust the rear wheel static balance with the brake disc and rear wheel drive hub installed.
-
Page 233: Front And Rear Brakes
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES FRONT AND REAR BRAKES FRONT BRAKE PADS 40 Nm (4.0 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the front brake pads Remove the parts in the order listed. Brake caliper Brake pads clip Brake pad pin Refer to “REPLACING THE FRONT Brake pad spring BRAKE PADS”…
-
Page 234: Rear Brake Pads
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES REAR BRAKE PADS 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) 40 Nm (4.0 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the rear brake pads Remove the parts in the order listed. Caliper Brake pad pin Refer to “REPLACING THE REAR Brake pad/shim BRAKE PADS”…
-
Page 235: Replacing The Front Brake Pads
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES EB702100 CAUTION: Disc brake componets rarely require dis- assembly. Tehrefore, always follow these preven- tive measures: S Never disassemble brake components unless absolutely necessary. S If any connection on the hydraulic brake system is disconnected, the en- tire brake system must be disas- sembled, drained, cleaned, properly filled, and bled after reassembly.
-
Page 236
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES 3. Remove: S brake pads 1 (along with the brake pad shims) 4. Measure: S brake pad wear limit a Out of specification ! Replace the brake pads as a set. Brake pad wear limit 0.5 mm 5. -
Page 237: Replacing The Rear Brake Pads
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES EB702113 REPLACING THE REAR BRAKE PADS NOTE: When replacing the brake pads, it is not nec- essary to disconnect the brake hose or dis- assemble the brake caliper. 1. Remove: S brake caliper 1 2. Remove: S brake pad pins 1 3.
-
Page 238
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES 6. Install: S brake pad pins 1 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) S brake caliper 40 Nm (4.0 mSkg) 7. Check: S brake fluid level Below the minimum level mark a ! Add the recommended brake fluid to the proper level. -
Page 239: Front Brake Master Cylinder
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER 10 Nm(1.0 mSkg) 30 Nm(3.0 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the front brake master Remove the parts in the order listed. cylinder Drain the brake fluid Brake lever Brake switch lead Brake switch Union bolt…
-
Page 240
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Disassembling the front brake Disassembly the parts in the order listed. master cylinder Master cylinder boot Circlip Master cylinder kit Spring For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. 7-21… -
Page 241
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER 30 Nm(3.0 mSkg) 4 Nm(0.4 mSkg) 23 Nm(2.3 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the rear brake master Remove the parts in the order listed. cylinder Side cover (right) Drain the brake fluid Master cylinder bolt Union bolt… -
Page 242
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Disassembling the rear brake master Disassembly the parts in the order listed. cylinder Master cylinder boot Circlip Master cylinder kit Spring For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. 7-23… -
Page 243
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES EB702210 REMOVING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER NOTE: Befor disassembling the front brake master cylinder, drain the brake fluid from the entire brake system. 1. Disconnect: S brake switch coupler 1 (from the brake switch) 2. -
Page 244: Checking The Front And Rear Brake Master Cylinders
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES EB702242 CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDERS The following procedure applies to the both of the brake master cylinders. 1. Check: S brake master cylinder Damage/scratches/wea ! Replace. S brake fluid delivery passages (brake master cylinder body) Obstruction ! Blow out with compressed air.
-
Page 245: Assembling And Installing The Front Brake Master Cylinder
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES EB702270 ASSEMBLING AND INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER S Before installation, all internal brake components should be cleaned and lu- bricated with clean or new brake fluid. S Never use solvents on internal brake components.
-
Page 246: Assembling And Installing The Rear Brake Master Cylinder
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CAUTION: Brake fluid damage painted surfaces and plastic parts. Therefore, always clean up any spilt brake fluid immediately. 3. Bleed: S brake system Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM” in chapter 3. 4. Check: S brake fluid level Below the minimum level mark a ! Add the recommended brake fluid to the proper…
-
Page 247
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES S Use only the designated brake fluid. Other brake fluids may cause the rubber seals to deteriorate, causing leakage and poor brake performance. S Refill with the same type of brake fluid that is already in the system. Mixing brake fluids may result in a harmful chemical reaction, leading to poor brake performance. -
Page 248: Front Brake Calipers
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS 40 Nm(4.0 mSkg) 30 Nm(3.0 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the front brake calipers Remove the parts in the order listed. Drain the brake fluid Union bolt Refer to “ASSEMBLING AND Copper washer INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKE Brake hose…
-
Page 249: Disassembling The Front Brake Caliper
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Disassembling the front brake Disassembly the parts in the order listed. calipers Clip Pad pin Refer to “REPLACING THE FRONT Brake pad spring BRAKE PADS” section. Brake pad Bleed screw kit Brake caliper piston Refer to “DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT Dust seal…
-
Page 250
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES REAR BRAKE CALIPER 30 Nm(3.0 mSkg) 40 Nm(4.0 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the rear brake caliper Remove the parts in the order listed. Drain the brake fluid Union bolt Refer to “ASSEMBLING AND Copper washer INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKE Brake hose… -
Page 251
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Disassembling the rear brake caliper Disassembly the parts in the order listed. Pad pin Pad spring Refer to “REPLACING THE REAR Brake pad assembly/shim BRAKE PAD” section. Bleed screw kit Brake caliper piston Refer to “DISASSEMBLING THE REAR… -
Page 252
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES EB702317 DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS The following procedure applies to both of the brake calipers. NOTE: Before disassembling either brake caliper, drain the brake fluid from the entire brake system. 1. Remove: S union bolt 1 S copper washers 2 S brake hose 3 NOTE:… -
Page 253: Disassembling The Rear Brake Caliper
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES EB702322 DISASSEMBLING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER NOTE: Before disassembling the brake caliper, drain the brake fluid from the entire brake system. 1. Remove: S union bolt 1 S copper washers 2 S brake hose 3 NOTE: Put the end of the brake hose into a contain- er and pump out the brake fluid carefully.
-
Page 254: Assembling And Installing The Front Brake Calipers
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES 1. Check: S brake caliper pistons 1 Rust/scratches/wear Replace brake caliper. S brake caliper cylinders 2 Scratches/wear ! Replace the brake cali- per. S brake calipers 3 Cracks/damage ! Replace. S brake fluid delivery passages (brake caliper body) Obstruction ! Blow out with compressed air.
-
Page 255
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CAUTION: When installing the brake hose onto the brake caliper, make sure that the brake pipe a touches the projection a on the brake caliper. 2. Remove: S brake caliper 3. Install: S brake pads S brake spring S brake caliper pins S brake caliper clips… -
Page 256: Assembling And Installing The Rear Brake Caliper
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES 5. Bleed: S brake system Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM” in chapter 3. 6. Check: S brake fluid level Below the minimum level mark a ! Add the recommended brake fluid to the proper level.
-
Page 257
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES 2. Remove: S brake caliper 3. Install: S brake pad spring S brake pads S brake pad pins S brake caliper S brake hose holder Refer to “REPLACING THE BRAKE PADS”. Brake caliper pad pin 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) Brake caliper bolt 40 Nm (4.0 mSkg) -
Page 258
CHAS FRONT AND REAR BRAKES 6. Check: S brake fluid level Below the minimum level mark a ! Add the recommended brake fluid to the proper level. Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL” in chapter 3. 7. Check: S brake pedal operation Soft or spongy feeling ! Bleed the brake system. -
Page 259: Front Fork
CHAS FRONT FORK FRONT FORK 30 Nm (3.0 mSkg) 30 Nm (3.0 mSkg) 7 Nm (0.7 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the front fork Remove the parts in the order listed. Front wheel Refer to “FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISCS”…
-
Page 260
CHAS FRONT FORK 23 Nm (2.3 mSkg) 30 Nm (3.0 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Disassembling the front fork Disassembly the parts in the order listed. Cap bolt O-ring Spacer Washer Front fork spring Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE FRONT Dust seal FORK LEGS”… -
Page 261
CHAS FRONT FORK 23 Nm (2.3 mSkg) 30 Nm (3.0 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Outer tube bushing Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE FRONT Oil flow stopper FORK LEGS” section. For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. 7-42… -
Page 262: Removing The Front Fork Legs
CHAS FRONT FORK EB703100 REMOVING THE FRONT FORK LEGS The following procedure applies to both of the front fork legs. 1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface. Securely support the motorcycle so that there is no danger of it falling over. NOTE: Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand so that the front wheel is elevated.
-
Page 263: Checking The Front Fork Legs
CHAS FRONT FORK 3. Remove: S inner tube a. Hold the front fork leg horizontally. b. Securely clamp the brake caliper bracket in a vise with soft jaws. c. Separate the inner tube from the outer tube by pulling the inner tube forcefully but carefully.
-
Page 264: Assembling The Front Fork Legs
CHAS FRONT FORK 4. Check: S cap bolt O-ring Damage/wear ! Replace. EB703700 ASSEMBLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS The following procedure applies to both of the front fork legs. S Make sure that the oil levels in both front fork legs are equal. S Uneven oil levels can result in poor handling and a loss of stability.
-
Page 265
(with the specified amount of the recom- mended fork oil) Quantity (each front fork leg) 0.475 L Yamaha fork and shock oil 10 W or equivalent. Front fork leg oil level a (from the top of the inner tube, with… -
Page 266: Installing The Front Fork Legs
CHAS FRONT FORK NOTE: S While filling the front fork leg, keep it up- right. S After filling, slowly pump the front fork leg up and down to distribute the fork oil. 9. Install: S spring 1 S spring seat 2 S spacer 3 S cap bolt NOTE:…
-
Page 267: Handlebar
CHAS HANDLEBAR HANDLEBAR 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) 7 Nm (0.7 mSkg) 23 Nm (2.3 mSkg) 7 Nm (0.7 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the handle bar Remove the parts in the order listed. Master cylinder bracket Master cylinder assembly Throttle cable housing cover Handle bar switch (right) Throttle cable housing…
-
Page 268
CHAS HANDLEBAR 10 Nm (1.0 mSkg) 7 Nm (0.7 mSkg) 23 Nm (2.3 mSkg) 7 Nm (0.7 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Grip (left) Refer to “REMOVING THE HANDLEBAR” Clutch lever holder section. Upper handlebar holder Refer to “INSTALLING THE Handle bar HANDLEBAR”… -
Page 269: Removing The Handlebar
CHAS HANDLEBAR EB704100 REMOVING THE HANDLEBAR 1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface. Securely support the motorcycle so that there is no danger of it falling over. 2. Remove: S throttle cable housing 1 S throttle grip 2 NOTE: While removing the throttle cable housing, pull back the rubber cover 3 .
-
Page 270: Installing The Handlebar
CHAS HANDLEBAR EB704701 INSTALLING THE HANDLEBAR 1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface. Securely support the motorcycle so that there is no danger of it falling over. 2. Install: S handlebar 1 S upper handlebar holders 2 23 Nm (2.3 mSkg) CAUTION: S First, tighten the bolts on the front side a of the handlebar holder, then on the…
-
Page 271
CHAS HANDLEBAR 6. Install: S throttle grip 1 S throttle cable housing 2 S throttle cables 3 NOTE: Apply a thin coat of lithium soap base grease onto the inside of the throttle grip and install it onto the handlebar. NOTE: S Align the projection a on the throttle cable housing with the hole b in the handlebar. -
Page 272: Steering Head
CHAS STEERING HEAD STEERING HEAD LOWER BRACKET 110 Nm (11.0 mSkg) 52 Nm (5.2 mSkg) 18 Nm (1.8 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the lower bracket Remove the parts in the order listed. Front cowling Refer to “FRONT COWUNG/SEAT/ SIDE COVER/FUEL TANK”…
-
Page 273
CHAS STEERING HEAD 110 Nm (11.0 mSkg) 52 Nm (5.2 mSkg) 18 Nm (1.8 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Lower bracket Ball race cover Ball bearing Refer to “INSTALLING THE STEERING Rubber washer 1 HEAD” section. Ball bearing For installation, reverse the removal procedure. -
Page 274: Removing The Lower Bracket
CHAS STEERING HEAD EB705102 REMOVING THE LOWER BRACKET 1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface. Securely support the motorcycle so that there is no danger of it falling over. 2. Remove: S upper ring nut S lower ring nut 1 NOTE: Hold the lower ring nut with the exhaust and steering nut wrench 2 , then remove the up-…
-
Page 275: Installing The Steering Head
CHAS STEERING HEAD b. Remove the bearing race from the lower bracket with a floor chisel 2 and hammer. c. Install a new dust seal and new bearing races. CAUTION: If the bearing race is not installed proper- ly, the steering head pipe could be dam- aged.
-
Page 276: Rear Shock Absorber And Relay Arm
CHAS REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND RELAY ARM REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND RELAY ARM 48 Nm (4.8 mSkg) 40 Nm (4.0 mSkg) 40 Nm (4.0 mSkg) 48 Nm (4.8 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the rear shock absorber Remove the parts in the order listed.
-
Page 277
CHAS REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND RELAY ARM 48 Nm (4.8 mSkg) 40 Nm (4.0 mSkg) 40 Nm (4.0 mSkg) 48 Nm (4.8 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Bolt = 80 mm Relay arm Self-locking nut/washer Bolt = 120 mm Connecting plate Spacer Spacer… -
Page 278: Handling The Rear Shock Absorber
CHAS REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND RELAY ARM EB706101 HANDLING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER This rear shock absorber contain highly compressed nitrogen gas. Before handling the rear shock absorber, read and make sure you understand the following information. The manufacturer cannot be held responsible for property damage or personal injury that may re- sult from improper handling of the rear shock absorber.
-
Page 279: Removing The Rear Shock Absorber Assembly
CHAS REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND RELAY ARM EB706204 REMOVING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY 1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface. Securely support the motorcycle so that there is no danger of it falling over. NOTE: Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand so that the rear wheel is elevated.
-
Page 280: Checking The Rear Shock Absorber Assembly
CHAS REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND RELAY ARM EB706401 CHECKING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY 1. Check: S rear shock absorber rod Bends/damage ! Replace the rear shock absorber assembly. S rear shock absorber oil leaks ! Replace the rear shock absorb- er assembly.
-
Page 281: Swingarm And Drive Chain
CHAS SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN 115 Nm (11.5 mSkg) 23 Nm (2.3 mSkg) 7 Nm (0.7 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Removing the swingarm and drive Removing the parts in the order listed. chain Rear wheel Refer to “REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISC AND REAR WHEEL SPROCKET”…
-
Page 282
CHAS SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN 115 Nm (11.5 mSkg) 23 Nm (2.3 mSkg) 7 Nm (0.7 mSkg) Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Spacer Bearing Washer For installation, reverse the removal procedure. 7-63… -
Page 283: Removing The Swingarm
CHAS SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN EB707100 NOTE: Before removing the drive sprocket, drive chain, and rear wheel, measure the drive chain slack and the length of a ten-link sec- tion of the drive chain. EB707111 REMOVING THE SWINGARM 1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface. Securely support the motorcycle so that there is no danger of it falling over.
-
Page 284: Checking The Swingarm
CHAS SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN EB707400 CHECKING THE SWINGARM 1. Check: S swingarm Bends/cracks/damage ! Replace. 2. Check: S pivot shaft Roll the pivot shaft on a flat surface. Bends ! Replace. Do not attempt to straighten a bent pivot shaft.
-
Page 285: Checking The Drive Chain
CHAS SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN EB707410 CHECKING THE DRIVE CHAIN 1. Measure: S ten-link section a of the drive chain Out of specification ! Replace the drive chain. Ten-link drive chain section limit (maximum) 150 mm NOTE: S While measuring the ten-link section, push down on the drive chain to increase its ten- sion.
-
Page 286: Installing The Swingarm
CHAS SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN 5. Lubricate: S drive chain Recommended lubricant Engine oil or chain lubricant suitable for O-ring chains 6. Check: S drive sprocket S rear wheel sprocket More than 1/4 tooth a wear ! Replace the drive chain sprockets as a set. Bent teeth ! Replace the drive chain sprockets as a set.
-
Page 287: Installing The Drive Chain
CHAS SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN 4. Adjust: S drive chain slack Refer to “ADJUSTING THE DRIVE CHAIN SLACK” in chapter 3. Drive chain slack 30 X 45 mm EB707710 INSTALLING THE DRIVE CHAIN 1. Lubricate: S drive chain Recommended lubricant Engine oil or chain lubricant suitable for O-ring chains 2.
-
Page 288
– ELEC… -
Page 289
ELEC CHAPTER 8 ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ……….CIRCUIT DIAGRAM . -
Page 290
ELEC… -
Page 291
ELEC ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS EB800000 ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Main switch Starting circuit cut-off relay Rectifier/ Regulator Fuel sender Flasher relay Thermo switch (warning light) Rear brake switch Sidestand switch Thermo switch (fan motor) Battery Neutral switch Horn Ignitor unit Oil level gauge Diode Starter relay Ignition coil… -
Page 292
ELEC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM… -
Page 293: Circuit Diagram
ELEC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1 A.C. magneto High beam indicator light 2 Rectifier regulator Turn indicator lights 3 Main switch Meter lights 4 Battery Clutch switch 5 Fuse (back up) Oil level switch 6 Fuse (main) Flasher relay 7 Starter relay Horn 8 Starter motor Pass switch…
-
Page 294
ELEC CHECKING SWITCHES YP-N CHECKING SWITCHES CHECKING STEPS Using pocket tester, check switches for continu- ity between their terminals to determine whether they are correctly connected. Replace the switch component if any of the com- binations does not produce the correct reading. Pocket tester: 90890-03112 NOTE:… -
Page 295
ELEC CHECKING SWITCHES YP****** SWITCH POSITION AND TERMINAL CONNECTION Before checking a switch refer to the checking switches as shown in the left page and check for the correct terminal connections (closed circuit) according to the color combinations shown in the chart. Poor connection, fault ! Repair or replace. -
Page 296
ELEC IGNITION SYSTEM EB802000 IGNITION SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM… -
Page 297
ELEC IGNITION SYSTEM EB802010 TROUBLESHOOTING IF THE IGNITION SYSTEM FAILS TO OPERATE (NO SPARK OR INTERMITTENT SPARK): Procedure Check: 1. Fuses (main and ignition) 8. Engine stop switch 2. Battery 9. Neutral switch 3. Spark plugs 10. SIdestand switch 4. Ignition spark gap 11. -
Page 298
ELEC IGNITION SYSTEM EB802013 3. Spark plugs Standard spark plug: CR9E, CR8E/U27ESR-N, U24ESR-N S Check the spark plug condition. NGK/NIPPONDENSO S Check the spark plug type. S Check the spark plug gap. Refer to “SPARK LUG INSPECTION” in CHAPTER 3. INCORRECT Spark plug gap: 0.7 X 0.8 mm… -
Page 299
ELEC IGNITION SYSTEM EB802015 5. Spark plug cap resistance S Remove the spark plug cap. S Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1k) to the spark plug cap. S Check if the spark plug cap has the speci- OUT OF SPECIFICATION fied resistance. -
Page 300
ELEC IGNITION SYSTEM EB802017 7. Main switch S Disconnect the main switch couplers from the wire harness. S Check for continuity as follows: – Brown/Blue NO CONTINUITY Replace the main switch. CONTINUITY EB802018 8. Engine stop switch S Disconnect the right handlebar switch cou- pler from the wire harness. -
Page 301
ELEC IGNITION SYSTEM NO CONTINUITY Replace the main switch. CONTINUITY EB80201A 10. Sidestand switch S Disconnect the sidestand switch coupler from the wire harness. S Check for continuity as follows: Black – Black NO CONTINUITY Replace the sidestand switch. CONTINUITY 11. -
Page 302
ELEC IGNITION SYSTEM Tester lead!Blue/Yellow INCORRECT Continuity Tester lead!Light green Tester lead!Blue/Yellow Tester lead!Light green Continuity Replace the relay unit. CORRECT EB80201C 12. Pickup coil resistance S Disconnect the pickup coil coupler from the wire harness. S Connect the pocket tester (Ω… -
Page 303
ELEC ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM EB803000 ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 8-13… -
Page 304
ELEC ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM EB803010 STARTING CIRCUIT OPERATION The starting circuit on this model consists of the starter motor, starter relay, and the starting cir- cuit cut-off relay. If the engine stop switch is on “RUN” and the main switch is on “ON” (both switches are closed), the starter motor can op- erate only if. -
Page 305: Electric Starting System
ELEC ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM EB803020 TROUBLESHOOTING IF THE STARTER MOTOR FAILS TO OPERATE: Procedure Check: 1. Fuses (main and ignition) 8. Neutral switch 2. Battery 9. Sidestand switch 3. Starter motor 10. Clutch switch 4. Starting circuit cut-off relay 11. Start switch 5.
-
Page 306
ELEC ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM EB803021 3. Starter motor S A wire that is used as a jumper lead must S Connect the battery positive terminal have the equivalent capacity or more as starter motor cable using a jumper lead that of the battery lead, otherwise the jumper lead may burn. -
Page 307
ELEC ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM EB803024 5. Starter relay S Disconnect the relay unit coupler from the wire harness. S Connect the pocket tester (Ω X 1) and bat- tery (12 V) to the relay unit coupler termi- nals. Battery (+) terminal ! Red/White terminal Battery (–) terminal ! NO CONTINUITY… -
Page 308
ELEC ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM EB802018 7.Engine stop switch S Disconnect the right handlebar switch cou- pler from the wire harness. S Check for continuity as follows: Red/White – Red/White NO CONTINUITY Replace the right handlebar switch. CONTINUITY EB802019 8. Neutral switch S Disconnect the neutral switch/lead from the neutral switch. -
Page 309
ELEC ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM EB80201A 9. Sidestand switch S Disconnect the sidestand switch coupler from the wire harness. S Check for continuity as follows: Black – Black NO CONTINUITY Replace the sidestand switch. CONTINUITY EB803025 10. Clutch switch S Disconnect the clutch switch coupler from the wire harness. -
Page 310
ELEC ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM EB803027 11. Start switch S Disconnect the right handlebar switch cou- pler from the wire harness. S Check for continuity as follows: Blue/White – Black NO CONTINUITY Replace the right handlebar switch. CONTINUITY EB803026 12. Diode (starting circuit cut-off relay) S Remove the relay unit from the wire har- ness. -
Page 311
ELEC ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM EB803028 13. Wiring connection POOR CONNECTION S Check the connections of the entire starting system. Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”. Properly connect the starting system. 8-21… -
Page 312
ELEC ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM EB803030 STARTER MOTOR Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks Starter motor removal Remove the parts in order. Starter motor Starter motor lead Reverse the removal procedure for installation. Starter motor disassembly Disassembly the parts in order. Front bracket Washers Rear bracket… -
Page 313
ELEC ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM CHECKING THE STARTER MOTOR 1. Measure: S Brush length a Out of specification ! Replace. Brush length wear limit: 4 mm 2. Measure: S Brush spring force Fatigue/out of specification ! Replace as a set. Brush spring force: 780 X 1,020 g 3. -
Page 314
ELEC ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM 5. Measure: S Commutator diameter a Out of specification ! Replace the starter motor. Commutator wear limit: 27 mm 6. Measure: S Mica undercut a Out of specification ! Scrape the mica to the proper measurement using a hacksaw blade which has been grounded to fit the commutator. -
Page 315
ELEC CHARGING SYSTEM EB804000 CHARGING SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 8-25… -
Page 316: Charging System
ELEC CHARGING SYSTEM EB803020 TROUBLESHOOTING IF THE BATTERY IS NOT CHARGED: Procedure Check: 1. Fuse (main) 4. Stator coil resistance 2. Battery 5. Wiring connections (the entire charging 3. Charging voltage system) NOTE: S Remove the following part(s) before trouble- Engine tachometer: shooting: 90890-03113…
-
Page 317
ELEC CHARGING SYSTEM EB804011 3. Charging voltage S Connect the engine tachometer to the spark plug lead. S Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the battery. Tester (+) lead ! Battery (+) terminal Tester (–) lead ! Battery (–) terminal S Measure the battery terminal voltage. -
Page 318
ELEC CHARGING SYSTEM EB804015 5. Wiring connections POOR CONNECTION S Check the connections of the entire charg- ing system. Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”. Properly connect the charging system. CORRECT Replace the rectifier/regulator. 8-28… -
Page 319
ELEC LIGHTING SYSTEM EB805000 LIGHTING SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 8-29… -
Page 320
ELEC LIGHTING SYSTEM EB803020 TROUBLESHOOTING IF THE HEADLIGHT, HIGH BEAM INDICATOR LIGHTS, TAILLIGHT, AUXILIARY LIGHT AND/OR METER LIGHT FAIL TO COME ON: Procedure Check: 1. Fuses (main and head) 5. Dimmer switch 2. Battery 6. Pass switch (for Europe and Australia) 3. -
Page 321
ELEC LIGHTING SYSTEM EB802017 3. Main switch S Disconnect the main switch couplers from the wire harness. S Check for continuity as follows: – Brown/Blue Blue/Red – Blue NO CONTINUITY Replace the main switch. CONTINUITY EB805011 4. Lights switch S Disconnect the right handlebar switch cou- pler from the wire harness. -
Page 322
ELEC LIGHTING SYSTEM 5. Dimmer switch S Disconnect the left handlebar switch cou- plers from the wire harness. S Turn the dimmer switch to “HI”. S Check for continuity as follows: NO CONTINUITY Blue/Black – Yellow CONTINUITY The dimmer switch is faulty. Replace the left handlebar switch. -
Page 323: Lighting System
ELEC LIGHTING SYSTEM EB805020 LIGHTING SYSTEM CHECK 1. If the headlight and the high beam indicator light fail to come on: 1. Bulb and bulb socket. NO CONTINUITY S Check the bulb and bulb socket for continu- ity. Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket. CONTINUITY Headlight: 2.
-
Page 324
ELEC LIGHTING SYSTEM EB805021 2. If the meter light fails to come on: 1. Bulb and bulb socket NO CONTINUITY S Check the bulb and bulb socket for continu- ity. Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket. CONTINUITY 2. Voltage S Connect the pocket tester (20 V) to the bulb socket coupler. -
Page 325
ELEC LIGHTING SYSTEM S Turn the main switch to “ON”. OUT OF SPECIFICATION S Turn the lights switch to “ON” or “PO”. S Check the voltage (12 V) of the “Blue” lead on the bulb socket connector. The wiring circuit from the main switch to the MEETS bulb socket connector is faulty, repair it. -
Page 326: Signal System
ELEC SIGNAL SYSTEM EB806000 SIGNAL SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 8-36…
-
Page 327
ELEC SIGNAL SYSTEM 3 Main switch 4 Battery 6 Fuse (main) 16 Neutral switch 18 Fuel sender 20 Diode 25 Fuel meter 26 Fuel level warning light 28 Neutral indicator light 29 Oil level warning light 31 Turn indicator light 34 Oil level switch 35 Flasher relay 36 Horn… -
Page 328
ELEC SIGNAL SYSTEM B806010 TROUBLESHOOTING IF THE TURN SIGNAL LIGHT, BRAKE LIGHT AND/OR INDICATOR LIGHT FAIL TO COME ON: IF THE HORN FAILS TO SOUND: Procedure Check: 1. Fuses (main and signal) 2. Battery 3. Main switch 4. Wiring connection (the entire signal system) NOTE: S Remove the following part(s) before trouble- Pocket tester:… -
Page 329
ELEC SIGNAL SYSTEM EB802017 3. Main switch S Disconnect the main switch coupler from the wire harness. S Check for continuity as follows: – Brown/Blue NO CONTINUITY Replace the main switch. CONTINUITY EB806011 POOR CONNECTION 4. Wiring connections S Check the connections of the entire signal system. -
Page 330
ELEC SIGNAL SYSTEM EB806020 SIGNAL SYSTEM CHECK 1. If the horn fails to sound: 1. Horn switch S Disconnect the left handlebar switch cou- NO CONTINUITY pler from the wire harness. S Disconnect the “Black/White” lead at the horn terminal. S Check for continuity as follows: Replace the left handlebar switch. -
Page 331
ELEC SIGNAL SYSTEM HORN SOUNDS The horn is not faulty. HORN DOES NOT SOUND 4. Voltage S Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the horn at the “Pink” terminal. Tester (+) lead ! Brown lead Tester (–) lead ! Pink S Turn the main switch to “ON”. -
Page 332
ELEC SIGNAL SYSTEM 2. Brake switch S Disconnect the front brake switch leads. S Disconnect the rear brake switch coupler from the wire harness. S Check for continuity as follows: Brown – Green/Yellow Black – Black NO CONTINUITY Front brake switch Rear brake switch CONTINUITY Replace the brake switch. -
Page 333
ELEC SIGNAL SYSTEM EB806023 3. If the turn signal light and/or turn indicator light fails to blink: 1. Bulb and bulb socket NO CONTINUITY S Check the bulb and bulb socket for continu- ity. Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket. CONTINUITY 2. -
Page 334
ELEC SIGNAL SYSTEM 4. Voltage S Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the flasher relay coupler. Tester (+) lead ! Brown/White terminal Tester (–) lead ! Frame ground S Turn the main switch to “ON”. OUT OF SPECIFICATION S Turn the turn switch to “L”… -
Page 335
ELEC SIGNAL SYSTEM EB806024 4. If the neutral indicator light fails to come on: 1. Bulb and bulb socket NO CONTINUITY S Check the bulb and bulb socket for continu- ity. Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket. CONTINUITY 2. Neutral switch S Disconnect the neutral switch lead from the neutral switch. -
Page 336
ELEC SIGNAL SYSTEM 4. Voltage S Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the bulb socket coupler. Tester (+) lead ! Brown terminal Tester (–) lead ! Frame ground OUT OF SPECIFICATION S Turn the main switch to “ON”. S Check the voltage (12 V). -
Page 337
ELEC SIGNAL SYSTEM 3. Oil level switch S Drain the engine oil and remove the oil level switch from the oil pan. S Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) to the oil level switch. Tester (+) lead ! Black/Red terminal Tester (–) lead ! Frame ground NO CONTINUITY S Check the oil level switch for continuity. -
Page 338
ELEC SIGNAL SYSTEM 5. Start switch S Disconnect the right handlebar switch cou- pler from the wire harness. S Check for continuity as follows: Blue/White – Black NO CONTINUITY Replace the right handlebar switch. CONTINUITY 6. Voltage S Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the bulb socket connector. -
Page 339
ELEC SIGNAL SYSTEM 6. If the fuel level warning light fails to come on or the fuel meter fails to operate: 1. Bulb and bulb socket NO CONTINUITY S Check the bulb and bulb socket for continu- ity. Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket. CONTINUITY 2. -
Page 340
ELEC SIGNAL SYSTEM 3. Voltage S Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the bulb socket connector. Tester (+) lead ! Brown terminal Tester (–) lead ! Green/Red terminal OUT OF SPECIFICATION S Drain the fuel. S Turn the main switch to “ON”. S Check the voltage (12 V). -
Page 341
ELEC COOLING SYSTEM EB807000 COOLING SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 8-51… -
Page 342
ELEC COOLING SYSTEM EB807010 TROUBLESHOOTING IF THE FAN MOTOR FAILS TO TURN: IF THE WATER TEMPERTATURE METER FAILS TO MOVE, WHEN THE ENGINE IS WARM: Procedure Check: 1. Fuses (main, signal and fan) 6. Engine temperature warning light 2. Battery 7. -
Page 343
ELEC COOLING SYSTEM EB802017 3. Main switch S Disconnect the main switch coupler from the wire harness. S Check for continuity as follows: – Brown/Blue NO CONTINUITY Replace the main switch. CONTINUITY EB807011 4. Fan motor S Disconnect the fan motor coupler. S Connect the battery (12 V) as shown. -
Page 344
ELEC COOLING SYSTEM EB802017 5. Thermo switch (fan, engine temperature) Handle the thermo switch with special care. S Remove the thermo switch from the thermo- Never subjct it to strong shocks or allow it to static valve housing. be dropped. Should it be dropped, it must be S Connect the pocket tester (Ω… -
Page 345
ELEC COOLING SYSTEM 6. Engine temperature warning light NO CONTINUITY S Check the bulb and bulb socket for continu- ity. Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket. CONTINUITY 7. Voltage S Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the bulb socket connector. Tester (+) lead ! Brown lead Tester (–) lead ! Green/White lead OUT OF SPECIFICATION… -
Page 346
ELEC FUEL PUMP SYSTEM EB808000 FUEL PUMP SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 8-56… -
Page 347
ELEC FUEL PUMP SYSTEM EB808010 1 Battery FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT OPERATION 2 Fuse (main) The fuel pump circuit consists of the fuel pump 3 Main switch relay, fuel pump, engine stop switch and ignitor 4 Fuse (ignition) unit. 5 Engine stop switch The ignitor unit includes the control unit for the 6 Ignitor unit fuel pump. -
Page 348
ELEC COOLING SYSTEM EB808020 TROUBLESHOOTING IF THE FUEL PUMP FAILS TO OPERATE: Procedure Check: 1. Fuses (main and ignition) 5. Fuel pump relay (starting circuit cut-off relay) 2. Battery 6. Fuel pump resistance 3. Main switch 7. Wiring connections (the entire fuel system) 4. -
Page 349: Fuel Pump System
ELEC FUEL PUMP SYSTEM EB802017 3. Main switch S Disconnect the main switch coupler from the wire harness. S Check for continuity as follows: – Brown/Blue NO CONTINUITY Replace the main switch. CONTINUITY EB802018 4. Engine stop switch S Disconnect the right handlebar switch cou- pler from the wire harness.
-
Page 350
ELEC FUEL PUMP SYSTEM Battery (+) terminal ! Red/Black terminal Battery (–) terminal ! Blue/Red terminal NO CONTINUITY Tester (+) lead ! Red/Black terminal Tester (–) lead ! Blue/Black terminal S Check the fuel pump relay for continuity. Replace the starting circuit cut-off relay. CONTINUITY EB808021 6. -
Page 351
ELEC FUEL PUMP SYSTEM EB808030 FUEL PUMP TEST Gasoline is extremely flammable and un- der certain circumstances there can be danger of an explosion or combustion. Be extremely careful and note the follow- ing points: S Stop the engine before refuelling. S Do not smoke and keep away from open flames, sparks, or any other source of fire. -
Page 352
ELEC SELF-DIAGNOSIS SELF-DIAGNOSIS The YZF600R features self-diagnosis. When the main switch is turned to “ON”, the following items are monitored and the condition codes are displayed on the tachometer (irrespective of whether the engine is running or not). Display condition Item Condition Response… -
Page 353
ELEC SELF-DIAGNOSIS TROUBLESHOOTING The tachometer starts to display the self-diagnosis sequence. NOTE: Use the following special tool in this trouble- Pocket tester: shooting. 90890-03112 1. Throttle position sensor (TPS) CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Ignitor unit Throttle position sensor (TPS) 1. Wire harness NO CONTINUITY S Check the wire harness for continuity. -
Page 354
ELEC SELF-DIAGNOSIS 2. Speed sensor CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 11 Ignitor unit 17 Speed sensor 1. Wire harness NO CONTINUITY S Check the wire harness for continuity. Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”. Repair or replace the wire harness. CONTINUITY Replace the speed sensor. 8-64… -
Page 355
TRBL SHTG… -
Page 356
TRBL SHTG CHAPTER 9. TROUBLESHOOTING STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING ……..FUEL SYSTEM . -
Page 357
TRBL SHTG… -
Page 358: Troubleshooting
TRBL STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING SHTG EB900000 TROUBLESHOOTING NOTE: The following guide for troubleshooting does not cover all the possible causes of problems. It should be helpful, however, as a guide to troubleshooting. Refer to the relative procedure in this manual for inspection, adjustment and replacement of parts. STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING FUEL SYSTEM Fuel tank…
-
Page 359
STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING/POOR ENGINE IDLE SPEED TRBL PERFORMANCE/POOR MEDIUM-AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE SHTG COMPRESSION SYSTEM Cylinder and cylinder head Piston and piston ring S Loose spark plug S Improperly installed piston ring S Loose cylinder head or cylinder S Worn, fatigued or broken piston ring S Faulty cylinder head gasket S Seized piston ring S Worn, damaged or seized cylinder… -
Page 360: Faulty Gear Shifting
FAULTY GEAR SHIFTING/ TRBL FAULTY CLUTCH PERFORMANCE SHTG EB903000 FAULTY GEAR SHIFTING HARD SHIFTING Refer to “CLUTCH DRAGGING”. SHIFT PEDAL DOES NOT MOVE Shift shaft Transmission S Improperly adjusted shift pedal link S Seized transmission gear S Bent shift shaft S Jammed impurities S Incorrectly assembled transmission Shift cam, shift fork…
-
Page 361
OVERHEATING/OVERCOOLING/ TRBL POOR BRAKING/FAULTY FRONT FORK LEGS SHTG EB905000 OVERHEATING OVERHEATING Ignition system Compression system S Improper spark plug gap S Heavy carbon build-up S Improper spark plug heat range Engine oil S Faulty ignitor unit S Improper oil level S Improper oil viscosity Fuel system S Improper carburetor main jet setting… -
Page 362: Unstable Handling
UNSTABLE HANDLING/ TRBL FAULTY LIGHTING AND SIGNAL SYSTEMS SHTG EB908000 UNSTABLE HANDLING UNSTABLE HANDLING Handlebar Front fork S Improperly installed or bent S Uneven oil levels on both sides S Uneven spring tension Steering S Broken spring S Improperly installed handlebar crown S Twisted front fork S Bent steering stem S Improperly installed steering shaft…
-
Page 363
TRBL SHTG… -
Page 364
FZS600 ’98 WIRING DIAGRAM 1 A.C. magneto 2 Rectifier/ regulator 3 Main switch 4 Battery 5 Fuse (back up) 6 Fuse (main) 7 Starter relay 8 Starter motor 9 Starting circuit cut-off relay 10 Fuel pump relay 11 Ignitor unit 12 Ignition coil 13 Spark plug 14 Pick up coil…
Руководство по эксплуатации и техническому обслуживанию мотоциклов Yamaha FZS600 Fazer.
- Издательство: Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd.
- Год издания: 2002
- Страниц: 116
- Формат: PDF
- Размер: 2,5 Mb
Руководство по эксплуатации и техническому обслуживанию мотоциклов Yamaha моделей FZS1000 и FZS1000S Fazer.
- Издательство: Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd.
- Год издания: 2002
- Страниц: 120
- Формат: PDF
- Размер: 2,3 Mb
Руководство на английском языке по эксплуатации и техническому обслуживанию мотоциклов Yamaha моделей FZS6X и FZS6XC (FZ6).
- Издательство: Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd.
- Год издания: 2007
- Страниц: 108
- Формат: PDF
- Размер: 3,3 Mb
Сборник руководств на английском языке по эксплуатации и техническому обслуживанию мотоциклов Yamaha моделей FZS10A, FZS10AC, FZS10V, FZS10VC, FZS10W, FZS10WC, FZS10X, FZS10XC, FZS10Y, FZS10YC, FZS10Z и FZS10ZC (FZ1).
- Издательство: Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd.
- Год издания: 2005-2010
- Страниц: —
- Формат: PDF
- Размер: 18,0 Mb
Сборник руководств на английском языке по эксплуатации и техническому обслуживанию мотоциклов Yamaha моделей FZS600 и FZS600SP Fazer.
- Издательство: Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd.
- Год издания: 1999/2001/2002
- Страниц: 105/108/108
- Формат: PDF
- Размер: 11,2 Mb
Сборник руководств на английском языке по эксплуатации и техническому обслуживанию мотоциклов Yamaha моделей FZS1000, FZS1000N, FZS1000NC, FZS1000P, FZS1000PC, FZS1000R, FZS1000RC, FZS1000S, FZS1000SC, FZS1000SR и FZS1000SRC Fazer (FZ1).
- Издательство: Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd.
- Год издания: 2000-2004
- Страниц: —
- Формат: PDF
- Размер: 27,6 Mb
Руководство на английском языке по ремонту мотоциклов Yamaha FZS600 1998 года выпуска.
- Издательство: Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd.
- Год издания: 1997
- Страниц: 364
- Формат: PDF
- Размер: 7,3 Mb
Руководство (дополнение) на английском языке по ремонту мотоциклов Yamaha FZS600 2000 года выпуска.
- Издательство: Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd.
- Год издания: 1999
- Страниц: 41
- Формат: PDF
- Размер: 1,4 Mb
Руководство на английском языке по техническому обслуживанию и ремонту мотоциклов Yamaha FZS600 Fazer и YZF600R Thundercat 1996-2003 годов выпуска.
- Издательство: Haynes Publishing
- Год издания: —
- Страниц: 219
- Формат: PDF
- Размер: 12,1 Mb
Сервисная информация на английском языке для мотоциклов Yamaha моделей FZS600 и FZS600P 2002 года выпуска.
- Издательство: Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd.
- Год издания: 2001
- Страниц: 27
- Формат: PDF
- Размер: 4,1 Mb
Руководство на английском языке по ремонту мотоциклов Yamaha моделей FZS1000 и FZS1000N 2001 года выпуска.
- Издательство: Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd.
- Год издания: 2000
- Страниц: 403
- Формат: PDF
- Размер: 12,1 Mb
Сборник руководств на английском, французском, немецком, испанском и итальянском языках по ремонту мотоциклов Yamaha модели FZS1000 и др.
- Издательство: Yamaha
- Год издания: —
- Страниц: —
- Формат: ISO
- Размер: 1,7 Gb
EB000000
FZS600SERVICE MANUAL
1997 by Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd.First edition, December 1997
All rights reserved. Any reproduction orunauthorized use without the writtenpermission of Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd.
is expressly prohibited.
NOTE:
CAUTION:
EB001000
NOTICEThis manual was produced by the Yamaha Motor Company primarily for use by Yamaha dealers andtheir qualified mechanics. It is not possible to include all the knowledge of a mechanic in one manual,so it is assumed that anyone who uses this book to perform maintenance and repairs on Yamahascooter has a basic understanding of the mechanical ideas and the procedures of scooter repair.Repairs attempted by anyone without this knowledge are likely to render the scooter unfit for use.
Yamaha Motor Company, Ltd. is continually striving to improve all its models. Modifications andsignificant changes in specifications or procedures will be forwarded to all authorized Yamaha dealersand will appear in future editions of this manual where applicable.
Designs and specifications ar subject to change without notice.
IMPORTANT INFORMATIONParticularly important information is distinguished in this manual by the following.
The Safety Alert Symbol means ATTENTION! BECOME ALERT! YOURSAFETY IS INVOLVED!
Failure to follow WARNING instructions could result in severe injury or death tothe motorcycle operator, a bystander or a person inspecting or repairing themotorcycle.
A CAUTION indicates special precautions that must be taken to avoid damageto the motorcycle.
NOTE: A NOTE provides key information to make procedures easier or clearer.
7
2 1 4 3
8
6
5
YP002000
HOW TO USE THIS MANUALThis manual is intended as a handy, easy-to-read reference book for the mechanic. Comprehensiveexplanations of all installation, removal,disassembly, assembly, repair and inspection procedures arelaid out with the individual steps in sequential order.1 The manual is divided into chapters. An abbreviation and symbol in the upper right corner of eachpage indicate the current chapter. Refer to “SYMBOLS” on the following page.
2 Each chapter is divided into sections. The current section title is shown at the top of each page,except in Chapter 3 (“Periodic Inspections and Adjustments”), where the sub-section title (-s) appear.
(In Chapter3, “Periodic Inspections and Adjustments”, the sub-section title appears at the top of eachpage, instead of the section title.)
3 Sub-section titles appear in smaller print than the section title.
4 To help identify parts and clarify procedure steps, there are exploded diagrams at the start of eachremoval and disassembly section.
5 Numbers are given in the order of the jobs in the exploded diagram. A circled number indicates adisassembly step.
6 Symbols indicate parts to be lubricated or replaced (see “SYMBOLS”).
7 A job instruction chart accompanies the exploded diagram, providing the order of jobs, names ofparts, notes in jobs, etc.
8 Jobs requiring more information (such as special tools and technical data) are descridedsequentially.
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
18
2
4
8
10
12
14
16
6
21
24 25
17
19 20
22 23
EB003000
SYMBOLSThe following symbols are not relevant to everyvehicle.Symbols 1 to 9 indicate the subject of eachchapter.
1 General information2 Specifications3 Periodic inspection and adjustment4 Engine5 Cooling system6 Carburetor(-s)7 Chassis8 Electrical system9 TroubleshootingSymbols 10 to 17 indicate the following.
10 Serviceable with engine mounted11 Filling fluid12 Lubricant13 Special tool14 Tightening torque15 Wear limit, clearance16 Engine speed17 Electrical dataSymbols 18 to 23 in the exploded diagramsindicate the types of lubricants and lubricationpoints.
18 Apply engine oil19 Apply gear oil20 Apply molybdenum disulfide oil21 Apply wheel bearing grease22 Apply lightweight lithium-soap base grease23 Apply molybdenum disulfide greaseSymbols 24 to 25 in the exploded diagramsindicate the following:
24 Apply locking agent (LOCTITE )25 Use new one
GENERAL INFORMATION
SPECIFICATIONS
PERIODIC INSPECTIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS
ENGINE
COOLING SYSTEM
CARBURETORS
CHASSIS
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
GENINFO 1SPEC 2CHKADJ 3ENG 4
COOL 5CARB 6CHAS 7ELEC 8TRBLSHTG 9
INDEX
GENINFO
1
GENINFO
CHAPTER 1GENERAL INFORMATION
MOTORCYCLE IDENTIFICATION 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MODEL CODE 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IMPORTANT INFORMATION 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPLACEMENT PARTS 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GASKETS, OIL SEALS AND O-RINGS 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOCK WASHERS/PLATES AND COTTER PINS 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BEARINGS AND OIL SEALS 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIRCLIPS 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPECIAL TOOLS 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENINFO
1-1
GENINFOMOTORCYCLE IDENTIFICATION
1
1
EB100000
GENERAL INFORMATIONMOTORCYCLE IDENTIFICATION
EB100010
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERThe vehicle identification number 1 is stampedinto the right side of the steering head.
EB100020
MODEL CODEThe model code label 1 is affixed to the frame.This information will be needed to order spareparts.
1-2
springlip
oilgrease
lip
GENINFOIMPORTANT INFORMATION
EB102000
IMPORTANT INFORMATIONPREPARATION FOR REMOVAL ANDDISASSEMBLY1. Before removal and disassembly, remove all
dirt, mud, dust and foreign material.2. Use only the proper tools and cleaning
equipment.Refer to the “SPECIAL TOOLS” section.
3. When disassembling, always keep matedparts together. This includes gears, cylin-ders, pistons and other parts that have been“mated” through normal wear.Mated parts must always be reused or re-placed as an assembly.
4. During disassembly, clean all of the partsand place them in trays in the order of disas-sembly. This will speed up assembly and al-low for the correct installation of all parts.
5. Keep all parts away from any source of fire.
EB102010
REPLACEMENT PARTS1. Use only genuine Yamaha parts for all re-
placements. Use oil and grease recom-mended by Yamaha for all lubrication jobs.Other brands may be similar in-function andappearance, but inferior in quality.
EB102020
GASKETS, OIL SEALS AND O-RINGS1. When overhauling the engine, replace all
gaskets, seals and O-rings. All gasket sur-faces, oil seal lips and O-rings must becleaned.
2. During reassembly, properly oil all matingparts and bearings and apply grease ontothe oil seal lips.
1-3
OR
GENINFOIMPORTANT INFORMATION
CAUTION:
EB102030
LOCK WASHERS/PLATES AND COTTERPINS1. After removal, replace all lock washers/
plates 1 and cotter pins. After the bolt or nuthas been tightened to specification, bendthe lock tabs along a flat of the bolt or nut.
EB102040
BEARINGS AND OIL SEALS1. Install bearings and oil seals so that the
manufacturer’s marks or numbers are vis-ible. When installing oil seals, apply a lightcoat of lithium soap base grease onto the oilseal lips. Oil bearings liberally when instal-ling, if appropriate.1 Oil seal
Do not spin the bearing with compressedair because this will damage the bearingsurfaces.
1 Bearing
EB102050
CIRCLIPS1. Before reassembly, check all circlips careful-
ly and replace damaged or distorted circlips.Always replace piston pin clips after oneuse. When installing a circlips 1 , make surethat the sharp-edged corner 2 , is positionedopposite the thrust 3 that the circlip re-ceives.4 Shaft
1-4
GENINFOCHECKING THE CONNECTIONS
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB103000
CHECKING THE CONNECTIONSCheck the leads, couplers, and connectors forstains, rust, moisture, etc.
1. Disconnect: lead coupler connector
2. Check: lead coupler connector
Moisture Dry with an air blower.Rust/stains Connect and disconnectseveral times.
3. Check: all connections
Loose connection Connect properly.
If the pin 2 on the terminal is flattened, bendin up.
4. Connect: lead coupler connector
Make sure that all connections are tight.
5. Check: continuity
(with a pocket tester)
Pocket tester90590-03112
If there is no continuity, clean the termi-nals.
When checking the wire harness, performsteps 1 to 3.
As a quick remedy, use a contact revitaliz-er available at most part stores.
1-5
GENINFOSPECIAL TOOLS
12
12
12
1
EB104000
SPECIAL TOOLSThe following special tools are necessary forcomplete and accurate tune-up and assembly.Use only the appropriate special tools as this willhelp prevent damage caused by the use ofinappropriate tools or improvised techniques.When placing an order, refer to the list providedbelow to avoid any mistakes.
Tool No. Tool name/Usage Illustration
90890-01268 Ring nut wrench
This tool is used to loosen and tighten thesteering ringnut.
90890-01304 Piston pin puller
This tool is used to remove the piston pin.
90890-01460-01326
Damper rod holderT-handle
These tool ar used for holding the damper rodwhen removing or installing the damper rod.
90890-01312 Fuel level gauge
This gauge is used to measure the fuel levelin the float chamber.
90890-01325-01352
Radiator cap testerAdaptor
These tools are used for checking the coolingsystem.
90890-01362-01382
Flywheel pullerCrank shaft protector
These tools are used for removing the rotorand starter clutch.
90890-01367-01381
Fork seal driver weightFork seal driver attachment (ø41 mm)
These tools are used when installing theforkseal.
1-6
GENINFOSPECIAL TOOLS
1
Tool No. Tool name/Usage Illustration
90890-01399 Special thickness gauge
This tool is used to measure the valveclearance.
90890-01401 Spark plug wrench
This tool is used for removing or installingthe spark plug.
90890-01403 Ring nut wrench
This tool is used to tighten the steering ringnut.
90890-01469 Oil filter wrench
This tool is used for removing or installingthe oil filter.
90890-01701 Sheave holder
This tool is used for holding the magneto rotor.
90890-03081 Compression gauge
This tool is used to measure the enginecompression
90890-03094 Vacuum gauge
This tool is used to measure thesynchronizing the carburetors.
90890-03112 Pocket tester
These instruments are invaluable forchecking the electrical system.
90890-03133 Engine tachometer
This tool is needed for detecting engine rpm.
90890-03153-03139
Oil pressure gaugeOil pressure adaptor H
These tools are used to measure the engineoil pressure.
1-7
GENINFOSPECIAL TOOLS
12
1
Tool No. Tool name/Usage Illustration
90890-03141 Timing light
This tool is necessary for checking ignitiontiming.
90890-04044 Piston ring compressor
This tool is used to compress piston ringswhen installing the cylinder.
90890-03158 Carburetor angle driver
This tool is used to adjust the pilot screw.
90890-04086 Clutch holding tool
This tool is used for holding the clutch boss.
90890-04101 Valve lapper
This tool is used for removing and installingthe valve lifter and for lapping the valve.
90890-04111 Valve guide remover (4.0 mm)
This tool is used to remove the valve guides.
90890-04112 Valve guide installer (4.0 mm)
This tool is needed to install the valve guidesproperly.
90890-04113 Valve guide reamer (4.0 mm)
This tool is used to rebore the new valveguide.
90890-04019-04114
Valve spring compressorValve spring compressor attachment
These tools are used when removing orinstalling the valve and the valve spring.
90890-06754 Ignition checker
This instrument is necessary for checkingthe ignition system components.
1-8
GENINFOSPECIAL TOOLS
Tool No. Tool name/Usage Illustration
90890-85505 Yamaha bond No.1215
This sealant (bond) is used for crankcasemating surface, etc.
SPEC
2
SPEC
CHAPTER 2SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENGINE 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHASSIS 2-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELECTRICAL 2-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENERAL TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS 2-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LUBRICATIONS AND LUBRICANT TYPES 2-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENGINE 2-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHASSIS 2-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COOLING SYSTEM DIAGRAMS 2-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LUBRICATION DIAGRAMS 2-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CABLE ROUTING 2-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPEC
2-1
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS SPEC
SPECIFICATIONSGENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Model FZS600
Model code: 5DM1
Dimensions:Overall lengthOverall widthOverall heightSeat heightWheelbaseMinimum ground clearanceMinimum turning radius
2,080 mm710 mm1,170 mm790 mm1,415 mm130 mm2,900 mm
Basic weight:With oil and full fuel tank 210 kg
Engine:Engine typeCylinder arrangementDisplacementBore strokeCompression ratioCompression pressure (STD)Starting systemLubrication system:
Liquid cooled 4-stroke, DOHCForward inclined parallel 4-cylinder599 cm3
62.0 49.6 mm12 : 11,550 kPa/400 r/min (15.5 kgf/cm2)Electric starterWet sump
Oil type or grade:
Engine oil API STANDARD:SE or higher gradeACEA STANDARD:G4 or G5
Periodic oil changeWith oil filter replacementTotal amount
2.5 L2.7 L3.5 L
Radiator capacityTotal amount (including all routes)
1.95 L
Air filter: Dry type element
Fuel:TypeFuel tank capacityFuel reserve amount
Regular unleaded gasoline18 L3.5 L
2-2
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS SPEC
Model FZS600
Carburetor:Type/quantityManufacturer
BSR 33/4MIKUNI
Spark plug:TypeManufacturerSpark plug gap
CR9E, CR8E/U27ESR-NU24ESR-NNGK/DENSO0.7 0.8 mm
Clutch type: Wet, multiple-disc
Transmission:Primary reduction systemPrimary reduction ratioSecondary reduction systemSecondary reduction ratioTransmission typeOperationGear ratio 1st
2nd3rd4th5th6th
Spur gear82/48 (1.708)Chain drive48/15 (3.200)Constant mesh 6-speedLeft foot operation37/13 (2.846)37/19 (1.947)34/22 (1.545)28/21 (1.333)25/21 (1.190)29/27 (1.074)
Chassis:Frame typeCaster angleTrail
Double cradle2488 mm
Tire:TypeSize front
rearManufacturer front
rearType front
rear
Tubeless110/70ZR 17 (54W)160/60ZR 17 (69W)BRIDGESTONE/DUNLOPBRIDGESTONE/DUNLOPBT-57F/D207FBT-57R/D207J
Tire pressure:Maximum load-except motorcycleLoading condition A*
frontrear
Loading condition B*frontrear
High-speed ridingfrontrear
187 kg0 90 kg225 kPa (2.25 kg/cm2, 2.25 bar)250 kPa (2.5 kg/cm2, 2.5 bar)90 187 kg225 kPa (2.25 kg/cm2, 2.25 bar)280 kPa (2.8 kg/cm2, 2.8 bar)
225 kPa (2.25 kg/cm2, 2.25 bar)280 kPa (2.8 kg/cm2, 2.8 bar)
*Load is the total weight of cargo, rider, passenger, and accessories.
2-3
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS SPEC
Model FZS600
Brake:Front brake type
operationRear brake type
operation
Dual disc brakeRight hand operationSingle disc brakeRight foot operation
Suspension:Front suspensionRear suspension
Telescopic forkSwingarm (link suspension)
Shock absorber:Front shock absorberRear shock absorber
Coil spring/Oil damperCoil spring/Gas-oil damper
Wheel travel:Front wheel travelRear wheel travel
120 mm120 mm
Electrical:Ignition systemGenerator systemBattery typeBattery capacity
T.C.I. (digital)A.C. magnetoGT12B-412V 10 AH
Headlight bulb type: Halogen bulb
Bulb voltage, wattage quantity:HeadlightBrake/tail lightFront turn signal lightRear turn signal lightLicense lightMeter lightIndicator lightNeutral indicator lightHigh beam indicator lightOil level warning lightTurn indicator lightFuel level warning lightEngine temperature warning light
12V 60 W/55 W 212V 21W/5W 212V 21 W 212V 21 W 212V 5 W 212V 2 W 3
12V 1.4 W 112V 1.4 W 112V 1.4 W 112V 1.4 W 212V 1.4 W 1LED
2-4
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS SPEC
Face Width Seat Width Margin Thickness
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONSENGINE
Item Standard Limit
Cylinder head:Warp limit 0.05 mm
Cylinder:Bore sizeTaper limitOut of round limit
62.00 62.01 mm
62.1 mm0.09 mm0.07 mm
Camshaft:Drive methodCam cap inside dia.Camshaft out side dia.Camshaft to cap clearanceCam dimensions:Intake “A”
“B”“C”
Exhaust “A”“B”“C”
Camshaft runout limit
Chain drive (center)23.000 23.021 mm23.967 22.980 mm0.020 0.054 mm
32.75 32.85 mm25.0 25.1 mm7.65 7.85 mm32.45 32.55 mm24.95 25.05 mm7.4 7.6 mm
0.08 mm
32.7 mm24.95 mm7.5 mm32.4 mm24.9 mm7.25 mm0.03 mm
Cam chain:Cam chain type/No. of linksCam chain adjustment method
92RH2010J/130Automatic
Valve, valve seat, valve guide:Valve clearance (cold) IN
EX0.11 0.20 mm0.21 0.30 mm
Valve dimensions:
“A” head dia. INEX
“B” face width INEX
“C” seat width INEX
“D” margin thickness INEX
Stem outside dia. INEX
Guide inside dia. INEX
23.9 24.1 mm20.9 21.1 mm1.56 2.40 mm1.56 2.40 mm0.9 1.1 mm0.9 1.1 mm0.6 0.8 mm0.6 0.8 mm3.975 3.990 mm3.960 3.975 mm4.000 4.012 mm4.000 4.012 mm
1.6 mm1.6 mm0.5 mm0.5 mm3.95 mm3.935 mm4.042 mm4.042 mm
2-5
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS SPEC
Item Standard Limit
Stem-to-guide clearance INEX
Stem runout limitValve seat width IN
EX
0.010 0.037 mm0.025 0.052 mm
0.9 1.1 mm0.9 1.1 mm
0.08 mm0.1 mm0.04 mm1.6 mm1.6 mm
Valve spring:Free length IN/EXSet length (valve closed) IN/EXCompressed pressure IN/EXTilt limit IN/EXDirection of winding IN/EX
40.09 mm34.5 mm134 156 N (13.4 15.6 kg)
Clockwise
37.5 mm
2.5 /1.8 mm
Piston:Piston clearancePiston size “D”Measuring point “H”Piston off-setPiston off-set directionPiston pin bore inside dia.Piston pin outside dia.
0.025 0.050 mm61.960 61.975 mm5 mm0.5 mmIn side17.002 17.013 mm16.991 17.000 mm
0.07 mm
Piston rings:Top ring:TypeDimensions (B T)End gap (installed)Side clearance (installed)
2nd ring:TypeDimensions (B T)End gap (installed)Side clearance (installed)
Oil ring:End gap (installed)
Barrel0.8 2.2 mm0.15 0.30 mm0.020 0.075 mm
Taper0.8 2.3 mm0.25 0.40 mm0.020 0.055 mm1.5 2.3 mm0.10 0.35 mm
0.6 mm0.1 mm
0.7 mm0.1 mm
Connecting rod:Oil clearanceColor code (corresponding size)
0.043 0.066 mm1. Blue 2. Black 3. Brown 4. Green
0.08 mm
Crankshaft:Crankshaft width “A”Assembly width “B”Runout limit “C”Big end side clearance “D”Big end radial clearance “E”Small end free play “F”Journal oil clearanceColor code (corresponding size)
48.4 mm296.8 298.0 mm
0.160 0.262 mm0.043 0.066 mm0.32 0.50 mm0.025 0.043 mm1. Black 2. Brown 3. Green 4. Yellow5. Pink
0.03 mm0.5 mm0.08 mm0.8 mm0.08 mm
2-6
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS SPEC
Item Standard Limit
Clutch:Friction plate thicknessQuantityWear limit
Friction plate thicknessQuantity
Clutch plate thicknessQuantityWarp limit
Clutch spring free lengthQuantityMinimum length
Clutch housing thrust clearanceClutch housing radial clearanceClutch release methodPush rod bending limit
2.94 3.06 mm8 pcs
2.94 3.06 mm1 pcs1.9 2.1 mm8 pcs
34.9 mm6 pcs
0.05 0.13 mm0.005 0.041 mmInner push, screw push
2.8 mm
0.1 mm
34.3 mm0.2 mm
0.3 mm
Transmission:Main axle deflection limitDrive axle deflection limit
0.02 mm0.02 mm
Shifter:Shifter typeGuide bar bending limit
Guide bar
0.05 mm
Carburetor:I.D. markMain jet (M.J)Main air jet (M.A.J)Jet needle (J.N)Needle jet (N.J)Pilot air jet (P.A.J.1)Pilot outlet (P.O)Pilot jet (P.J)Bypass 1 (B.P.1)Bypass 2 (B.P.2)Bypass 3 (B.P.3)Pilot screw (P.S)Valve seat size (V.S)Starter jet (G.S.1)Starter jet (G.S.2)Throttle valve size (TH.V)Fuel level (F.L) (with
special tool)Engine idle speedIntake vacuum
5DM1 00#115#805D86P-O#1300.9#12.50.90.80.821.00.60.8#1104.5 mm
1,150 1,250 r/min30.7 33.3 kPa (230 250 mmHg)
2-7
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS SPEC
Item Standard Limit
Lubrication system:Oil filter typeOil pump typeTip clearance “A” or “B”Side clearanceBypass valve setting pressureRelief valve operating pressurePressure check location
Paper typeTrochoid type0.03 0.09 mm0.03 0.08 mm80 120 kPa (0.8 1.2 kg/cm2)450 550 kPa (4.5 5.5 kg/cm2)Main gallery
0.15 mm0.15 mm
Cooling system:Radiator core size:WidthHeightThickness
Radiator cap opening pressureRadiator capacityReservoir tank capacityFrom low to full level
320 mm161.4 mm27 mm95 125 kPa (0.95 1.25 kg/cm2)0.6 L0.61 L0.22 L
Water pump:TypeReduction ratio
Single suction centrifugal pump82/48 48/49 (1.673)
Item Size
Bearings and oil seals:Big end bearingCrankshaft bearingCrankshaft oil sealWater pump bearingWater pump oil sealMain axle bearing (left)Main axle bearing (right)Drive axle bearing (left)Drive axle bearing (right)Drive axle oil sealShift shaft oil seal
Plane 30 15Plane 30 16S3-29-40-7.5L HSBWF26-44RSD-12-28-7-1 HSBall 6204DLA8NUR83B285SH2C3 22 56 1683424ASH2CS4120NQ3315NE 20 33 15SD7-35-52-8 VSSD-12-22-5 HS
2-8
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS SPEC
TIGHTENING TORQUESENGINE
Part to be tightened Part name Threadsize Q’ty
Tighteningtorque Remarksg size y
Nm mkgCamshaft cap Bolt M6 24 10 1.0Cylinder head Nut M9 12 35 3.5Spark plug – M10 4 13 1.3Cylinder head cover Bolt M6 8 10 1.0Cylinder head side cover Bolt M5 8 9 0.9Connecting rod cap Nut M7 8 See NOTECamshaft sprocket Bolt M7 4 24 2.4Timing chain tensioner case Bolt M6 2 10 1.0Timing chain guide (intake side) Bolt M6 2 10 1.0Timing chain tensioner cap Bolt M11 1 20 2.0Pipe 2 Bolt M6 2 10 1.0Pipe 3/Pipe 4 Bolt M6 2 10 1.0Thermostat cover Bolt M6 3 10 1.0Conduction assembly Bolt M6 1 10 1.0Radiator Bolt M6 3 7 0.7Joint Bolt M6 4 10 1.0Water pump Bolt M6 2 10 1.0Water pump housing Bolt M6 2 10 1.0Radiator cover Bolt M6 4 8 0.8Pipe 5/Pipe 6 Bolt M6 4 10 1.0Roter housing Screw M6 1 7 0.7Oil pump assembly Bolt M6 3 10 1.0Strainer housing Bolt M6 2 10 1.0Strainer cover Bolt M6 14 12 1.2Oil cooler Union bolt M20 1 63 6.3Oil drain bolt Bolt M14 1 43 4.3Delivery pipe Bolt M10 2 20 2.0Delivery pipe holder Bolt M6 1 10 1.0Oil filter element – M20 1 17 1.7Carburetor joint 1.2 Bolt M6 8 10 1.0Cap case to air filter case Screw M5 4 1 0.1Air filter case Bolt M6 3 7 0.7Air filter cover to air clearance Screw M6 6 2 0.2Exhaust pipe Nut M6 8 10 1.0Exhaust joint Bolt M8 1 20 2.0Crankcase Bolt M8 12 24 2.4Crankcase Bolt M6 21 12 1.2Crankcase Bolt M8 1 24 2.4Breather plate Screw M6 6 7 0.7Oil seal stopper plate Bolt M6 2 10 1.0A.C magneto cover Bolt M6 5 12 1.2Drive sprocket cover Bolt M6 5 10 1.0Drive sprocket cover Screw M5 4 4 0.4
2-9
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS SPEC
NOTE:
Lower crankcase Upper crankcase
Part to be tightened Part name Threadsize Q’ty
Tighteningtorque Remarksg size y
Nm mkgStarter cover Bolt M6 7 12 1.2Oil gallery – M16 2 8 0.8Clutch cover Bolt M6 10 12 1.2Clamp (A.C magneto cover) Screw M6 1 7 0.7Starter clutch assembly Bolt M10 1 80 8.0Starter clutch outer Bolt M8 3 30 3.0Pressure plate Screw M6 6 8 0.8Clutch boss Bolt M18 1 70 7.0Push lever Screw M5 2 5 0.5Push rod adjuster Nut M8 1 16 1.6Drive sprocket Nut M18 1 70 7.0Shift drum retainer Bolt M6 1 10 1.0Shift arm Bolt M6 1 10 1.0Shift fork guide bar retainer Bolt M6 2 10 1.0Shift pedal adjuster Nut M6 2 7 0.7Stopper lever Bolt M6 1 10 1.0Side plate 2 Screw M5 1 4 0.4A.C magneto roter Bolt M12 1 130 13.0Stator coil Bolt M6 3 10 1.0Pickup coil Screw M5 2 5 0.5Starter motor Bolt M6 2 10 1.0Neutral switch Screw M6 2 4 0.4Oil level sensor Bolt M6 2 7 0.7Thermo switch (fan motor) – M16 1 23 2.3Thermo switch (warning light) – PT1/8 1 8 0.8
After tightening to 15 Nm (1.5 mkg), tighten another 90.
Crankcase tightening sequence
2-10
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS SPEC
CHASSIS
Item Standard Limit
Steering system:Steering bearing type
Angular bearing
Front suspension:Front fork travelFork spring free lengthFitting lengthCollar lengthSpring Rate (K1)
(K2)Stroke (K1)
(K2)Optional springOil capacityOil levelOil grade
120 mm323 mm315.9 mm200 mm7.5 N/mm (0.75 kg/mm)14 N/mm (1.4 kg/mm)0 70 mm70 120 mmNo475 cm3
121 mmFork oil 10W or equivalent
319 mm
Rear suspension:Shock absorber travelSpring free lengthFitting lengthSpring Rate (K1)Stroke (K1)Optional springEnclosed gas/air pressure (STD)
50 mm177 mm168 mm147 N/mm (14.7 kg/mm)0 50 mmNo1200 kPa (12 kg/cm2)
Swingarm:gSwingarm free play limit-end 1 mmSwingarm free play limit-side 1 mm
Front wheel:TypeRim sizeRim materialRim runout limit radial
lateral
Cast wheel17 MT3.00Aluminum
1 mm0.5 mm
Rear wheel:TypeRim sizeRim materialRim runout limit radial
lateral
Cast wheel17 MT5.00Aluminum
1 mm0.5 mm
Drive chain:Type/manufacturerNo. of linksChain free play
50VA7/DAIDO11030 40 mm
2-11
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS SPEC
Item Standard Limit
Front disc brake:TypeDisc outside dia. thicknessDisc deflection limitPad thickness InnerPad thickness OuterMaster cylinder inside dia.Caliper cylinder inside dia.
Brake fluid type
Dual298 4 mm
5.5 mm5.5 mm14 mm30.2 mm27 mmDOT No.4
0.2 mm0.5 mm0.5 mm
Rear disc brake:TypeDisc outside dia. thicknessDisc deflection limitPad thickness innerPad thickness outerMaster cylinder inside dia.Caliper cylinder inside dia.Brake fluid type
Single245 5 mm
5.5 mm5.5 mm12.7 mm38.1 mmDOT No.4
0.15 mm0.5 mm0.5 mm
Brake lever and brake pedal:Brake pedal position (N) 36.6 mm
Clutch lever free play (lever end)Th l i f l
10 15 mm
Throttle grip free play 3 5 mm
Item Size
Bearings and oil seals:Pivot shaft bearingFront wheel bearing (left)Front wheel bearing (right)Rear wheel bearing (left)Rear wheel bearing (right)Rear wheel oil seal (right)Clutch hub bearingClutch hub oil seal
TA2428Z/24 31 286203LLU/2A 17 40 126203 LLU/2A 17 40 126204 2RS 20 47 146204 2RS 20 47 14SD-28-47-7-162062RS 30 62 16MHSA-40-62-8-B
2-12
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS SPEC
TIGHTENING TORQUESCHASSIS
Part to be tightened Thread sizeTightening
torque Remarksg
Nm mkgUpper bracket and inner tube M8 1.25 30 3.0Upper bracket and steering stem M22 1.0 110 11.0Handlebar under holder M10 1.25 40 4.0Handlebar upper holder M8 1.25 23 2.3Under bracket and inner tube M10 1.25 30 3.0Ring nut (steering stem) M25 1.0 – – NOTEMaster cylinder bracket M6 1.0 10 1.0Master cylinder cap M4 0.7 2 0.2Brake hose union bolt M10 1.25 30 3.0Grip end M10 1.0 7 0.7Cowling stay M8 1.25 33 3.3Cowling bracket M6 1.0 7 0.7Front fender M6 1.0 7 0.7Engine bracket (front) M8 1.25 33 3.3Engine mount (front) M10 1.25 55 5.5Engine mount (rear upper) M10 1.25 55 5.5Engine mount (rear under) M10 1.25 55 5.5Engine bracket (rear) M8 1.25 33 3.3Pivot shaft M16 1.5 11.5 11.5Rear shock absorber (upper) M10 1.25 40 4.0Rear shock absorber and relay arm M10 1.25 40 4.0Relay arm and rear shock absorber bracket M10 1.25 48 4.8Relay arm and connecting rod M12 1.25 48 4.8Connecting rod and rear arm M12 1.25 48 4.8Chain guide M6 1.0 7 0.7Chain case M6 1.0 7 0.7Fuel tank (front) M6 1.0 10 1.0Fuel tank (rear) M6 1.0 10 1.0Fuel tank bracket (rear) M6 1.0 7 0.7Cap M5 0.8 6 0.6Fuel cock M6 1.0 7 0.7Fuel sender M5 0.8 4 0.4Ignition coil M6 1.0 7 0.7Seat lock M6 1.0 7 0.7Roter M6 1.0 7 0.7Rear fender and frame M6 1.0 7 0.7Taillight bracket and rear fender M6 1.0 7 0.7Tail cover and Taillight bracket M5 0.8 4 0.4Tail cover and frame M6 1.0 7 0.7Rear turn signal light M6 1.0 7 0.7Taillight M6 1.0 4 0.4
2-13
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS SPEC
NOTE:
Part to be tightened Thread sizeTightening
torque RemarksgNm mkg
Side cover and frame M6 1.0 4 0.4Garb bar M8 1.25 19 1.9Front wheel axle M16 1.5 67 6.7Front wheel axle pinch bolt M8 1.0 20 2.0Front brake caliper M8 1.25 40 4.0Front brake disc M8 1.25 23 2.3Front brake caliper bleed screw M7 1.0 6 0.6Compression bar M8 1.25 23 2.3Rear wheel sprocket M10 1.25 60 6.0Drive chain puller nut M8 1.25 16 1.6Rear brake caliper and caliper bracket M10 1.25 40 4.0Rear wheel axle nut M18 1.5 117 11.7Rear brake hose union bolt M10 1.25 30 3.0Rear brake caliper bleed screw M7 1.0 6 0.6Rear brake disc M8 1.25 23 2.3Sidestand M8 1.25 23 2.3Bracket footrest and frame M8 1.25 28 2.8Rear master cylinder and bracket M8 1.25 23 2.3Footrest bracket and footrest M10 1.25 55 5.5Footrest bracket (rear) and frame M8 1.25 28 2.8Center stand nut M10 1.25 56 5.6Footrest bracket and exhaust pipe M8 1.25 20 2.0Footrest bracket (rear) and muffler M10 1.25 30 3.0
1. First, tighten the ring nut (lower) approximately 52 Nm (5.2 mkg) by using the torque wrench, thenloosen the right nut completely.
2. Second, tighten the ring nut (lower) approximately 18 Nm (1.8 mkg) by using the torque wrench,then finger tighten the ring nut (center). Align the slots both ring nut and install the lock washer.
3. Final, hold the ring nuts (lower and center) and tighten the ring nut (upper) 110 Nm (11.0 mkg) byusing the torque wrench.
2-14
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS SPEC
ELECTRICAL
Item Standard Limit
Voltage 12 V
Ignition system:Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.)Advanced timing (B.T.D.C.)Advance type
10 /1,250 r/min50 /4,500 r/minTPS and electrical type
T.C.I.:Pickup coil resistanceT.C.I. unit model/manufacturer
189 231 Ω Y-LJ4T085/MITSUBISHI
Ignition coil:Model/manufacturerPrimary winding resistanceSecondary winding resistance
J0313/DENSO1.87 2.53 Ω at 20C12 18 kΩ at 20C
Spark plug cap:TypeResistance
Resin type10 kΩ
Charging system:TypeModel/manufacturerStandard outputStator coil resistance
A.C. magnetoF4T359/MITSUBISHI12 V 18 A at 5,000 r/min0.36 0.44 Ω at 20C/W-W
Voltage regulator:TypeModel/manufacturerNo load regulated voltage
Semi conductor-short circuit typeSH650-12/SHINDENGEN14.1 14.9 V
Rectifier:Model/manufactureCapacityWithstand voltage
SH650-12/SHINDENGEN18 A200 V
Battery:Specific gravity 1,320
Electric starter system:Type Constant mesh type
2-15
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS SPEC
Item Standard Limit
Starter motor:Model/manufacturerI.D. numberOutputArmature coil resistanceBrush overall lengthBrush spring pressureCommutator dia.Mica undercut (depth)
SM-13/MITSUBASM-130.7 kW0.0015 0.0025 Ω at 20C10 mm7.8 10.2 N (780 1.020 gf)28 mm0.7 mm
4 mm
27 mm
Starter relay:Model/manufacturerAmperage ratingCoil winding resistance
MS5F-631/JIDECO100 A4.18 4.62 Ω at 20C
Horn:TypeQuantityModel manufacturerMaximum amperagePerformanceCoil winding resistance
Plane type1 pcsYF-12/NIKKO3.0 A105 120 db/2 m1.15 1.25 Ω at 20C
Flasher relay:TypeModel/manufacturerSelf cancelling deviceHazard flasher deviceFlasher frequencyWattage
Full transistor typeFE246BH/DENSONoYes75 95 cyl/min21 W 2 + 1.4 W
Oil level gauge:Model/manufacture 4JH/SOMIC
Fuel gauge:Model/manufactureSender unit resistance-full
-empty
4YR/NIPPON SEIKI4 10 Ω90 100 Ω
Electric fan:Model/manufacturer 5DM/DENSO
Thermostat switch:Model/manufacture 3LN/NIPPON THERMOSTAT
Circuit breaker:Type Fuse
2-16
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS SPEC
Item Standard limit
Amperage for individual circuit:MainHeadlightSignalIgnitionFanBack upReserve
30 A20 A20 A20 A10 A5 A30 A20 A10 A5 A
2-17
GENERAL TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS SPECEB201000
GENERAL TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONSThis chart specifies tightening torques for standard fasteners with a standard ISO thread pitch. Tight-ening torque specifications for special components or assemblies are provided for each chapter of thismanual. To avoid warpage, tighten multi-fastener assemblies in a crisscross pattern and progressivestages until the specified tightening torque is reached. Unless otherwise specified, tightening torquespecifications require clean, dry threads. Components should be at room temperature.
A: Width across flatsB: Thread diameter
A(Nut)
B(Bolt)
General tighteningtorques
(Nut) (Bolt)Nm mkg
10 mm 6 mm 6 0.6
12 mm 8 mm 15 1.5
14 mm 10 mm 30 3.0
17 mm 12 mm 55 5.5
19 mm 14 mm 85 8.5
22 mm 16 mm 130 13.0
2-18
LUBRICATION POINT AND LUBRICATION TYPES SPEC
LUBRICATION POINT AND LUBRICATION TYPESENGINE
Lubrication Point SymbolOil seal lipsBearingCrankshaft journalConnecting rod big end and small endPiston, piston pinConnecting rod boltCamshaft journal, profileValve stem (IN, EX)Valve stem end (IN, EX)Cylinder head tightening nut mounting surfaceValve lifterCamshaft capWater pump seal CoolantWater pump shaftRadiator hose SiliconOil pumpRelief valve O-ringOil cooler O-ringOil filterOil level gaugeStarter moter O-ringStarter idrer gearMain axle 5, 6th pinionDrive axle 1 4th wheel gearPush leverPush rodShift camShift fork guide barShift shaftStarter idrer gear shaft 1Neutral switch O-ringPush rodPush rod 1 O-ringShift pedalShift shaftWater pump O-ringCylinder head cover gasket Yamaha bond No. 1215Shift cam plugBreather plateCrankcase Yamaha bond No. 1215Taper plugBearing plate
2-19
LUBRICATION POINT AND LUBRICATION TYPES SPEC
CHASSIS
Lubrication Point SymbolSteering bearing and bearing race (upper and lower)Pivot shaftRear arm bearingRear arm oil sealRear arm cover oil seal lipsRelay arm bearingRelay arm oil sealRear shock absorber (upper/ lower)Front wheel oil sealSpeed sensor oil sealRear wheel oil sealClutch damper oil sealClutch and rear wheelThrottle cable inner surfaceStarter cable inner surface and lever pivotRear brake pedal shaftShift pedal shaftSide stand sliding surfaceRear foot rest pivot bolt
2-20
10
3
2
4
11
3
65
5
6
7
8
9
8 Radiator outlet hose9 Radiator10 Radiator inlet hose
1 Engine outlet hose2 Engine outlet hose3 Carburetor inlet hose4 Carburetor outlet hose5 Water pump6 Coolant drain bolt7 Water pump outlet hose
COOLING SYSTEM DIAGRAMS SPECEB203000
COOLING SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
2-21
1 Radiator2 Water pump outlet hose3 Oil cooler inlet hose4 Oil cooler outlet hose5 Carburetor outlet hose
COOLING SYSTEM DIAGRAMS SPEC
2-22
12
3
4
7
6 5 4
1 Oil nozzle (main nozzle)2 Oil nozzle (drive axle)3 Projection4 Oil filter5 Relief valve6 Oil strainer7 Oil pump
LUBRICATION DIAGRAMS SPECEB204000
LUBRICATION DIAGRAMS
2-23
1 2
3
4
LUBRICATION DIAGRAMS SPEC
1 Main axle2 Drive axle3 Camshaft4 Oil delivery pipe
2-24
1
2
LUBRICATION DIAGRAMS SPEC
1 Camshaft2 Crankshaft
2-25
12
3
4
5
6
7
8
7
A
B
9 Handlebar switch (left)A Use a plastic clamp to fasten
together the handlebar switchlead (left), clutch cable andstarter cable.
B Pass the brake hose out sideof the speed sensor lead, thenuse a plastic clamp to fastenthem.
1 Throttle cable2 Clutch cable3 Handlebar switch (right)4 Starter cable5 Main switch6 Brake hose7 Speed sensor lead8 Headlight lead
CABLE ROUTING SPECEB205000
CABLE ROUTING
2-26
1 Main switch lead2 Starter cable3 Handlebar switch lead (left)4 Clutch cable5 Rectifier / regulator6 Horn lead7 Box8 Air guide plate9 Starter cable10 Flasher leray
CABLE ROUTING SPEC
11 Battery12 Starting circuit cut-off relay13 Battery positive (+) lead14 Seat lock cable15 AC magneto lead16 Starter motor lead17 Air filter drain hose18 Sidestand switch19 Neutral switch20 Oil level switch
21 Speed sensor lead22 Horn23 Starter relay24 Fuse box25 To front brake switch26 To battery negative (–) lead27 To starter relay28 AC magneto coupler29 Pickup coupler30 Sidestand switch coupler31 Oil level /neutral switch coupler
2-27
D Use a steel holder to fastentogether the AC magneto lead,sidestand lead and oillevel /neutral switch lead.
E Use a plastic clamp to fastenthe horn lead and air guideplate to the frame.
A Use a plastic clamp to fastenthe handlebar switch lead (left),main switch lead, clutch cableand starter cable to the frame.
B Use a plastic band to fastentogether wireharness, startermotor lead, AC magneto lead,sidestand switch lead and oillevel /neutral switch lead, thenhold the clamp to the framebracket.
CABLE ROUTING SPEC
Position the band end to out side ofchassis.C Use a plastic locking tie to
fasten the starter motor lead,AC magneto lead, sidestandswitch lead and oil level /neutralswitch lead to the frame bracket.Cut off the excess end of the tie.
2-28
1 Battery negative (–) lead2 Rear brake switch lead3 Battery4 Reservoir tank hose5 Air filter6 Fuel tank breather hose7 Fuel tank drain hose8 T.P.S. lead9 Handlebar switch lead (right)
CABLE ROUTING SPEC
10 Throttle cable11 Brake hose12 Headlight lead13 Speed sensor lead14 Main switch lead15 Reservoir tank16 Cross tube17 Reservoir tank over flow hose18 Swingarm bracket
A Use a plastic clamp to fastentogether the throttle cables,headlight lead handlebar switch(right) and speed sensor lead.
B Use a plastic locking tie tofasten the handlebar switch(right) and brake hose to theright front fork inner tube.
2-29
E Pass the battery negative (–)lead inside of the reservoirhose.
C Pass the main switch lead underthe throttle cables, headlightlead, handlebar switch lead(right) and speed sensor lead,then insert it right side of the box.
D Pass the reservoir tank overflow hose, fuel tank breatherhose and fuel tank drain hosethrough the cable holder.
CABLE ROUTING SPEC
2-30
21 Starter relay22 Starting circuit cut-off relay23 Flasher relay24 Fuel pump lead coupler25 Ignition coil26 Clutch cable27 Ground lead28 Starter cable29 Fan motor lead30 Rectifier / regulator lead
11 Battery negative (–) lead12 Battery13 Rear brake reservoir tank14 Rear brake switch lead15 Seat lock cable16 Ignitor17 Rear turn signal light lead (right)18 Taillight lead19 Rear turn signal light lead (left)20 Starter motor lead
1 Throttle cable2 Handlebar switch lead (right)3 Headlight lead4 Speed sensor lead5 Carburetor heater hose6 Reservoir tank hose7 Fuel pump8 Fuel filter9 T.P.S lead10 Fuel sender, coupler
CABLE ROUTING SPEC
2-31
turn signal light lead and clampit.
D Pass the reservoir hose left sideof thermo stat housing.
E Do not fasten the high tensioncord #4 with locking tie.
F Use a plastic band to fasten thehigh tension cord #3, #4.
G Pass the carburetor inlet hoseunder the high tension cord #2,#4.
B Pass the rectifier / regulatorlead, fan motor lead, handlebarswitch lead (left), main switchlead, headlight lead, handlebarswitch lead (right) and speedsensor lead through front sideof the box, then connecte eachcoupler in the box.
C Align the connector position ofrear turn signal light leads (leftand right), then bend the rear
31 Starter cable32 Clutch cable33 Handlebar switch lead (left)34 Main switch lead35 To taillight36 Rear fender37 ClampA Pass the wireharness under
the starter relay.
CABLE ROUTING SPEC
SPEC
CHKADJ
3
CHKADJ
CHAPTER 3PERIODIC INSPECTIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS
INTRODUCTION 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PERIODIC MAINTENANCE/LUBRICATION INTERVALS 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRONT COWLING/SEAT/SIDE COVER/FUEL TANK 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENGINE 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYNCHRONIZING THE CARBURETORS 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADJUSTING THE ENGINE IDLING SPEED 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE SPARK PLUGS 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MEASURING THE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADJUSTING THE CLUTCH CABLE FREE PLAY 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEANING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE CARBURETOR JOINTS ANDINTAKE MANIFOLDS 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE FUEL HOSES AND FUEL FILTER 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE CRANKCASE BREATHER HOSE 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE EXHAUST SYSTEM 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE COOLING SYSTEM 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANGING THE COOLANT 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHASSIS 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADJUSTING THE FRONT BRAKE 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE BRAKE HOSES 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADJUSTING THE SHIFT PEDAL 3-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADJUSTING THE DRIVE CHAIN SLACK 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LUBRICATING THE DRIVE CHAIN 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE STEERING HEAD 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE FRONT FORK 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADJUSTING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE TIRES 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE WHEELS 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THE CABLES 3-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LUBRICATING THE LEVERS AND PEDALS 3-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LUBRICATING THE SIDESTAND 3-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LUBRICATING THE CENTER STAND 3-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LUBRICATING THE REAR SUSPENSION 3-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE FUSES 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULBS 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAMS 3-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHKADJ
3-1
INTRODUCTION /PERIODIC MAINTENANCE/LUBRICATION INTERVALS
CHKADJ
EB300000
PERIODIC INSPECTIONS AND ADJUSTMENTSINTRODUCTIONThis chapter includes all information necessary to perform recommended inspections and adjust-ments. If followed, these preventive maintenance procedures will ensure more reliable vehicle opera-tion, a longer service life and reduce the need for costly overhaul work. This information applies to ve-hicles already in service as well as to new vehicles that are being prepared for sale. All servicetechnicians should be familiar with this entire chapter.
EB301000
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE/LUBRICATION INTERVALSEVERY
NO. ITEM CHECKS AND MAINTENANCE JOBSINITIAL
(1,000 km)
6,000 kmor
6 months(whichevercomes first)
12,000 kmor
12 months(whichevercomes first)
1 * Fuel line Check fuel hoses and vacuum hose for cracks or
damage. Replace if necessary.
√ √
2 * Fuel filter Check condition. Replace if necessary. √
3 Spark plugs Check condition. Clean, regap or replace if necessary. √ √ √
4 * Valves Check valve clearance. Adjust if necessary.
Every 42,000 km or 42 months(whichever comes first)
5 Air filter Clean or replace if necessary. √ √
6 Clutch Check operation Adjust or replace cable. √ √ √
7 * Front brake
Cehck operation, fluid level and vehicle for fluidleakage. (See NOTE.)
Correct accordingly. Replace brake pads if necessary.
√ √ √
8 * Rear brake
Check operation, fluid level and vehicle for fluidleakage. (See NOTE.)
Correct accordingly. Replace brake pads if necessary.
√ √ √
9 * Wheels Check balance, runout and for damage. Rebalance or replace if necessary. √ √
10 * Tires
Check tread depth and for damage. Replace if necessary. Check air pressure. Correct if necessary.
√ √
11 * Wheel bearings Check bearing for looseness or damage. Replace if necessary. √ √
12 * Swingarm
Check swingarm pivoting point for play. Correct if necessary. Lubricate with molybdenum disulfide grease every
24,000 km or 24 months (whichever comes first).
√ √
13 Dirve chain
Check chain slack. Adjust if necessary. Make sure that the rear wheel is
properly aligned. Clean and lubricate.
Every 1,000 km and after washing themotorcycle or riding in the rain
14 * Steering bearings
Check bearing play and steering for roughness. Correct accordingly. Lubricate with lithium soap base grease every
24,000 km or 24 months (whichever comes first).
√ √
15 * Chassis fasteners Make sure that all nuts, bolts and screws are properly
tightened. Tighten if necessary.
√ √
16 *Sidestand/centerstand
Check operation. Lubricate and repair if necessary. √ √
3-2
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE/LUBRICATION INTERVALSCHKADJ
NOTE:
EVERY
NO. ITEM CHECKS AND MAINTENANCE JOBSINITIAL
(1,000 km)
6,000 kmor
6 months(whichevercomes first)
12,000 kmor
12 months(whichevercomes first)
17 * Sidestand switch Check operation. Replace if necessary. √ √ √
18 * Front fork Check operation and for oil leakage. Correct accordingly. √ √
19 *Rear shockabsorberassembly
Check operation and shock absorber for oil leakage. Replace shock absorber assembly if necessary. √ √
20 *
Rear suspensionrelay arm andconnectingarm pivotingpoints
Check operation. Lubricate with molybdenum disulfide grease every
24,000 km or 24 months (whichever comes first).√ √
21 * Carburetors Check engine idling speed, synchronization and
starter operation. Adjust if necessary.
√ √ √
22 Engine oil Check oil level and vehicle for oil leakage. Correct if necessary. Change. (Warm engine before draining.)
√ √ √
23Engine oil filtercartridge Replace. √ √
24 * Cooling system
Check coolant level and vehicle for coolant leakage. Correct if necessary. Change coolant every 24,000 km or 24 months
(whichever comes first).
√ √
*Since these items require special tools, data and technical skills, they should be serviced by a Yamaha dealer.
The air filter needs more frequent service if you are riding in unusually wet or dusty areas. Brake fluid replacement1. When disassembling the master cylinder or caliper cylinder, always replace the brake fluid. Check
the brake fluid level regularly and fill as required.2. Replace the oil seals on the inner parts of the master cylinder and caliper cylinder every two years.3. Replace the brake hose every four years or if cracked or damaged.
3-3
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Disconnect the couplers.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
NOTE:
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
1234567
Removing the front cowlingView mirror (left /right)Inner panel (left /right)Cowling stay (left /right)Head light leadFront flasher light lead (left /right)Front cowlingHead light assembly
1/11/11/12
2/211
33 Nm (3.3 mkg)
CHKADJ
FRONT COWLING/SEAT/SIDE COVER/FUEL TANK
FRONT COWLING/SEAT/SIDE COVER/FUEL TANKFRONT COWLING
3-4
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
123456789
Removing the seat, side coverand fuel tankSeatFuel tankFuel sender leadFuel tank breaser hoseFuel tank drain hoseFuel hoseSide cover (left /right)Grab barTail cover
111111
1/111
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Disconnect the couplers.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
NOTE:
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
4 Nm (0.4 mkg)
19 Nm (1.9 mkg)
FRONT COWLING/SEAT/SIDE COVER/FUEL TANK
CHKADJ
SEAT, SIDE COVER AND FUEL TANK
3-5
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCECHKADJ
NOTE:
EB303001
ENGINEADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCEThe following procedure applies to all of thevalves.
Valve clearance adjustment should bemade on a cold engine, at room tempera-ture.
When the valve clearance is to be mea-sured or adjusted, the piston must be at topdead center (TDC) on the compressionstroke.
1. Remove: front cowling seat fuel tank
(Refer to “FRONT COWLING SEAT, SIDECOVER AND FUEL TANK” in chapter 3)
2. Drain the coolant(Refer to “COOLANT REPLACEMENT” inchapter 3)
3. Remove: radiator
(Refer to “RADIATOR” in chapter 5)
4. Remove: spark plug cap spark plug magneto cover
5. Measure: valve clearance
Out of specification Adjust.
Valve clearance (cold)Intake valve
0.11 0.20 mmExhaust valve
0.21 0.30 mm
3-6
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCECHKADJ
b
a
1
NOTE:
NOTE:
a. Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise.b. When piston #1 is at TDC on the com-
pression stroke, align the TDC mark a onthe generator rotor with the mark b onthe crankcase.
TDC on the compression stroke can befound when the camshaft lobes are turnedaway from each other.
c. Measure the valve clearance with a thick-ness gauge 1 .
If the valve clearance is incorrect, recordthe measured reading.
Measure the valve clearance in the follow-ing sequence.
Valve clearance measuring sequenceCylinder #1 #2 #4 #3
A Frontd. For each cylinder, starting with cylinder
#1 at TDC, turn the crankshaft counter-clockwise as specified in the followingtable.
B Degrees that the crankshaft is turnedcounterclockwise.
C CylinderD Combustion cycle
#2 Cylinder 180
#4 Cylinder 360
#3 Cylinder 540
6. Remove: carburetor
Refer to “CARBURETION” in chapter 6.
3-7
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCECHKADJ
NOTE:
NOTE:
7. Remove: timing chain tensioner bolt 1 timing chain tensioner assembly 2
8. Remove: timing chain guide 1 timing chain guide (upper) 2 camshaft cap 3
9. Remove: camshaft 1
Refer to “DISASSEMBLING THE ENGINE– CAMSHAFT AND CYLINDER HEAD” inchapter 4.
When removing the timing chain and cam-shafts, fasten a wire to the timing chain toretrieve it if it falls into the crankcase.
10. Adjust: valve clearance
a. Remove the valve lifter 1 and the valvepad 2 .
Cover the timing chain opening with a ragto prevent the valve pad from falling intothe crankcase.
Make a note of the position of each valvelifter 1 and valve pad 2 so that they canbe installed in the correct place.
b. Select the proper valve pad from the fol-lowing table.
Valve padthickness range
Available valvepads
Nos.120 240
120 2.40 mm
25 thicknessin 0.05 mmincrements
3-8
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCECHKADJ
NOTE:
NOTE:
The thickness a of each valve pad ismarked in hundredths of millimeters on theside that touches the valve lifter.
Since valve pads of various sizes are origi-nally installed, the valve pad number mustbe rounded in order to reach the closestequivalent to the original.
c. Round off the original valve pad numberaccording to the following table.
Last digit Rounded valve
0 or 2 0
5 5
8 10
EXAMPLE:Original valve pad number = 148 (thickness= 1.48 mm)Rounded value = 150d. Locate the rounded number of the origi-
nal valve pad and the measured valveclearance in the valve pad selectiontable.The point where the column and row in-tersect is the new valve pad number.
The new valve pad number is only anapproximation. The valve clearance must bemeasured again and the above steps shouldbe repeated if the measurement is still incor-rect.
3-9
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCECHKADJ
Measuredclearance
exa
INSTALLED PAD NUMBER
EXAMPLE:VALVE CLEARANCE: 0.11 0.20 mm
Installed is 150Measured clearance is 0.25 mmReplace 150 pad with 160 pad
120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.00 0.02 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 2250.03 0.07 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 2300.08 0.10 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 2350.11 0.20 Specification0.21 0.22 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.23 0.27 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.28 0.32 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.33 0.37 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.38 0.42 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.43 0.47 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.48 0.52 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.53 0.57 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.58 0.62 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.63 0.67 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.68 0.72 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.73 0.77 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.78 0.82 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.83 0.87 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.88 0.92 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.93 0.97 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.98 1.02 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2401.03 1.07 210 215 220 225 230 235 2401.08 1.12 215 220 225 230 235 2401.13 1.17 220 225 230 235 2401.18 1.22 225 230 235 2401.23 1.27 230 235 2401.28 1.32 235 2401.33 1.37 240
Measuredclearance
exa
EXAMPLE:VALVE CLEARANCE: 0.21 0.30 mm
Installed is 175Measured clearance is 0.35 mmReplace 175 pad with 185 pad
INSTALLED PAD NUMBER120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
0.00 0.02 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 2150.03 0.07 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 2200.08 0.10 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 2250.13 0.17 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 2300.18 0.20 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 2350.21 0.30 Specification0.31 0.32 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.33 0.37 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.38 0.42 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.43 0.47 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.48 0.52 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.53 0.57 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.58 0.62 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.63 0.67 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.68 0.72 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.73 0.77 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.78 0.82 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.83 0.87 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.88 0.92 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.93 0.97 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2400.98 1.02 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2401.30 1.07 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2401.08 1.12 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 2401.13 1.17 210 215 220 225 230 235 2401.18 1.22 215 220 225 230 235 2401.23 1.27 220 225 230 235 2401.28 1.32 225 230 235 2401.33 1.37 230 235 2401.38 1.42 235 2401.43 1.47 240
VALVE PAD SELECTION TABLEINTAKE
EXHAUST
3-10
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCECHKADJ
a
NOTE:
NOTE:
CAUTION:
NOTE:
e. Install the new valve pad 1 and the valvelifter 2 .
Apply molybdenum disulfide grease to thevalve pad.
Lubricate the valve lifter with molybdenumdisulfide oil.
The valve lifter must turn smoothly whenrotated by hand.
Install the valve lifter and the valve pad inthe correct place.
f. Install the exhaust and intake camshafts,timing chain and camshaft caps.
Camshaft cap bolt10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Refer to “CAMSHAFT” in chapter 4. Lubricate the camshaft bearings, cam-
shaft lobes and camshaft journals. First, install the exhaust camshaft. Align the camshaft marks a with the cam-
shaft cap marks. Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise
several turns to seat the parts.
The camshaft caps must be tightenedevenly or damage to the cylinder head,camshaft caps and camshafts will result.
g. Measure the valve clearance again.h. If the valve clearance is still out of specifi-
cation, repeat all of the valve clearanceadjustment steps until the specified clear-ance is obtained.
11. Install: all removed parts
For installation, reverse the removal proce-dure. Note the following points.
12. Install: timing chain guide (exhaust side) timing chain guide (upper) timing chain tensioner
Refer to “CAMSHAFT” in CHAPTER 4.
13. Install: AC magneto cover
Bolt (AC magneto cover):12 Nm (1.2 mkg)
3-11
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE/SYNCHRONIZING THE CARBURETORS
CHKADJ
NOTE:
NOTE:
14. Install: cylinder head cover spark plugs
Bolt (cylinder head cover):10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Spark plug:13 Nm (1.3 mkg)
EB303010
SYNCHRONIZING THE CARBURETORS
Prior to synchronizing the carburetors, thevalve clearance and the engine idling speedshould be properly adjusted and the ignitiontiming should be checked.
1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand.
2. Remove: cap
3. Install: vacuum gauge 1 engine tachometer 2
(to the spark plug lead of cyl. #1)
Vacuum gauge90890-03094
Engine tachometer90890-03113
4. Start the engine and let it warm up for sever-al minutes.
5. Check: engine idling speed
Out of specification Adjust.Refer to “ADJUSTING THE ENGINE ID-LING SPEED”.
Engine idling speed1,150 1,250 r/min
3-12
SYNCHRONIZING THE CARBURETORSCHKADJ
NOTE:
NOTE:
6. Adjust: carburetor synchronization
a. Synchronize carburetor #1 to carburetor#2 by turning the synchronizing screw 1in either direction until both gauges readthe same.
After each step, rev the engine two or threetimes, each time for less than a second, andcheck the synchronization again.
b. Synchronize carburetor #4 to carburetor#3 by turning the synchronizing screw 2in either direction until both gauges readthe same.
c. Synchronize carburetor #2 to carburetor#3 by turning the synchronizing screw 3in either direction until both gauges readthe same.
Vacuum pressure at engineidling speed
30.7 33.3 kPa(230 250 mm Hg)
The difference in vacuum pressure betweentwo carburetors should not exceed 1.33 kPa(10 mm Hg, 0.4 in Hg).
7. Check: engine idling speed
Out of specification Adjust.
8. Stop the engine and remove the measuringequipment.
9. Adjust: throttle cable free play
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE THROTTLECABLE FREE PLAY”.
Throttle cable free play (atthe flange of the throttle grip)
3 5 mm
10. Install: cap
3-13
ADJUSTING THE ENGINE IDLING SPEEDCHKADJ
1
NOTE:
a
b
EB303020
ADJUSTING THE ENGINE IDLING SPEED
Prior to adjusting the engine idling speed,the carburetor synchronization should beadjusted properly, the air filter should beclean, and the engine should have adequatecompression.
1. Start the engine and let it warm up for sever-al minutes.
2. Install: engine tachometer
(to the spark plug lead of cyl. #1)
Engine tachometer90890-03113
3. Check: engine idling speed
Out of specification Adjust.
Engine idling speed1,150 1,250 r/min
4. Adjust: engine idling speed
a. Turn the pilot screw 1 in or out until it islightly seated.
b. Turn the pilot screw out by the specifiednumber of turns.
Carburetor angle driver:90890-03158
Pilot screw: 2 turns out
c. Turn the throttle stop screw 2 a or b un-til the specified idling speed is obtained.
Direction Idling speed isincreased.
Direction Idling sped isdecreased.
5. Adjust: throttle cable free play
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE THROTTLECABLE FREE PLAY”.
Throttle cable free play (at theflange of the throttle grip)
3 5 mm
3-14
ab
ab
ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAYCHKADJ
NOTE:
NOTE:
a
b
NOTE:
a
b
EB303032
ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE CABLE FREEPLAY
Prior to adjusting the throttle cable free play,the engine idling speed and carburetor syn-chronization should be adjusted properly.
1. Check: throttle cable free play a
Out of specification Adjust.
Throttle cable free play (at theflange of the throttle grip)
3 5 mm
2. Remove: bracket ignition coil fuel pump
3. Adjust: throttle cable free play
Carburetor side
When the motorcycle is accelerating,throttle cable #1 1 is pulled and throttlecable #2 2 is pushed.
a. Loosen the locknut 3 on throttle cable#2.
b. Turn the adjuster 4 a or b to take upany slack on throttle cable #2.
c. Loosen the locknut 5 on throttle cable#1.
d. Turn the adjuster 6 a or b until the spe-cified free play is obtained.
Direction Throttle cable free playis increased.
Direction Throttle cable free playis decreased.
e. Tighten the locknuts.
If the specified throttle cable free play cannotbe obtained on the carburetor side of thecable, use the adjusting nut on the handle-bar side.
Handlebar sidea. Loosen the locknut 1 .b. Turn the adjusting nut 2 in direction a or
b until the specified throttle cable freeplay is obtained.
Direction Throttle cable free playis increased.
Direction Throttle cable free playis decreased.
c. Tighten the locknut.
3-15
ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY/CHECKING THE SPARK PLUGS
CHKADJ
CAUTION:
NOTE:
After adjusting the throttle cable freeplay, turn the handlebar to the right andto the left to ensure that this does notcause the engine idling speed to change.
4. Install: fuel pump ignition coil bracket
EB303040
CHECKING THE SPARK PLUGSThe following procedure applies to all of thespark plugs.
1. Disconnect: spark plug cap
2. Remove: spark plug
Before removing the spark plugs, blowaway any dirt accumulated in the sparkplug wells with compressed air to pre-vent it from falling into the cylinders.
3. Check: spark plug type
Incorrect Change.
Spark plug type (manufacturer)CR8E (NGK)U24ESR-N (DENSO)
4. Check: electrode 1
Damage/wear Replace the spark plug. insulator 2
Abnormal color Replace the spark plug.Normal color is a medium-to-light tan color.
5. Clean: spark plug
(with a spark plug cleaner or wire brush)
6. Measure: spark plug gap 3
(with a specification Regap.
Spark plug gap0.7 0.8 mm
7. Install: spark plug
Spark plug13 Nm (1.3 mkg)
Before installing the spark plug, clean thespark plug and gasket surface.
3-16
CHECKING THE SPARK PLUGS/CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING
CHKADJ
NOTE:
NOTE:
8. Connect: spark plug cap
EB303053
CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING
Prior to checking the ignition timing, checkthe wiring connections of the entire ignitionsystem. Make sure that all connections aretight and free of corrosion.
1. Remove: timing plug 1
2. Install: timing light 1 engine tachometer 2
(to the spark plug lead of cyl. #1)
Timing light90890-03141
Engine tachometer90890-03113
3. Check: ignition timing
a. Start the engine, warm it up for severalminutes, and then let it run at the speci-fied engine idling speed.
Engine idling speed1,150 1,250 r/min
b. Check that the stationary pointer a iswithin the firing range b on the generatorrotor.Incorrect firing range Check the igni-tion system.
The ignition timing is not adjustable.
4. Remove: engine tachometer timing light
5. Install: timing plug
3-17
MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURECHKADJ
NOTE:
CAUTION:
EB303060
MEASURING THE COMPRESSIONPRESSUREThe following procedure applies to all of the cyl-inders.
Insufficient compression pressure will resultin a loss of performance.
1. Check: valve clearance
Out of specification Adjust.Refer to “ADJUSTING THE VALVECLEARANCE”.
2. Start the engine, warm it up for several min-utes, and then turn it off.
3. Disconnect: spark plug cap
4. Remove: spark plug
Before removing the spark plugs, usecompressed air to blow away any dirt ac-cumulated in the spark plug wells to pre-vent it from falling into the cylinders.
5. Install: compression gauge 1
Compression gauge90890-03081
6. Measure: compression pressure
Above the maximum pressure Inspectthe cylinder head, valve surfaces, and pis-ton crown for carbon deposits.Below the minimum pressure Squirt afew measure again.
Refer to the following table.
Compression pressure(with oil applied into the cylinder)
Reading Diagnosis
Higher thanwithout oil
Piston wear ordamage Repair.
Same aswithout oil
Piston ring(-s),valves cylinderhead gasket orpiston possibly
defective Repair.
3-18
MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE/CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL
CHKADJ
NOTE:
NOTE:
Compression pressure(at sea level)
Standard1,500 kPa (15.0 kg/cm 2)
Minimum1,200 kPa (12.0 kg/cm 2)
a. Turn the main switch to “ON”.b. With the throttle wide open, crank the en-
gine until the reading on the compressiongauge stabilizes.
To prevent sparking, ground all sparkplug leads before cranking the engine.
The difference in compression pressurebetween cylinders should not exceed 100kPa (1 kg/cm2, 1 bar).
7. Install: spark plug
Spark plug13 Nm (1.3 mkg)
8. Connect: spark plug cap
EB303070
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand. Make sure that the motorcycle is upright.
2. Let the engine idle for a few minutes.
3. Check: engine oil level
The engine oil level should be between theminimum level marks a and maximumlevel marks b .Below the minimum level mark Add therecommended engine oil to the proper lev-el.
3-19
TEMP
SAE 10W-30
SAE 10W-30
SAE 10W-30
2
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL/CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL
CHKADJ
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Recommended engine oilRefer to the chart for theengine oil grade which is bestsuited for certain atmospherictemperatures.API standard
SE or higher gradeACEA standard G4 or G5
Engine oil also lubricates the clutch andthe wrong oil types or additives couldcause clutch slippage. Therefore, do notadd any chemical additives or useengine oils with a grade of CD a orhigher and do not use oils labeled“ENERGY CONSERVING II” b or higher.
Do not allow foreign materials to enterthe carankcase.
4. Start the engine, warm it up for several min-utes, and then turn it off.
5. Check the engine oil level again.
Before checking the engine oil level, wait afew minutes until the oil has settled.
EB303081
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL1. Start the engien, warm it up for several min-
utes, and then turn it off.
2. Place a container under the engine oil drainbolt.
3. Remove: engine oil filler cap 1 engine oil drain bolt 2
(along with the gasket)
4. Drain: engine oil
(completely from the crankcase)
5. If the oil filter cartridge is also to be replaced,perform the following procedure.
3-20
3
1
CHANGING THE ENGINE OILCHKADJ
CAUTION:
43 Nm (4.3 mkg)
a. Remove the oil filter cartridge 1 with anoil filter wrench 2 .
Oil filter wrench90890-01469
b. Apply a thin coat of engine oil onto the O-ring 3 of the new oil filter cartridge.
Make sure that the O-ring 3 is positionedcorrectly in the groove of the oil filter car-tridge.
c. Tighten the new oil filter cartridge to spec-ification with an oil filter wrench.
Oil filter cartridge17 Nm (1.7mkg)
6. Check: engine oil drain bolt gasket
Damage Replace.
7. Install: engine oil drain bolt 1
8. Fill: crankcase
(with the specified amount of the recom-mended engine oil)
QuantityTotal amount
3.5 LWithout oil filter cartridgereplacement
2.5 LWith oil filter cartridgereplacement
2.7 L
9. Install: engine oil filler cap
10. Start the engine, warm it up for several min-utes, and then turn it off.
11. Check: engine
(for engine oil leaks)
12. Check: engine oil level
Refer to “CHECKING THE ENGINE OILLEVEL”.
3-21
2
MEASURING THE ENGINE OIL PRESSURECHKADJ
CAUTION:
EB303090
MEASURING THE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE1. Check: engine oil level
Below the minimum level mark Add therecommended engine oil to the proper lev-el.
2. Start the engine, warm it up for several min-utes, and then turn it off.
When the engine is cold, the engine oilwill have a higher viscosity, causing theengine oil pressure to increase. There-fore, be sure to measure the engine oilpressure after warming up the engine.
3. Remove: oil gallery bolt 1
The engine, muffler and engine oil areextremely hot.
4. Install: oil pressure gauge 1 adapter 2
Oil pressure gauge90890-03153
Adapter90890-03139
5. Measure: engine oil pressure
(at the following conditions)
Engine oil pressure450 kPa (4.5 kg/cm 2)
Engine speedApprox. 10,000 r/min
Engine oil temperature115C
Out of specification Adjust.
Engine oil pressure Possible cause
Below specification
Faulty oil pumpClogged oil filterLeaking oil passageBroken or damagedoil seal
Above specification
Leaking oil passageFaulty oil filterOil viscosity toohigh
3-22
MEASURING THE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE/ADJUSTING THE CLUTCH CABLE FREE PLAY
CHKADJ
c
db
a
Engine sideHandlebar side
8 Nm (0.8 mkg)
a
b
NOTE:
c
d
6. Install: oil gallery bolt
EB303100
ADJUSTING THE CLUTCH CABLE FREEPLAY
1. Check: clutch cable free play a
Out of specification Adjust.
Clutch cable free play (at theend of the clutch lever)
10 15 mm
2. Adjust: clutch cable free play
Handlebar sidea. Loosen the locknut 1 .b. Turn the adjusting bolt 2 in direction a or
b until the specified clutch cable freeplay is obtained.
Direction Clutch cable freeplay is increased.
Direction Clutch cable freeplay is decreased.
c. Tighten the locknut.
If the specified clutch cable free play cannotbe obtained on the handlebar side of thecable, use the adjusting nut on the engineside.
Engine sidea. Loosen the locknuts 3 .b. Turn the adjusting bolt 4 in direction c or
d until the specified clutch cable freeplay is obtained.
Direction Clutch cable freeplay is increased.
Direction Clutch cable freeplay is decreased.
c. Tighten the locknuts.
3-23
CLEANING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENTCHKADJ
CAUTION:
EB303130
CLEANING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT1. Remove: Seat Fuel tank Cover 1
2. Remove: air filter case cover 1 air filter element 2
3. Clean: air filter element
Apply compressed air to the outer surfaceof the air filter element.
4. Check: air filter element
Damage Replace.
5. Install: air filter element air filter case cover
Never operate the engine without the airfilter element installed. Unfiltered air willcause rapid wear of engine parts and maydamage the engine. Operating the enginewithout the air filter element will also af-fect the carburetor turning, leading topoor engine performance and possibleoverheating.
3-24
CLEANING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT/CHECKING THE CARBURETOR JOINTS AND IN TAKE MANIFOLDS/
CHECKING THE FUEL HOSES AND FUEL FILTER
CHKADJ
NOTE:
NOTE:
When installing the air filter element into theair filter case cover, be sure their sealing sur-faces are aligned to prevent any air leaks.
6. Install: cover fuel tank seat
EB303171
CHECKING THE CARBURETOR JOINTSAND INTAKE MANIFOLDSThe following procedure applies to all of the car-buretor joints and intake manifolds.
1. Remove: seat fuel tank
2. Check: carburetor joint 1 intake manifold 2
Cracks/damage Replace.Refer to “CARBURETOR” in chapter 6.
3. Install: fuel tank seat
EB303181
CHECKING THE FUEL HOSES AND FUELFILTERThe following procedure applies to all of the fuelhoses.
1. Remove: seat fuel tank
2. Check: fuel hose 1
Cracks/damage Replace. fuel filter 2
Damage/dirt Replace.
Drain and flush the fuel tank if abrasivedamage to any components of the fuel lineis evident.
3. Install: fuel tank seat
3-25
CHECKING THE CRANKCASE BREATHER HOSE/CHECKING THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
CHKADJ
2
7
5
6
4
44
3
1 1 1
CAUTION:
EB303190
CHECKING THE CRANKCASE BREATHERHOSE
1. Remove: seat fuel tank carburetor
2. Check: crankcase breather hose 1
Cracks/damage Replace.Loose connection Connect properly.
Make sure that the crankcase breatherhose is routed correctly.
3. Install: carburetor fuel tank seat
EB303200
CHECKING THE EXHAUST SYSTEMThe following procedure applies to all of the ex-haust pipes and gaskets.
1. Check: exhaust pipe 1 muffler 2
Cracks/damage Replace. gasket 3
Exhaust gas leaks Replace.
2. Check: tightening torque
Exhaust pipe ring nut 410 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Exhaust pipe and footrestbracket 5
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)Exhaust pipe and muffler 6
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)Muffler and footrest bracket(rear) 7
30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
3-26
ba
7 6
CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL/CHECKING THE COOLING SYSTEM
CHKADJ
CAUTION:
NOTE:
EB303220
CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface. Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand. Make sure that the motorcycle is upright.
2. Remove: side cover (right)
3. Check: coolant level
The coolant level should be between themaximum level mark a and minimum lev-el marks b .Below the minimum level mark Add therecommended coolant to the proper level.
Adding water instead of coolant lowersthe antifreeze content of the coolant. Ifwater is used instead of coolant, checkand correct the antifreeze concentra-tion of the coolant.
Use only distilled water. Soft water maybe used if distilled water is not avail-able.
4. Start the engine, warm it up for several min-utes, and then turn it off.
5. Check: coolant level
Before checking the coolant level, wait a fewminutes until it settles.
6. Install: side cover (right)
EB303230
CHECKING THE COOLING SYSTEM1. Remove: seat fuel tank
2. Check: radiator 1 radiator inlet hose 2 radiator outlet hose 3 water jacket outlet joint 4 water jacket inlet joint 5 oil cooler inlet hose 6 oil cooler outlet hose 7
Cracks/damage Replace.Refer to “COOLING SYSTEM” in chapter5.
3. Install: fuel tank seat
3-27
CHANGING THE COOLANTCHKADJ
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
EB303240
CHANGING THE COOLANT1. Remove: seat fuel tank
2. Disconnect: coolant reservoir hose 1
3. Drain: coolant
(from the coolant reservoir)4. Remove: radiator cap
A hot radiator is under pressure. There-fore, do not remove the radiator capwhen the engine is hot. Scalding hot fluidand steam may be blown out, whichcould cause serious injury. When the en-gine has cooled, open the radiator cap asfollows:Place a thick rag or a towel over the radia-tor cap and slowly rotate the radiator capcounterclockwise towrd the detent to al-low any residual pressure to escape.When the hissing sound has stopped,press down on the radiator cap, whilestill pressing down turn it counterclock-wise, and then remove it.
The following procedure applies to all of thecoolant drain bolts and copper washers.
5. Remove: coolant drain bolt (water pump) 1
(along with the copper washer)
6. Drain: coolant
(from the engine and radiator)
7. Check: copper washer 1 (coolant drain bolt water
pump)Damage Replace.
8. Install: coolant drain bolt (water pump)
3-28
CHANGING THE COOLANTCHKADJ
CAUTION:
9. Coonect: coolant reservoir hose
10. Fill: cooling system
(with the specified amount of the recom-mended coolant)
Recommended antifreezeHigh-quality ethylene glycol anti-freeze containing corrosion inhibi-tors for aluminum engines
Mix ratio50% antifreeze/50 % water
QuantityTotal amount
1.95 LCoolant reservoir capacity
0.61 LFrom minimum to maximumlevel mark
0.22 L
Handling notes for coolantCoolant is potentially harmful and should behandled with special care.
If coolant splashes in your eyes, thor-oughly wash them with water and con-sult a doctor.
If coolant splashes on your clothes,quickly wash it away with water andthen with soap and water.
If coolant is swallowed, induce vomit-ing and get immediate medical atten-tion.
Adding water instead of coolant lowersthe antifreeze content of the coolant. Ifwater is used instead of coolant, check,and if necessary, correct the antifreezeconcentration of the coolant.
Use only distilled water. Soft water maybe used if distilled water is not avail-able.
If coolant comes into contact withpainted surfaces, immediately washthem with water.
Do not mix different types of antifreeze.
11. Install: radiator cap
3-29
CHANGING THE COOLANTCHKADJ
NOTE:
12. Fill: coolant reservoir
(with the recommended coolant to themaximum level mark a )
13. Install: coolant reservoir cap
14. Start the engine, warm it up for several min-utes, and then turn if off.
15. Check: coolant level
Refer to “CHECKING THE COOLANTLEVEL”.
Before checking the coolant level, wait a fewminutes until it settles.
16. Install: fuel tank seat
3-30
ADJUSTING THE FRONT BRAKE/ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE
CHKADJ
c
b
a
NOTE:
a
a
a
b
EB304001
CHASSISADJUSTING THE FRONT BRAKE
1. Adjust: brake lever position
(distance a from the throttle grip to thebrake lever)
a. While pushing the brake lever forward,turn the adjusting dial 1 until the brakelever is in the desired position.
Be sure to align the setting on the adjustingdial with the arrow mark 2
Position #1 Distance is thelargest.
Position #4 Distance is thesmallest.
After adjusting the brake lever position,make sure that the pin on the brake leverholder is firmly inserted in the hole in theadjusting dial.
EB304010
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE1. Check: brake pedal position
(distance a from the top of the rider foot-rest to the top of the brake pedal)Out of specification Adjust.
Brake pedal position (belowthe top of the rider footrest)
36.6 mm
2. Adjust: brake pedal position
a. Loosen the locknut 1 .b. Turn the adjusting bolt 2 in direction a or
b until the specified brake pedal positionis obtained.
Direction Brake pedal is raised.
Direction Brake pedal is lowered.
3-31
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE/CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
CHKADJ
A B
CAUTION:
NOTE:
After adjusting the brake pedal position,check that the end of the adjusting bolt 2is visible through the hole c .
c. Tighten the locknut 1 to specification.
A soft or spongy feeling in the brake ped-al can indicate the presence of air in thebrake system. Before the vehicle is oper-ated, the air must be removed by bleed-ing the brake system. Air in the brakesystem will considerably reduce brakingperformance and could result in loss ofcontrol and possibly an accident. There-fore, inspect and, if necessary, bleed thebrake system.
After adjusting the brake pedal position,make sure that there is no brake drag.
3. Adjust: rear brake light switch
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKELIGHT SWITCH”.
EB304020
CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand. Make sure that the motorcycle is upright.
2. Check: brake fluid level
Below the minimum level mark a Addthe recommended brake fluid to the properlevel.
Recommended brake fluidDOT4
A Front brakeB Rear brake
3-32
a b
CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL /ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
CHKADJ
CAUTION:
NOTE:
NOTE:
a
b
Use only the designated brake fluid.Other brake fluids may cause the rub-ber seals to deteriorate, causing leak-age and poor brake performance.
Refill with the same type of brake fluidthat is already in the system. Mixingbrake fluids may result in a harmfulchemical reaction, leading to poorbrake performance.
When refilling, be careful that waterdoes not enter the reservoir. Water willsignificantly lower the boiling point ofthe brake fluid and could cause vaporlock.
Brake fluid may damage painted sur-faces and plastic parts. Therefore, al-ways clean up any spilt brake fluid im-mediately.
In order to ensure a correct reading of thebrake fluid level, make sure that the top ofthe reservoir is horizontal.
EB304050
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE LIGHTSWITCH
The rear brake light switch is operated bymovement of the brake pedal.The rear brake light switch is properly ad-justed when the brake light comes on justbefore the braking effect starts.
1. Check: rear brake light operation timing
Incorrect Adjust.
2. Adjust: rear brake light operation timing
a. Hold the main body 1 of the rear brakelight switch so that it does not rotate andturn the adjusting nut 2 in direction a orb until the rear brake light comes on atthe proper time.
Direction Brake light comeson sooner.
Direction Brake light comeson later.
3-33
CHECKING THE BRAKE HOSES/BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM
CHKADJ
NOTE:
EB304062
CHECKING THE BRAKE HOSESThe following procedure applies to all of thebrake hoses and clamps.
1. Check: brake hose
Cracks/damage/wear Replace.
2. Check: brake hose clamp
Loose connection Tighten.
3. Hold the motorcycle upright and apply thebrake.
4. Check: brake hose
Activate the brake several times.Brake fluid leakage Replace damagedhose.Refer to “FRONT AND REAR BRAKES” inchapter 7.
EB304071
BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKESYSTEM
Bleed the hydraulic brake system when-ever: the system was disassembled, a brake hose was loosened or removed, the brake fluid level is very low, brake operation is faulty.
1. Remove: reservoir cap diaphragm 1
Be careful not to spill any brake fluid or al-low the brake master cylinder reservoir orbrake fluid reservoir to overflow.
When bleeding the hydraulic brake sys-tem, make sure that there is alwaysenough brake fluid before applying thebrake. Ignoring this precaution could allowair to enter the hydraulic brake system,considerably lengthening the bleedingprocedure.
If bleeding is difficult, it may be necessaryto let the brake fluid settle for a few hours.Repeat the bleeding procedure when thetiny bubbles in the hose have disappeared.
3-34
Rear
Front
a
b
BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM/ADJUSTING THE SHIFT PEDAL
CHKADJ
a
b
2. Bleed: hydraulic brake system
a. Add the recommended brake fluid to theproper level.
b. Install the diaphragm (brake master cylin-der reservoir or brake fluid reservoir).
c. Connect a clear plastic hose 1 tightly tothe bleed screw 2 .
d. Place the other end of the hose into a con-tainer.
e. Slowly apply the brake several times.f. Fully squeeze the brake lever or fully de-
press the brake pedal and hold it in posi-tion.
g. Loosen the bleed screw.This will release the tension and causethe brake lever to contact the throttle gripof the brake pedal to fully extend.
h. Tighten the bleed screw and then releasethe brake lever or brake pedal.
i. Repeat steps (e) to (h) until all of the airbubbles have disappeared from thebrake fluid in the plastic hose.
j. Tighten the bleed screw to specification.
Bleed screw6 Nm (0.6 mkg)
k. Fill the reservoir to the proper level.Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKEFLUID LEVEL”.
After bleeding the hydraulic brake sys-tem, check the brake operation.
EB304080
ADJUSTING THE SHIFT PEDAL1. Check: shift pedal position
The end 1 of the shift pedal is above theshift rod. (The angle a should be approxi-mately 90.)Incorrect Adjust.
2. Adjust: shift pedal position
a. Loosen both locknuts 2 .b. Turn the shift rod 3 in direction a or b to
obtain the correct shift pedal position.
Direction shift pedal is raised.
Direction pedal is lowered.
Tighten both locknuts.
3-35
ADJUSTING THE DRIVE CHAIN SLACKCHKADJ
a
b
NOTE:
CAUTION:
NOTE:
a
b
NOTE:
EB304090
ADJUSTING THE DRIVE CHAIN SLACK
The drive chain slack must be checked at thetightest point on the chain.
A drive chain that is too tight will over-load the engine and other vital parts, andone that is too loose can skip and dam-age the swingarm or cause an accident.Therefore, keep the drive chain slackwithin the specified limits.
1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
Securely support the motorcycle so thatthere is no danger of it falling over.
Both wheels should be on the ground with-out rider on the motorcycle.
2. Rotate the rear wheel several times andcheck the drive chain to locate its tightestpoint.
3. Check: drive chain slack a
Out of specification Adjust.
Drive chain slack30 40 mm
4. Loosen: wheel axle nut 1
5. Adjust: drive chain slack
a. Loosen both locknuts 1 .b. Turn both adjusting nuts 2 in direction a
or b until the specified drive chain slackis obtained.
Direction Drive chain istightened.
Direction Drive chain isloosened.
To maintain the proper wheel alignment,adjust both sides evenly.
Push the rear wheel forward to make surethat there is no clearance between theswingarm end plates and the ends of theswingarm.
3-36
ADJUSTING THE DRIVE CHAIN SLACK/LUBRICATING THEDRIVE CHAIN/CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE STEERING HEAD
CHKADJ
NOTE:
c. Tighten the wheel axle nut to specifica-tion.
Wheel axle nut117 Nm (11.7 mkg)
Locknut16 Nm (1.6 mkg)
EB304100
LUBRICATING THE DRIVE CHAINThe drive chain consists of many interactingparts. If the drive chain is not maintained proper-ly, it will wear out rapidly.Therefore, the drive chain should be serviced,especially when the motorcycle is used in dustyareas. This motorcycle has a drive chain withsmall rubber O-rings between each side plate.Steam cleaning, high-pressure washing, certainsolvents, and the use of a coarse brush candamage these O-rings. Therefore, use only ker-osine to clean the drive chain. Wipe the drivechain dry and thoroughly lubricate it with engineoil or chain lubricant that is suitable for O-ringchains. Do not use any other lubricants on thedrive chain since they may contain solvents thatcould damage the O-rings.
Recommended lubricantEngine oil or chain lubricant suitablefor O-ring chains
EB304130
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THESTEERING HEAD
1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
Securely support the motorcycle so thatthere is no danger of it falling over.
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand sothat the front wheel is elevated.
2. Check: steering head
Grasp the bottom of the front fork legs andgently rock the front fork.Looseness or binding Adjust the steer-ing head.
3. Remove: handlebar upper bracket
3-37
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
a
b
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE STEERING HEADCHKADJ
NOTE:
NOTE:
4. Adjust: steering head
a. Remove the lock washer 1 , the upperring nut 2 , and the rubber washer 3 .
b. Loosen the lower ring nut 4 and thentighten it to specification with a ring nutwrench 5 .
Set the torque wrench at a right angle to thering nut wrench.
Ring nut wrench90890-01403
Lower ring nut(initial tightening torque)
52 Nm (5.2 mkg)
c. Loosen the lower ring nut completely,then tighten it to specification.
Do not overtighten the lower ring nut.
Lower ring nut(final tightening torque)
18 Nm (1.8 mkg)
d. Check the steering head for looseness orbinding by turning the front fork all theway in both directions. If any binding isfelt, remove the lower bracket and inspectthe upper and lower bearings.Refer to “STEERING HEAD AND HAN-DLEBAR” in chapter 7.
e. Install the rubber washer 6 .f. Install the upper ring nut 7 .g. Finger tighten the upper ring nut 7 , then
align the slots of both ring nuts. If neces-sary, hold the lower ring nut and tightenthe upper ring nut until their slots arealigned.
h. Install the lock washer 8 .
Make sure that the lock washer tabs a sitcorrectly in the ring nut slots b .
3-38
CHECKING ADJUSTING THE STEERING HEAD/CHECKING THE FRONTFORK/ADJUSTING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY
CHKADJ
CAUTION:
NOTE:
5. Install: upper bracket handlebar
Steering stem nut110 Nm (11.0 mkg)
Upper bracket pinch bolt30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
Handlebar upper holder bolt23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
EB304140
CHECKING THE FRONT FORK1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
Securely support the motorcycle so thatthere is no danger of it falling over.
2. Check: inner tube
Damage/scratches Replace. oil seal
Oil leakage Replace.
3. Hold the motorcycle upright and apply thefront brake.
4. Check: operation
Push down hard on the handlebar severaltimes and check if the front fork reboundssmoothly.Unsmooth operation Repair.Refer to “FRONT FORK” in chapter 7.
EB304160
ADJUSTING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBERASSEMBLY
Securely support the motorcycle so thatthere is no danger of it falling over.
Spring preload
Never go beyond the maximum or mini-mum adjustment positions.
1. Adjust: spring preload
Adjust the spring preload with the specialwrench and extension bar included in theowner’s tool kit.
3-39
ADJUSTING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBERASSEMBLY/CHECKING THE TIRES
CHKADJ
ab
adjusting position
a
b
a. Turn the adjusting ring 1 in direction a orb .
b. Align the desired position on the adjustingring with the stopper.
Direction Spring preload isincreased (suspensionis harder).
Direction Spring preload isdecreased (suspensionis softer).
Minimum Standard Maximum
Adjustingpositions
1 4 9
EB304170
CHECKING THE TIRESThe following procedure applies to both of thetires.
1. Measure: tire pressure
Out of specification Regulate.
The tire pressure should only bechecked and regulated when the tiretemperature equals the ambient airtemperature.
The tire pressure and the suspensionmust be adjusted according to the totalweight (including cargo, rider passen-ger and accessories) and the antici-pated riding speed.
Operation of an overloaded motorcyclecould cause tire damage, an accidentor an injury.
NEVER OVERLOAD THE MOTORCYCLE.
3-40
A B
3
2
1
CHECKING THE TIRESCHKADJ
Basic weight(with oil and afull fuel tank)
210 kg
Maximum load 187 kg
Cold tirepressure
Front tire Rear tire
Up to 90 kg load*225 kPa
(2.25kg/cm 2)
250 kPa(2.50
kg/cm 2)
90 kg maximumload*
225 kPa(2.25
kg/cm 2)
280 kPa(2.80
kg/cm 2)
High speedriding
225 kPa(2.25
kg/cm 2)
280 kPa(2.80
kg/cm 2)
*: total of cargo, rider, passenger andaccessories
It is dangerous to ride with a worn-outtire.When the tire tread reaches the wearlimit, replace the tire immediately.
2. Check: tire surface
Damage/wear Replace the tire.
Minimum tire tread depth1.6 mm
1 Tire tread depth2 Side wall3 Wear indicator
Do not use a tubeless tire on a wheel de-signed only for tube tires to avoid tirefailure and personal injury from suddendeflation.
When using a tube tire, be sure to installthe correct tube.
Always replace a new tube tire and anew tube as a set.
To avoid pinching the tube, make surethat the wheel rim band and tube arecentered in the wheel groove.
Patching a punctured tube is not rec-ommended. If it is absolutely neces-sary to do so, use great care and re-place the tube as soon as possible witha good quality replacement.A Tire B Wheel
Tube wheel Tube tire only
Tubeless wheel Tube or tubelesstire
3-41
CHECKING THE TIRES/CHECKING THE WHEELS
CHKADJ
NOTE:
NOTE:
After extensive tests, the tires listed be-low have been approved by YamahaMotor Co., Ltd. for this model. The frontand rear tires should always be by thesame manufacturer and of the same de-sign. No guarantee concerning han-dling characteristics can be given if atire combination other than one ap-proved by Yamaha is used on this mo-torcycle.
Front tire
Manufacturer Size Type
BRIDGESTONE 110/70-ZR17(54 W) BT57F
DUNLOP 110/70-ZR17(54 W) D207F
Rear tire
Manufacture Size Type
BRIDGESTONE160/60-ZR17
(69 W)BT57R
DUNLOP160/60-ZR17
(69 W)D207J
After mounting a new tire, ride conserva-tively for a while to become accustomedto the “feel” of the new tire and to allowthe tire to seat itself properly in the rim.Failure to do so could lead to an accidentwith possible injury to the rider or dam-age to the motorcycle.
For tires with a direction of rotation mark 1 : Install the tire with the mark printing in the
direction of wheel rotation.
EB304180
CHECKING THE WHEELSThe following procedure applies to both of thewheels.
1. Check: wheel
Damage/out-of-round Replace.
Never attempt to make any repairs to thewheel.
After a tire or wheel has been changed or re-placed, always balance the wheel.
3-42
CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THE CABLES/ LUBRICATING THELEVERS AND PEDALS/LUBRICATING THE SIDESTAND/ LUBRICATING
THE CENTER STAND/LUBRICATING THE REAR SUSPENSION
CHKADJ
NOTE:
EB304200
CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THECABLESThe following procedure applies to all of thecable sheaths and cables.
Damaged cable sheaths may cause thecable to corrode and interfere with itsmovement. Replace damaged cablesheaths and cables as soon as possible.
1. Check: cable sheath
Damage Replace.
2. Check: cable operation
Unsmooth operation Lubricate.
Recommended lubricantEngine oil or a suitable cablelubricant
Hold the cable end upright and pour a fewdrops of lubricant into the cable sheath oruse a suitable lubing device.
DB304210
LUBRICATING THE LEVERS AND PEDALSLubricate the pivoting point and metal-to-metalmoving parts parts of the levers and pedals.
Recommended lubricantLithium soap base grease
EB304220
LUBRICATING THE SIDESTANDLubricate the pivoting point and metal-to-metalmoving parts of the sidestand.
Recommended lubricantLithium soap base grease
LUBRICATING THE CENTER STANDLubricate the pivoting point and metal-to-metalmoving parts of the center stand.
Recommended lubricantLithium soap base grease
EB304240
LUBRICATING THE REAR SUSPENSIONLubricate the pivoting point and metal-to-metalmoving parts of the rear suspension.
Recommended lubricantMolybdenum disulfide grease
3-43
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERYCHKADJ
CAUTION:
EB305020
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMCHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY
Batteries generate explosive hydrogengas and contain electrolyte which ismade of poisonous and highly causticsulfuric acid.Therefore, always follow these preven-tive measures: Wear protective eye gear when han-
dling or working near batteries. Charge batteries in a well-ventilated
area. Keep batteries away from fire, sparks or
open flames (e.g., welding equipment,lighted cigarettes).
DO NOT SMOKE when charging or han-dling batteries.
KEEP BATTERIES AND ELECTROLYTEOUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.
Avoid bodily contact with electrolyte asit can cause severe burns or permanenteye injury.
First aid in case of bodily contact:External SKIN – Wash with water. EYES – Flush with water for 15 minutes
and get immediate medical attention.InternalDrink large quantities of water or milk fol-lowed with milk of magnesia, beaten eggor vegetable oil. Get immediate medicalattention.
This is a sealed battery. Never removethe sealing caps because the balancebetween cells will not be maintainedand battery performance will deterio-rate.
Charging time, charging amperage andcharging voltage for a MF battery aredifferent from those of conventionalbatteries. The MF battery should becharged as explained in the chargingmethod illustrations. If the battery isovercharged, the electrolyte level willdrop considerably.Therefore, take special care whencharging the battery.
3-44
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERYCHKADJ
NOTE:
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Since MF batteries are sealed, it is not pos-sible to check the charge state of the batteryby measuring the specific gravity of the elec-trolyte. Therefore, the charge of the batteryhas to be checked by measuring the voltageat the battery terminals.
1. Remove: seat
2. Disconnect: battery leads
(from the battery terminals)
First, disconnect the negative lead 1 ,then the positive lead 2 .
3. Remove: battery
4. Check: battery charge
a. Connect a digital voltmeter to the batteryterminals.
Tester positivelead
battery positiveterminal
Tester negativelead
battery negativeterminal
The charge state of a MF battery can bechecked by measuring its open-circuit volt-age (i.e., the voltage when the positive ter-minal is disconnected).
No charging is necessary when the open-circuit voltage equals or exceeds 12.8 V.
b. Check the charge of the battery, asshown in the charts and the following ex-ample.
Examplec. Open-circuit voltage = 12.0 Vd. Charging time = 6.5 hourse. Charge of the battery = 20 30 %
5. Charge: battery
(refer to the appropriate charging methodillustration)
3-45
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERYCHKADJ
Do not quick charge a battery.
Make sure that the battery vent is free ofobstructions.
Never remove the MF battery sealingcaps.
Do not use a high-rate battery charger.They force a high-amperage currentinto the battery quickly and can causebattery overheating and battery platedamage.
If it is impossible to regulate the charg-ing current on the battery charger, becareful not to overcharge the battery.
When charging a battery, be sure to re-move it from the motorcycle. (If charg-ing has to be done with the batterymounted on the motorcycle, discon-nect the negative lead from the batteryterminal.)
To reduce the chance of sparks, do notplug in the battery charger until the bat-tery charger leads are connected to thebattery.
Before removing the battery chargerlead clips from the battery terminals, besure to turn off the battery charger.
Make sure that the battery charger leadclips are in full contact with the batteryterminal and that they are not shorted.A corroded battery charger lead clipmay generate heat in the contact areaand a weak clip spring may causesparks.
If the battery becomes hot to the touchat any time during the charging pro-cess, disconnect the battery chargerand let the battery cool before recon-necting it. Hot batteries can explode!
As shown in the following illustration,the open-circuit voltage of a MF batterystabilizes about 30 minutes after charg-ing has been completed. Therefore,wait 30 minutes after charging is com-pleted before measuring the open-cir-cuit voltage.
3-46
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERYCHKADJ
Measure the open-circuitvoltage prior to charging.
Connect a charged andAMP meter to the batteryand start charging.
Make sure that the currentis higher than the standardcharging current written onthe battery.
By turning the chargingvoltage adjust dial, set thecharging voltage at 20 24 V.
Adjust the voltage so that thecurrent is at the standardcharging level.
Monitor the amperage for3 5 minutes to check if thestandard charging current isreached.
Set the time according to thecharging time suitable for theopen-circuit voltage.Refer to “Battery conditionchecking steps”.
If the current does notexceed the standardcharging current after 5minutes, replace the battery.
If charging requires more than 5 hours, it is advisable to check thecharging current after a lapse of 5 hours. If there is any change in theamperage, readjust the voltage to obtain the standard chargingcurrent.
Measure the battery open-circuit voltage after leaving the batteryunused for more than 30 minutes.12.8 V or more — Charging is complete.12.7 V or less — Recharging is required.Under 12.0 V — Replace the battery.
YES NO
YES
NO
NOTE:
Voltage should be measured 30minutes after the machine is stopped.
NOTE:
Set the charging voltage at 16 17 V.(If the setting is lower, charging will beinsufficient. If too high, the battery willbe over-charged.)
Charging method using a variable-current (voltage) type charger
3-47
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERYCHKADJ
Measure the open-circuitvoltage prior to charging.
Connect a charger andAMP meter to the batteryand start charging.
NOTE:
Voltage should be measured 30minutes after the machine is stopped.
Make sure that the currentis higher than the standardcharging current written onthe battery.
Charge the battery until the battery’scharging voltage is 15 V. Charge thebattery until the battery’s chargingvoltage is 15 V.
This type of battery charger cannotcharge the MF battery. A variablevoltage charger is recommended.
Measure the battery open-circuitvoltage after leaving the batteryunused for more than 30 minutes.12.8 V or more — Charging iscomplete.12.7 V or less — Recharging isrequired.Under 12.0 V — Replace the battery.
NOTE:
Set the charging time at 20 hours(maximum).
YES NO
Charging method using a constant-voltage type charger
Charging method using a constant-current type chargerThis type of battery charger cannot charge the MF battery.
3-48
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY/CHECKING THE FUSES
CHKADJ
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
NOTE:
6. Install: battery
7. Connect: battery leads
(to the battery terminals)
First, connect the positive lead 1 , thenthe negative lead 2 .
8. Check: battery terminals
Dirt Clean with a wire brush.Loose connection Connect properly.
9. Lubricate: battery terminals
Recommended lubricantDielectric grease
10. Install: seat
EB305040
CHECKING THE FUSESThe following procedure applies to all of thefuses.
To avoid a short circuit, always turn themain switch to “OFF” when checking orreplacing a fuse.
1. Remove: seat
2. Check: fuse
a. Connect the pocket tester to the fuse andcheck it for continuity.
Se the pocket tester selector to “Ω 1”.
Pocket tester96890-03112
b. If the pocket tester indicates “∞”, replacethe fuse.
3-49
CHECKING THE FUSES/REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BLUBS
CHKADJ
3. Replace: blown fuse
a. Turn off the ignition.b. Install a new fuse of the correct amperage
rating.c. Turn on the switches to verify if the electri-
cal circuit is operational.d. If the fuse immediately blows again,
check the electrical circuit.
Fuses Amperagerating Quantity
Main fuse 30 A 1
Headlight fuse 20 A 1
Signalingsystem fuse 20 A 1
Ignition fuse 20 A 1
Radiatorfan fuse 5 A 1
30 A 1
Reserve fuse 20 A 1
10 A 1
Never use a fuse with an amperage ratingother than that specified. Improvising orusing a fuse with the wrong amperagerating may cause extensive damage tothe electrical system, cause the lightingand ignition systems to malfunction andcould possibly cause a fire.
4. Install: seat
EB305051
REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULBSThe following procedure applies to both of theheadlight bulbs.
1. Disconnect: headlight lead 1
3-50
REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULBS/ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAMS
CHKADJ
a
a
aa
b
b
bb
CAUTION:
a
b
2. Remove: headlight bulb holder 1
3. Remove: headlight bulb 2
Since the headlight bulb gets extremelyhot, keep flammable products and yourhands away from the bulb until it hascooled down.
4. Install: headlight bulb (New)
Secure the new headlight bulb with theheadlight bulb holder.
Avoid touching the glass part of theheadlight bulb to keep it free from oil,otherwise the transparency of the glass,the life of the bulb and the luminous fluxwill be adversely affected. If the headlightbulb gets soiled, thoroughly clean it witha cloth moistened with alcohol or lacquerthinner.
5. Install: headlight bulb holder
6. Connect: headlight lead
EB305061
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAMSThe following procedure applies to both of theheadlights.
1. Adjust: headlight beam (vertically)
a. Turn the adjusting screw 1 3 in directiona or b .
Direction Headlight beam israised.
Direction Headlight beam islowered.
3-51
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAMSCHKADJ
a
b
a
b
2. Adjust: headlight beam (horizontally)
a. Turn the adjusting knob 2 4 in directiona or b .Left headlight 2
Direction Headlight beammoves to the right.
Direction Headlight beammoves to the left.
Right headlight 4
Direction Headlight beammoves to the left.
Direction Headlight beammoves o the right.
CHKADJ
ENG
4
ENG
CHAPTER 4OVERHAULING THE ENGINE
REMOVING THE ENGINE 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRIVE SPROCKET AND EXHAUST PIPE 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEADS AND HOSES 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENGINE BRACKET AND ENGINE 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE ENGINE 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAMSHAFT 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CYLINDER HEAD COVERS 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAMSHAFTS 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING THE CAMSHAFTS 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE CAMSHAFTS 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN, CAMSHAFT SPROCKETS,AND TIMING CHAIN GUIDES 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE CAMSHAFTS 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CYLINDER HEAD 4-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING THE CYLINDER HEADS 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE CYLINDER HEADS 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE CYLINDER HEAD 4-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS 4-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING THE VALVES 4-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE VALVES AND VALVE GUIDES 4-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE VALVE SEATS 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE VALVE SPRINGS 4-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE VALVE LIFTERS 4-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE CAMSHAFT CAP 4-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE VALVES 4-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CYLINDERS AND PISTONS 4-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING THE CYLINDERS AND PISTONS 4-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE CYLINDERS AND PISTONS 4-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE PISTON RINGS 4-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE PISTON PINS 4-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE PISTON AND CYLINDER 4-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLUTCH 4-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLUTCH COVER 4-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLUTCH 4-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING THE CLUTCH 4-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE FRICTION PLATES 4-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE CLUTCH PLATES 4-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE CLUTCH SPRINGS 4-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE CLUTCH SPRING PLATE 4-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE CLUTCH HOUSING 4-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE CLUTCH BOSS 4-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE PRESSURE PLATE 4-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE CLUTCH PUSH RODS 4-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE CLUTCH 4-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SHIFT SHAFT 4-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE SHIFT SHAFT 4-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE SHIFT SHAFT 4-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENG
AC MAGNETO AND STARTER CLUTCH 4-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STATOR COIL 4-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STARTER CLUTCH 4-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC MAGNETO ROTOR 4-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING THE STARTER CLUTCH 4-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING THE AC MAGNETO 4-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE STARTER CLUTCH 4-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE AC MAGNETO 4-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE STARTER CLUTCH 4-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER 4-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OIL STRAINER 4-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OIL PUMP 4-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING THE OIL PAN 4-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE OIL PUMP 4-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE RELIEF VALVE 4-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE OIL STRAINER 4-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE OIL NOZZLE 4-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASSEMBLING THE OIL PUMP 4-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE OIL PUMP 4-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE OIL STRAINER 4-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE OIL PAN 4-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRANKCASE 4-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE 4-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE CRANKCASE 4-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE 4-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRANKSHAFT 4-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONNECTING ROD 4-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING THE CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY 4-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING THE CONNECTING RODS 4-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE CRANKSHAFT AND CONNECTING RODS 4-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE CONNECTING RODS 4-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE CRANKSHAFT 4-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRANSMISSION 4-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE TRANSMISSION 4-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE TRANSMISSION 4-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SHIFT DRUM AND SHIFT FORKS 4-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE SHIFT FORKS 4-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE SHIFT DRUM ASSEMBLY 4-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE SHIFT FORKS AND SHIFT DRUMASSEMBLY 4-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
70 Nm (7.0 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
25 Nm (2.5 mkg)
17 Nm (1.7 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
123
Removing the drive sprocket andexhaust pipeDrain the coolantDrain the engine oil
Front cowling
Fuel tank
Battery negative terminalRadiatorCarburetor
Starter motor
Exhaust pipe assemblyExhaust pipe gasketOil filter
141
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL”section in capter 3.Refer to “FRONT COWLING/SEAT/SIDE COVER/FUEL TANK” section inchapter 3.
Refer to “RADIATOR” section in chapter 5.Refer to “CARBURETOR” section inchapter 6.Refer to “STARTER MOTOR” section inchapter 8.
REMOVING THE ENGINE ENG
OVERHAULING THE ENGINEREMOVING THE ENGINEDRIVE SPROCKET AND EXHAUST PIPE
4-2
25 Nm (2.5 mkg)
70 Nm (7.0 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
17 Nm (1.7 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
456789
Shift armDrive sprocket coverDrive chain sprocket gasketDowel pinLock washerDrive sprocket/Drive chain
11121
1/1
Refer to “INSTALLING THE ENGINE”section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
REMOVING THE ENGINE ENG
4-3
12 Nm (1.2 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
1
23456789
Disconnecting the leads and hosesMagneto/sidestand/neutral /engine oillevel switch leadGround leadPlug capCrankcase breather hoseCoverWater pump outlet hoseRadiator outlet hoseEngine outlet hoseEngine outlet hose
1/1/1/1
14111111
Disconnect the parts in the order listed.
For connecting, reverse the disconnectionprocedure.
Engine right side Engine left side
12 Nm (1.2 mkg)
REMOVING THE ENGINE ENG
LEADS AND HOSES
4-4
33 Nm (3.3 mkg)
55 Nm (5.5 mkg)
33 Nm (3.3 mkg)
55 Nm (5.5 mkg)
33 Nm (3.3 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
1234567
Removing the engine bracket andengineEngine mounting bolt (front left)Engine mounting bolt (front right)Engine bracket (front)Engine mounting bolt (rear upper)Engine bracket (rear right)Engine mounting bolt (rear lower)Engine
1111111
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “INSTALLING THE ENGINE”section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
REMOVING THE ENGINE ENG
ENGINE BRACKET AND ENGINE
4-5
REMOVING THE ENGINE ENG
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB400700
INSTALLING THE ENGINE1. Install: bolt 1 bolt 2 bolt 3 bolt 4 engine bracket 5 engine bracket 6
Do not fully tighten the bolts.
2. Tighten the bolts in the following order.
Bolt 155 Nm (5.5 mkg)
Bolt 255 Nm (5.5 mkg)
Bolt 355 Nm (5.5 mkg)
Bolt 455 Nm (5.5 mkg)
Engine bracket 533 Nm (3.3 mkg)
Engine bracket 610 Nm (10 mkg)
3. Install: shift arm 1
Align the punch mark a in the shift shaftwith the slot in the shift arm.
Align the bottom edge of the shift pedal bwith the mark a on the frame-to-swingarmbracket.
Shift arm bolt10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
4-6
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
9 Nm (0.9 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
123
Removing the cylinder head coverFront cowling
Seat and fuel tank
Drain the coolantRadiatorCarburetor
Exhaust pipePlug capCylinder head side coverCylinder head coverCylinder head cover gasket
411
Remove the parts in the order listed.Refer to “FRONT COWLING/SEAT/SIDE COVER/FUEL TANK” sectionin chapter 3.
Refer to “RADIATOR” section in chapter 5.Refer to “CARBURETOR” section inchapter 6.Refer to “REMOVING THE ENGINE”section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
CAMSHAFT ENG
CAMSHAFTCYLINDER HEAD COVERS
4-7
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
13 Nm (1.3 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
123456789
10
Removing the camshaftsSpark plugMagneto coverTiming chain guide (upper)Timing chain tensioner assemblyTiming chain guide (exhaust side)Camshaft capDowel pinCamshaft (intake)Cmashaft (exhaust)Camshaft sprocket
411114
12112
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THECAMSHAFT” section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
CAMSHAFT ENG
CAMSHAFT
4-8
CAMSHAFT ENG
2
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB401102
REMOVING THE CAMSHAFTS1. Remove: magneto cover
2. Align: “T” mark on the magneto rotor
(with the stationary pointer on the crank-case)
a. Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise.b. When piston #1 is at TDC on the com-
pression stroke, align the “T” mark a withthe stationary pointer b .
TDC on the compression stroke can befound when the camshaft lobes are turnedaway from each other.
3. Remove: timing chain guide (top side) 1
4. Loosen: camshaft sprocket bolts 2
5. Loosen: timing chain tensioner cap bolt 1
6. Remove: timing chain tensioner 2
7. Remove: timing chain guide (exhaust side) 1 camshaft caps 2
For reference during installation, put identifi-cation marks on each camshaft cap.
4-9
1
32
CAMSHAFT ENG
CAUTION:
NOTE:
To prevent damage to the cylinder head,camshafts or camshaft caps, loosen thecamshaft cap bolts in stages and in acrisscross pattern, working from the out-side in.
8. Remove: intake camshaft 1 exhaust camshaft 2
To prevent the timing chain from falling intothe crankcase, fasten it with a wire 3 .
EB401401
CHECKING THE CAMSHAFTS1. Check: camshaft lobes
Blue discoloration/pitting/scratches
Replace the camshaft.
2. Measure: camshaft lobe dimensions A and B
Out of specification Replace the cam-shaft.
Camshaft lobe dimension limitIntake
A 32.7 mmB 24.95 mm
ExhaustA 32.4mmB 24.9 mm
3. Measure: camshaft runout
Out of specification Replace.
Camshaft runoutLess than 0.03 mm
4-10
CAMSHAFT ENG
1NOTE:
4. Measure: camshaft-journal-to-camshaft-cap clear-
anceOut of specification Measure the cam-shaft journal diameter.
Camshaft-journal-to-camshaft-cap clearance
0.08 mm
a. Install the camshaft into the cylinder head(without the dowel pins and camshaftcaps).
b. Position a strip of Plastigauge 1 ontothe camshaft journal as shown.
c. Install the dowel pins and camshaft caps.
Tighten the camshaft cap bolts in stagesand in a crisscross pattern, working fromthe inner caps out.
Do not turn the camshaft when measuringthe camshaft journal-to-camshaft capclearance with the Plastigauge .
Camshaft cap bolt10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
a. Remove the camshaft caps and thenmeasure the width of the Plastigauge
1 .
EB401421
CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN,CAMSHAFT SPFROCKETS, AND TIMINGCHAIN GUIDESThe following procedure applies to all of thecamshaft sprockets and timing chain guides.
1. Check: timing chain 1
Damage/stiffness Replace the timingchain and camshaft sprockets as a set.
2. Check: camshaft sprocket
More than 1/4 tooth a wear Replacethe camshaft sprockets and the timingchain as a set.
a 1/4 toothb Correct1 Timing chain roller2 Camshaft sprocket
3. Check: timing chain guide (exhaust side) timing chain guide (intake side) timing chain guide (top side)
Damage/wear Replace the defectivepart(-s).
4-11
2
1
3
2 2
3
4 4
CAMSHAFT ENG
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB401430
CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER1. Check: timing chain tensioner
Cracks/damage Replace.
2. Check: one-way cam operation
Rough movement Replace the timingchain tensioner housing.
3. Check: cap bolt 1 copper washer 2 ball 3 spring 4 ball 5 one-way cam 6 gasket timing chain tensioner rod 7
Damage/wear Replace the defectivepart(-s).
EB401702
INSTALLING THE CAMSHAFTS1. Install: exhaust camshaft 1 intake camshaft 2
(with the camshaft sprockets temporarilytightened)
Install the camshafts with their punch marksfacing up.
2. Install: dowel pins 1 intake camshaft caps 2 exhaust camshaft caps 3
Install the camshaft cap with the arrow marka pointing towards the right side of the en-gine.
3. Install: camshaft cap bolts
Tighten the camshaft cap bolts in stagesand in a crisscross pattern, working fromthe inner caps out.
Do not install the designated camshaft capbolts 4 at this stage.
4-12
4 6
53
21
“E”
“I”
C
C
CAMSHAFT ENG
CAUTION:
NOTE:
CAUTION:
The camshaft cap bolts must be tight-ened evenly or damage to the cylinderhead, camshaft caps, and camshafts willresult.
Camshaft cap bolt10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
4. Install: intake camshaft sprocket exhaust camshaft sprocket
a. Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise.b. When piston #1 is at TDC on the com-
pression stroke, align the “T” mark a onthe magneto rotor with the stationarypointer b on the crankcase.
c. Install the timing chain onto both cam-shaft sprockets and then install the cam-shaft sprockets onto the camshafts.
When installing the camshaft sprockets,start with the exhaust camshaft and besure to keep the timing chain as tight aspossible on the exhaust side.
Make sure that the match marks c areparallel with the edge of the cylinder head.
“I”: Intake side“E”: Exhaust side
Do not turn the crankshaft when instal-ling the camshaft to avoid damage or im-proper valve timing.
d. After the crankshaft is turned several fullturns and piston #1 is at TDC, make surethat marks a and b are aligned.
5. Install: timing chain guide (exhaust side)
6. Install: timing chain tensioner
a. Remove the cap bolt 1 , washer 2 , andsprings 3
b. Release the timing chain tensioner one-way cam 4 and push the timing chaintensioner rod 5 all the way into the timingchain tensioner housing.
c. Install the timing chain tensioner and gas-ket 6 onto the cylinder block.
4-13
CAMSHAFT ENG
c
cd
d
CAUTION:
Always use a new gasket.
Timing chain tensioner bolt10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
d. Install the springs 3 , washer 2 , and capbolt 1 .
Cap bolt20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
7. Turn: crankshaft
(several full turns counterclockwise)
8. Check: “T” mark a
Make sure that the “T” mark on the magne-to rotor is aligned with the stationary point-er b on the crankcase.
camshaft punch marks cMake sure that the punch marks on thecamshafts are aligned with the embossedmarks d on the camshaft cap.Out of alignment Adjust.Refer to the installation steps above.
9. Tighten: camshaft sprocket bolts
Be sure to tighten the camshaft sprocketbolts to the specified torque to avoid thepossiblity of the bolts coming loose anddamaging the engine.
Camshaft sprocket bolt24 Nm (2.4 mkg)
10. Measure: valve clearance
Out of specification Adjust.Refer to “ADJUSTING THE VALVECLEARANCE” in chapter 3.
4-14
35 Nm (3.5 mkg)
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
123456
Removing the cylinder headCamshaftUnion boltCopper washerOil delivery pipeCylinder headCylinder head gasketDowel pin
241112
Remove the parts in the order listed.Refer to “CAMSHAFT”section.
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THECYLINDER HEAD” section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
CYLINDER HEAD ENG
CYLINDER HEAD
4-15
CYLINDER HEAD ENG
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB402101
REMOVING THE CYLINDER HEADS1. Remove: cylinder head nuts
Loosen the nuts in the proper sequence asshown.
Loosen each nut 1/2 of a turn at a time.After all of the nuts are fully loosened, re-move them.
EB402403
CHECKING THE CYLINDER HEADSThe following procedure applies to all of the cyl-inder heads.
1. Eliminate: carbon deposits
(from the combustion chambers with apounded scraper)
Do not use a sharp instument to avoid dam-aging or scratching: spark plug threads valve seats
2. Check: cylinder head
Damage/scratches Replace. cylinder head water jacket
Mineral deposits/rust Eliminate.
3. Measure: cylinder head warpage
Out of specification Resurface the cylin-der head.
Cylinder head warpageLess than 0.05 mm
a. Place a straightedge 1 and a thicknessgauge 2 across the cylinder head.
b. Measure the warpage.c. If the limited is exceeded, resurface the
cylinder head as follows.d. Place a 400 600 grit wet sandpaper on
the surface plate and resurface the cylin-der head using a figure-eight sanding pat-tern.
To ensure an even surface, rotate the cylin-der head several times.
4-16
CYLINDER HEAD ENG
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB402702
INSTALLING THE CYLINDER HEAD1. Install: gasket (New) 1 dowel pins 2
The “UP” mark a on the gasket must faceup.
2. Install: cylinder head
Apply engine oil onto the threads of the cyl-inder head nuts.
Tighten the cylinder head nuts in the prop-er tightening sequence as shown andtorque them in two stages.
Cylinder head nutFirst 20 Nm (2.0 m kg)Second 35 Nm (3.5 m kg)
3. Install: exhaust camshaft intake camshaft
Refer to “INSTALLING THE CAM-SHAFTS”.
4-17
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
123456789
Removing the valves and valvespringsCamshaftCylinder headValve lifterAdjusting padValve cottersUpper spring seatValve springValve (intake)Valve (exhaust)Oil sealLower spring seat
448442244
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “CAMSHAFT” section.Refer to “CYLINDER HEAD” section.
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THEVALVES” section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS ENG
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
4-18
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS ENG
1
a
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB403100
REMOVING THE VALVESThe following procedure applies to all of thevalves and related components.
Before removing the internal parts of thecylinder head (e.g., valves, valve springs,valve seats), make sure that the valvesproperly seal.
1. Remove: valve lifter 1 valve pad
Make a note of the position of each valvelifter and valve pad so that they can bereinstalled in their original place.
2. Check: valve sealing
Leakage at the valve seat Check thevalve face, valve seat, and valve seataidth.Refer to “CHECKING THE VALVESEATS”.
a. Pour a clean solvent a into the intakeand exhaust ports.
b. Check that the valves properly seal.There should be no leakage at the valveseat 1 .
3. Remove: valve cotters 1
Remove the valve cotters by compressingthe valve spring with the valve spring com-pressor 2 and attachment 3 .
Valve spring compressor90890-04019
Attachment90890-04114
4. Remove: upper spring seat 1 valve spring 2 oil seal 3 lower spring seat 4 valve 5
Identify the position of each part very care-fully so that it can be reinstalled in its originalplace.
4-19
a
b
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS ENG
ab
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB403400
CHECKING THE VALVES AND VALVEGUIDESThe following procedure applies to all of thevalves and valve guides.
1. Measure: valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance
Valve-stem-to-valve-guideclearance =
Valve guide inside diameter –Valve stem diameter
Out of specification Replace the valveguide.
Valve-stem-to-valve-guideclearance
IntakeLimit: 0.08 mm
ExhaustLimit: 0.1 mm
2. Replace: valve guide
To ease valve guide removal and installa-tion, and to maintain the correct fit, heat thecylinder head to 100C (212C) in an oven.
a. Remove the valve guide with a valveguide remover 1 .
b. Install the new valve guide with a valveguide installer 2 and valve guide remov-er 1 .
c. After installing the valve guide, bore thevalve guide with a valve guide reamer 3to obtain the proper valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance.
After replacing the valve guide, reface thevalve seat.
Valve guide remover (ø4.0 mm)90890-04111
Valve guide installer (ø4.0 mm)90890-04112
Valve guide reamer (ø4.0 mm)90890-04113
3. Eliminate: carbon deposits
(from the valve face and valve seat)
4-20
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS ENG
a
4. Check: valve face
Pitting/wear Grind the valve face. valve stem end
Mushroom shape of diameter larger thanthe body of the valve stem Replace thevalve.
5. Measure: valve margin thickness a
Out of specification Replace the valve.
Valve margin thickness0.5 mm
6. Measure: valve stem runout a
Out of specification Replace the valve.
When installing a new valve, always re-place the valve guide.
If the valve is removed or replaced, alwaysreplace the oil seal.
Valve stem runoutLimit 0.04 mm
EB403410
CHECKING THE VALVE SEATSThe following procedure applies to all of thevalves and vlve seats.
1. Eliminate: carbon deposits
(from the valve face and valve seat)
2. Check: valve seat
Pitting/wear Replace the cylinder head.
3. Measure: valve seat width a
Out of specification Replace the cylin-der head.
Valve seat widthIntake: 0.9 1.1 mm
(Limit 1.6 mm)Exhaust:0.9 1.1 mm
(Limit 1.6 mm)
4-21
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS ENG
NOTE:
CAUTION:
NOTE:
a. Apply Mechanic’s blueing dye (Dykem)b onto the valve face.
b. Install the valve into the cylinder head.c. Press the valve through the valve guide
and onto the valve seat to make a clearpattern.
d. Measure the valve seat width. Where thevalve seat and valve face contacted oneanother, the blueing will have been re-moved.
4. Lap: valve face valve seat
After replacing the cylinder head or replac-ing the valve and valve guide, the valve seatand valve face should be lapped.
a. Apply a coarse lapping compound a tothe valve face.
Do not let the lapping compound enterthe gap between the valve stem and thevalve guide.
b. Apply molybdenum disulfide oil onto thevalve stem.
c. Install the valve into the cylinder head.d. Turn the valve until the valve face and
valve seat are evenly polished, thenclean off all of the lapping compound.
For the best lapping results, lightly tap thevalve seat while rotating the valve back andforth between your hand.
e. Apply a fine lapping compound to thevalve face and repeat the above steps.
f. After every lapping procedure, be sure toclean off all of the lapping compound fromthe valve face and valve seat.
g. Apply Mechanic’s blueing dye (Dykem)b onto the valve face.
h. Install the valve into the cylinder head.i. Press the valve through the valve guide
and onto the valve seat to make a clearimpression.
j. Measure the valve seat width a again. Ifthe valve seat width is out of specification,reface and lap the valve seat.
4-22
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS ENG
a
a
EB403420
CHECKING THE VALVE SPRINGSThe following procedure applies to all of thevalve springs.
1. Measure: valve spring free length a
Out of specification Replace the valvespring.
Valve spring free length(intake and exhaust)
Spring40.09 mm (Limit 37.5 mm)
2. Measure: compressed spring force a
Out of specification Replace the valvespring.
b Installed length
Compressed spring forceIntake and exhaust spring
13,4 15,6 kg at 34.5 mm
3. Measure: valve spring tilt a
Out of specification Replace the valvespring.
Spring tilt limitIntake and exhaust spring
1.8 mm
EB403430
CHECKING THE VALVE LIFTERSThe following procedure applies to all of thevalve lifters.
1. Check: valve lifter
Damage/scratches Replace the valvelifters and cylinder head.
4-23
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS ENG
2
1
22
15
4
3
2
a
b
Large
Small
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB403440
CHECKING THE CAMSHAFT CAP1. Check: camshaft case camshaft caps 1
Cracks/damage Replace th camshaftcase and camshaft caps as a set, andcheck the camshafts (Refer to “CHECK-ING THE CAMSHAFTS”.).
camshaft bearing surfaces 2Damage/pitting/scratches Replace thecamshaft case and camshaft caps as aset, and check the camshafts (Refer to“CHECKING THE CAMSHAFTS”.).
2. Check: oil delivery pipes 1
Damage Replace the defective part(-s).Dirt /obstruction Wash the pipe(-s) andthen blow it out with compressed air.
EB403700
INSTALLING THE VALVESThe following procedure applies to all of thevalves and related components.
1. Deburr: valve stem end
(with an oil stone)
2. Lubricate: valve stem 1 oil seal
(with the recommended lubricant)
Recommended lubricantMolybdenum disulfide oil
3. Install: valve 1 lower spring seat 2 oil seal 3 valve spring 4 upper spring seat 5
(into the cylinder head)
Install the valve spring with the larger pitcha facing up.
b Smaller pitch
4. Install: valve cotters 1
Install the valve cotters by compressing thevalve spring with the valve spring compres-sor 2 and attachment 3 .
4-24
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS ENG
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Valve spring compressor90890-04019
Attachment90890-04114
5. To secure the valve cotters 1 onto the avalve stem, lightly tap the valve tip with asoft-face hammer.
Hitting the valve tip with excessive forcecould damage the valve.
6. Install: valve pad 1 valve lifter 2
Apply molybdenum disulfide oil onto thevalve lifter and valve pad.
The valve lifter must move smoothly whenrotated with a finger.
Each valve lifter and valve pad must be re-installed in its original position.
4-25
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
123456789
10
Removing the cylinder and pistonsCylinder headWater jacket jointO-ringCylinderCylinder gasketDowel pinO-ringPiston pin circlipPiston pinPistonPiston ring set
1211248444
Remove the parts in the order listed.Refer to “CYLINDER HEAD” section.
Refer to “INSTALLING THE PISTON ANDCYLINDER” section.
Refer to “REMOVING THE CYLINDERAND PISTONS/INSTALLING THEPISTON AND CYLINDER” section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
CYLINDER AND PISTON ENG
CYLINDER AND PISTON
4-26
1
2
4
CYLINDER AND PISTON ENG
CAUTION:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB404101
REMOVING THE CYLINDERS AND PISTONSThe following procedure applies to all of the cyl-inders and pistons.
1. Remove: piston pin clip 1 piston pin 2 piston 3
Do not use a hammer to drive the pistonpin out.
Before removing the piston pin clip, coverthe crankcase opening with a clean rag toprevent the piston pin clip from falling intothe crankcase.
For reference during installation, put anidentification mark on each piston crown.
Before removing the piston pin, deburr thepiston pin clip’s groove and the piston’s pinbore area. If both areas are deburred andthe piston pin is still difficult to remove, re-move it with the piston pin puller 4 .
Piston pin puller90890-01304
2. Remove: top ring 2nd ring oil ring
When removing a piston ring, open the endgap with your fingers and lift the other side ofthe ring over the piston crown.
EB404405
CHECKING THE CYLINDERS AND PISTONSThe following procedure applies to all of the cyl-inders and pistons.
1. Check: piston wall cylinder wall
Vertical scratches Rebore or replacethe cylinder, and replace the piston andpiston rings as a set.
2. Measure: piston-to-cylinder clearance
a. Measure cylinder bore “C” with the cylin-der bore gauge.
1 20 mm from the top of the cylinder
Measure cylinder bore “C” by taking side-to-side and front-to-back measurements of thecylinder. Then, find the average of the mea-surements.
4-27
CYLINDER AND PISTON ENG
P
a
“C” =X + Y
2
NOTE:
Standard Wear limit
Cylinderbore “C”
62.00 62.01 62.1 mm
b. If out of specification, replace the cylin-der, piston and piston rings as a set.
c. Measure piston skirt diameter “P” with themicrometer.
a 5 mm from the bottom edge of the piston.
Piston size P
Standard 61.960 61.975
d. If out of specification, replace the pistonand piston rings as a set.
e. Calculate the piston-to-cylinder clear-ance with the following formula.
Piston-to-cylinderclearance
= cylinder bore “C” –Piston skirtdiameter “P”
Piston-to-cylinder clearance0.025 0.050 mm <Limit>: 0.07 mm
f. If out of specification, replace the cylin-der, piston and piston rings as a set.
EB404410
CHECKING THE PISTON RINGS1. Measure: piston ring side clearance 1
Out of specification Replace the pistonand piston rings as a set.
Before measuring the piston ring side clear-ance, eliminate any carbon deposits fromthe piston ring grooves and piston rings.
Piston ring side clearanceTop ring
0.020 0.075 mm<Limit>: 0.1 mm
2nd ring0.020 0.055 mm<Limit>: 0.1 mm
4-28
CYLINDER AND PISTON ENG
a
a
NOTE:
NOTE:
2. Install: piston ring 1
(into the cylinder)
Level the piston ring in the cylinder with thepiston crown as shown.
a 20 mm
3. Measure: piston ring end gap
Out of specification Replace the pistonring.
The oil ring expander spacer’s end gap can-not be measured. If the oil ring rail’s gap isexcessive, replace all three piston rings.
Piston ring end gapTop ring
0.15 0.30 mm<Limit>: 0.6 mm
2nd ring0.25 0.40 mm<Limit>: 0.7 mm
Oil ring0.1 0.35 mm
EB404421
CHECKING THE PISTON PINSThe following procedure applies to all of the pis-ton pins.
1. Check: piston pin
Blue discoloration/grooves Replace thepiston pin and then check the lubricationsystem.
2. Measure: piston pin outside diameter a
Out of specification Replace the pistonpin.
Piston pin outside diameter16.991 17.000 mm
4-29
CYLINDER AND PISTON ENG
b
1
2
4
5
3
a
NOTE:
NOTE:
3. Calculate: piston-pin-to-piston clearance
Out of specification Replace the pistonpin.
Piston-pin-to-piston clearance =Piston pin bore size b –Piston pin outside diameter a
Piston-pin-to-piston clearance0.011 0.013 mm<Limit>: 0.023 mm
EB404701
INSTALLING THE PISTON AND CYLINDERThe following procedure applies to all of the pis-tons and cylinders.
1. Install: top ring 1 2nd ring 2 lower oil ring rail 3 upper oil ring rail 4 oil ring expander 5
Be sure to install the piston rings so that themanufacturer’s marks or numbers face up.
2. Install: piston 1 piston pin 2 piston pin clip (New) 3
Apply engine oil onto the piston pin. Make sure that the “EX” mark a on the pis-
ton faces towards the exhaust side of theengine.
Before installing the piston pin clip, coverthe crankcase opening with a clean rag toprevent the clip from falling into the crank-case.
3. Install: gasket (New) 1 dowel pins 2
4. Lubricate: piston piston rings cylinder
(with the recommended lubricant)
Recommended lubricantEngine oil
4-30
1
22
d c
eab
CYLINDER AND PISTON ENG
NOTE:
5. Offset: piston ring end gapsa Top ringb Lower oil ring railc Upper oil ring raild 2nd ringee Oil ring expander
6. Install: cylinder 1 O-ring 2
First, install pistons #2 and #3. Pass the timing chain and timing chain
guide (exhaust side) through the timingchain cavity.
a. Install a piston ring compressor 1 to pis-ton #2 and #3.
b. Install pistons #2 and #3 onto the cylinder.c. Remove the piston ring compressor.d. Install the piston ring compressor 1 to
pistons #1 and #4.e. Install pistons #1 and #4 onto the cylinder.f. Remove the piston ring compressor.
Piston ring compressor:90890-04044
4-31
12 Nm (1.2 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
12345
Removing the clutch coverDrain the engine oil
Clutch coverClutch cover gasketDowel pinDrive sprocket coverClutch cable
11211
Remove the parts in the order listed.Refer to “CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL”section in chapter 3.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
CLUTCH ENG
CLUTCHCLUTCH COVER
4-32
8 Nm (0.8 mkg)
70 Nm (7.0 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
123456789
1011
Removing the clutchCompression springPressure plateShort clutch push rodO-ringBallLong clutch push rodFriction plateClutch plateFricition plate (large)Clutch spring plateNut
61111188111
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “INSTALLING THE CLUTCH”section.
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THECLUTCH” section.
CLUTCH ENG
CLUTCH
4-33
8 Nm (0.8 mkg)
70 Nm (7.0 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
121314
1516171819
Lock washerClutch bossThrust washer
SpacerBearingClutch housingThrust washerSpacer
111
11111
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLINGTHE CLUTCH” section.Refer to “INSTALLING THE CLUTCH”section.Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLINGTHE CLUTCH” section.
Refer to “INSTALLING THE CLUTCH”seciton.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
CLUTCH ENG
4-34
CLUTCH ENG
3
2
1
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB405100
REMOVING THE CLUTCH1. Straighten the lock washer tab.
2. Loosen: clutch boss nut 1
While holding the clutch boss 2 with the uni-versal clutch holder 3 , loosen the clutchboss nut.
Universal clutch holder 390890-04086
3. Remove: spacer 1 bearing 2
Insert two M6-mm bolts 3 into the spacerand then remove the spacer by pulling on thebolts.
EB405400
CHECKING THE FRICTION PLATESThe following procedure applies to all of the fric-tion plates.
1. Check: friction plate
Damage/wear Replace the frictionplates as a set.
2. Measure: friction plate thickness
Out of specification Replace the frictionplates as a set.
Measure the friction plate at four places.
Friction plate thickness2.94 3.06 mm
<Limit>: 2.8 mm
EB405410
CHECKING THE CLUTCH PLATESThe following procedure applies to all of theclutch plates.
1. Check: clutch plate
Damage Replace the clutch plates as aset.
2. Measure: clutch plate warpage
(with a surface plate and thickness gauge1 )Out of specification Replace the clutchplates as a set.
Clutch plate warpage limitLess than 0.1 mm
4-35
CLUTCH ENG
2
a
NOTE:
EB405420
CHECKING THE CLUTCH SPRINGSThe following procedure applies to all of theclutch springs.
1. Check: clutch spring
Damage Replace the clutch springs asa set.
2. Measure: clutch spring free length a
Out of specification Replace the clutchsprings as a set.
Clutch spring free length34.9 mm<Limit>: 34.3 mm
EB405430
CHECKING THE CLUTCH SPRING PLATE1. Check: clutch spring plate
Damage Replace.
2. Check: clutch spring plate seat
Damage Replace.
EB405440
CHECKING THE CLUTCH HOUSING1. Check: clutch housing dogs 1
Damage/pitting/wear Deburr the clutchhousing dogs or replace the clutch hous-ing.
Pitting on the clutch housing dogs will causeerratic clutch operation.
2. Check: bearing 2
Damage/wear Replace the clutchhousing.
4-36
CLUTCH ENG
1
12
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB405450
CHECKING THE CLUTCH BOSS1. Check: clutch boss splines 1
Damage/pitting/wear Replace theclutch boss.
Pitting on the clutch boss splines will causeerratic clutch operation.
EB405450
CHECKING THE PRESSURE PLATE1. Check: pressure plate 1
Cracks/damage Replace. bearing 2
Damage/wear Replace.
EB405480
CHECKING THE CLUTCH PUSH RODS1. Check: O-ring 1 short clutch push rod 2 long clutch push rod 3 ball 4
Cracks/damage/wear Replace the de-fective part(-s).
2. Measure: long clutch push rod bending limit 1
Out of specification Replace the longclutch push rod.
Long clutch push rod bendinglimit
0.3 mm
EB405701
INSTALLING THE CLUTCH1. Install: bearing 1 spacer 2
Install the spacer with the two screw holesfacing towards the clutch boss.
4-37
CLUTCH ENG
12
2
1
3
70 Nm (7.0 mkg)
NOTE:
8.0 Nm (0.8 mkg)
NOTE:
2. Tighten: clutch boss nut 1
While holding the clutch boss with the uni-versal clutch holder 2 , tighten the clutchboss nut.
Universal clutch holder90890-04086
3. Bend the lock washer 3 tab along a flat sideof the nut.
4. Lubricate: long clutch push rod 1 ball 2 short clutch push rod 3 O-ring 4
(with the recommended lubricant)
Recommended lubricantLithium soap base grease
5. Install: long clutch push rod ball short clutch push rod
(along with a new O-ring 4 )
6. Lubricate: friction plates 1 clutch plates 2
(with the recommended lubricant)
Recommended lubricantEngine oil
7. Install: friction plates 1 clutch plates 2
a. Install a friction plate and clutch plate.b. Install a clutch spring plate, friction plate
(large of inside dia.) and clutch plate.c. Install a friction plate and then alternate
between a clutch plate and a frictionplate.
8. Install: pressure plate 1 clutch springs 2 clutch spring bolts 3
When installing the clutch springs, alter-nate between long and short clutchsprings.
Tighten the clutch spring bolts in stagesand in a crisscross pattern.
4-38
CLUTCH ENG
12 Nm (1.2 mkg)
NOTE:
9. Install: clutch cover 1
Tighten the clutch cover bolts in stages andin a crisscross pattern.
4-39
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
12345
Removing the shift shaftOil pumpDrive sprocket cover
CollarShift shaftShift lever springStopper leverSHift lever spring
11111
Remove the parts in the order listed.Refer to “OIL PUMP” section.Refer to “REMOVING THE ENGINE”section.
Refer to “INSTALLING THE SHIFTSHAFT” section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
SHIFT SHAFT ENG
SHIFT SHAFT
4-40
1
2
4
2
1
2
3
SHIFT SHAFT ENG
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB408400
CHECKING THE SHIFT SHAFT1. Check: shift shaft 1 shift lever 2
Bends/damage/wear Replace. shift lever spring 3 stopper lever spring 4
Damage/wear Replace.
EB408700
INSTALLING THE SHIFT SHAFT1. Install: stopper lever 1 stopper lever spring 2 shift shaft lever
Hook the ends of the stopper lever springonto the stopper lever and the crankcaseboss.
Mesh the stopper lever with the shift drumsegment assembly.
2. Install: shift shaft 1
Lubricate the oil seal lips with lithium soapbase grease.
Hook the end of the shift lever spring ontothe shift lever spring stopper 2 .
4-41
5 Nm (0.5 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
12 Nm (1.2 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
12345
Removing the stator coilSeatFuel tank
Stator/pickup coil leadCoverGenerator coverDowel pinStator coil
1/11121
Remove the parts in the order listed.Refer to “FRONT COWLING/SEAT/SIDE COVER/FUEL TANK” section in chapter 3.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
AC MAGNETO AND STARTER CLUTCH ENG
AC MAGNETO AND STARTER CLUTCHSTATOR COIL
4-42
12 Nm (1.2 mkg)
80 Nm (8.0 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
1234
56789
1011
Removing the starter clutchGenerator coverStarter clutch coverDowel pinGasketStarter clutch assembly
Wood ruff keyStarter wheel gearShaft (Primary)Starter idle gear (primary)Shaft (Secondary)Starter idle gear (secondary)Shaft drive gear
1211
1111111
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THESTARTER CLUTCH” section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
AC MAGNETO AND STARTER CLUTCH ENG
STARTER CLUTCH
4-43
130 Nm (13.0 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
123
Removing the generator roterBolt/washerRotorWoodruff key
1/111
Remove the parts in the order listed.Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLINGTHE AC MAGNETO” section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
AC MAGNETO AND STARTER CLUTCH ENG
AC MAGNETO ROTOR
4-44
AC MAGNETO AND STARTER CLUTCH ENG
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB410100
REMOVING THE STARTER CLUTCH1. Remove: starter clutch cover 1
Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a time, instages and in a crisscross pattern. After all ofthe bolts are fully loosened, remove them.
2. Remove: starter clutch bolt 1
While holding the magneto rotor 2 withthe sheave holder 3 , remove the starterclutch bolt.
Sheave holder90890-01701
3. Remove: starter clutch 1
(with the flywheel puller set 2 )
Flywheel puller set90890-01362
REMOVING THE AC MAGNETO1. Remove: Bolt (AC magneto rotor) 1 Washer
While holding the AC magneto rotor 2 with asheave holder 3 , loosen the AC magnetorotor bolt 1 .
Sheave holder:90890-01701
4-45
2
1
3
AC MAGNETO AND STARTER CLUTCH ENG
NOTE:
2. Remove: AC magneto rotor 1 Woodruff key
Use a flywheel puller 2 to remove the ACmagneto rotor 1 .
Flywheel puller:90890-01362
EB410401
CHECKING THE STARTER CLUTCH1. Check: starter clutch idle gear 1 starter clutch drive gear 2 starter clutch gear 3
Burrs/chips/roughness/wear Replacethe defective part(-s).
2. Check: starter clutch operation
a. When turning the starter clutch drive gearclockwise a , the starter clutch and thestarter clutch drive gear should engage.If the starter clutch drive gear and starterclutch do not engage, the starter clutch isfaulty and must be replaced.
b. When turning the starter clutch drive gearcounterclockwise b , it should turn freely.If the starter clutch drive gear does notturn freely, the starter clutch is faulty andmust be replaced.
4-46
AC MAGNETO AND STARTER CLUTCH ENG
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
INSTALLING THE AC MAGNETO1. Install: Woodruff key 1 AC magneto rotor 2 Bolt (AC magneto rotor)
Clean the tapered portion of the crankshaftand the AC magneto rotor.
When installing the AC magneto rotor,make sure that the woodruff key is properlyseated in the key way of the crankshaft.
2. Tighten: Bolt (magneto rotor)
Bolt (AC magneto rotor):130 Nm (13.0 mkg)
While holding the AC magneto rotor 1 with asheave holder 2 tighten the AC magneto ro-tor bolt 3 .
Sheave holder:90890-01701
EB410710
INSTALLING THE STARTER CLUTCH1. Install: starter clutch 1
While holding the generator rotor 1 withthe sheave holder 2 , tighten the starterclutch bolt.
Sheave holder90890-01701
Starter clutch bolt80 Nm (8.0 mkg)
4-47
63 Nm (6.3 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
12 Nm (1.2 mkg)
43 Nm (4.3 mkg)
7 Nm (0.7 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
123456789
Removing the oil strainerEngine
Oil level warning switch/O-ringOil panDowel pinOil pan gasketRelief valve/O-ringOil strainerOil strainer housingOil bypass valveOil cooler/O-ring
1/1121
1/1111
1/1
Remove the parts in the order listed.Refer to “REMOVING THE ENGINE”section.
Refer to “INSTALLING THE OIL PAN” section.
Refer to “INSTALLING THE OILSTRAINER” section.
Refer to “INSTALLING THE ADAPTOR”section.For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER ENG
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINEROIL STRAINER
4-48
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
123
Removing the oil pumpClutchOil pump assemblyOil pump gasketDowel pin
111
Remove the parts in the order listed.Refer to “CLUTCH” section.
Refer to “INSTALLING THE OIL PUMP”section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER ENG
OIL PUMP
4-49
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
1234567
Disassembling the oil pumpOil pump rotor housingDowel pinInner rotor/outer rotorDowel pinOil pump shaft assemblyOil pump coverWasher
12
1/11111
Disassembly the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE OIL PUMP”section.
For assembly, reverse the disassemblyprocedure.
7
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER ENG
4-50
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER ENG
NOTE:
EB411100
REMOVING THE OIL PAN1. Remove: oil level switch 1 oil pan 2 gasket dowel pins
Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a time, instages and in a crisscross pattern. After all ofthe bolts are fully loosened, remove them.
EB411401
CHECKING THE OIL PUMP1. Check: oil pump drive gear 1 oil pump driven gear 2 oil pump housing 3 oil pump housing cover 4
Cracks/damage/wear Replace the de-fective part(-s).
2. Measure: inner-rotor-to-outer-rotor-tip clearance A outer-rotor-to-oil-pump-housing clear-
ance B oil-pump-housing-to-inner-rotor-and-out-
er-rotor clearance COut of specification Replace the oilpump.
1 Inner rotor2 Outer rotor3 Oil pump housing
Inner-rotor-to-outer-rotor-tipclearance
0.03 0.09 mm Limit 0.15 mmOuter-rotor-to-oil-pump-housing clearance
0.03 0.08 mm Limit 0.15 mmOil-pump-housing-to-inner-rotor-and-outer-rotor clearance
0.03 0.08 mm Limit 0.15 mm
3. Check: oil pump operation
Unsmooth Repeat steps (1) and (2) orreplace the defective part(-s).
EB411410
CHECKING THE RELIEF VALVE1. Check: relief valve body 1 relief valve 2 spring 3 O-ring 4
Damage/wear Replace the defectivepart(-s).
4-51
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER ENG
b
a
4
6
57
67.0 Nm (0.7 mkg)
NOTE:
EB411430
CHECKING THE OIL STRAINER1. Check: oil strainer 1
Damage Replace.Contaminants Clean with engine oil.
EB411470
CHECKING THE OIL NOZZLE1. Check: oil nozzle 1 check ball 2
Damage/wear Replace the oil nozzle. O-ring 3
Damage/wear Replace. oil nozzle passage
Obstruction Blow out with compressedair.
EB411701
ASSEMBLING THE OIL PUMP1. Lubricate: inner rotor outer rotor oil pump shaft
(with the recommended lubricant)
Recommended lubricantEngine oil
2. Install: oil pump shaft 1
(to the oil pump cover 2 ) washer pin 3 inner rotor 4 outer rotor 5 dowel pin 6 oil pump housing 7
When installing the inner rotor, align the pina in the oil pump shaft with the groove b onthe inner rotor 1 .
3. Check: oil pump operation
Refer to “CHECKING THE OIL PUMP”.
4-52
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER ENG
d
c
b
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
CAUTION:
NOTE:
NOTE:
10 Nm (10 mkg)
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB411710
INSTALLING THE OIL PUMPInstall:
oil pump 1
After tightening the bolts, make sure thatthe oil pump turns smoothly.
Align the projection a on the oil pump shaftwith the slot b on the water pump shaft.
Align the arrow c on the oil pump with thearrow d on the crankcase.
EB411720
INSTALLING THE OIL STRAINER1. Install: oil strainer housing 1
LOCKTITE
The arrow on the oil strainer housing mustpoint towards the front of the engine.
2. Install: oil strainer cover 1
The arrow on the oil strainer cover mustpoint towards the rear of the engine.
EB411730
INSTALLING THE OIL PAN1. Install: dowel pins gasket (New) oil pan 1 oil level switch 2 engine oil drain bolt
Always use new copper washers.
4-53
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER ENG
NOTE: Tighten the oil pan bolts in stages and in a
crisscross pattern. Lubricate the oil level switch’s O-ring with
engine oil.
Oil pan bolt12 Nm (1.2 mkg)
Oil level switch bolt7 Nm (0.7 mkg)
4-54
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
24 Nm (2.4 mkg)
24 Nm (2.4 mkg)
12 Nm (1.2 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
123
Disassembling the crankcaseEngine
CamshaftCylinder headCylinder, piston
ClutchOil pumpShift shaftMagneto rotorStarter clutchOil strainer
Water pump
Oil seal stopper plateNeutral switch leadNeutral switch
111
Disassembly the parts in the order listed.Refer to “REMOVING THE ENGINE”section.Refer to “CAMSHAFT” section.Refer to “CYLINDER HEAD” section.Refer to “CYLINDER AND PISTON”section.Refer to “CLUTCH” section in chapter 4.Refer to “OIL PUMP” section.Refer to “SHIFT SHAFT” section.Refer to “AC MAGNETO AND STARTERCLUTCH section.Refer to “OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER”section.
Refer to “WATER PUMP” section inchapter 5.
CRANKCASE ENG
CRANKCASE
4-55
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
24 Nm (2.4 mkg)
24 Nm (2.4 mkg)
12 Nm (1.2 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
456789
O-ringUpper crankcaseDowel pinOil sealOil jetO-ring
111111
Refer to “DISASSEMBLING/ASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE”section.
For assembly, reverse the disassemblyprocedure.
CRANKCASE ENG
4-56
A
B
CRANKCASE ENG
NOTE:
CAUTION:
NOTE:
EB412100
DISASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE1. Remove: crankcase bolts 1 15A Upper crankcase
Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a time, instages and in a crisscross pattern. After allof the bolts are fully loosened, removethem.
Loosen the bolts in decreasing numericalorder (refer to the numbers in the illustra-tion).
The numbers embossed on the crankcaseindicate the crankcase tightening se-quence.
2. Place the engine upside down.
3. Remove: lower crankcase bolts 1 20B lower crankcase
4. Remove: lower crankcase
Tap on one side of the crankcase with asoft-face hammer. Tap only on reinforcedportions of the crankcase, not on thecrankcase mating surfaces. Work slowlyand carefully and make sure that thecrankcase halves separate evenly.
5. Remove: dowel pins oil jet
6. Remove: crankshaft journal lower bearing
(from the lower crankcase)
Identify the position of each crankshaft jour-nal lower bearing so that it can be reinstalledin its original place.
EB412420
CHECKING THE CRANKCASE1. Thoroughly wash the crankcase halves in a
mild solvent.
2. Thoroughly clean all the gasket surfacesand crankcase mating surfaces.
3. Check: crankcase
Cracks/damage Replace. oil delivery passages
Obstruction Blow out with compressedair.
4-57
CRANKCASE ENG
2
b
a
NOTE:
NOTE:
CAUTION:
EB412742
ASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE1. Lubricate: crankshaft journal bearings
(with the recommended lubricant)
Recommended lubricantEngine oil
2. Apply: sealant
(onto the crankcase mating surfaces)
Yamaha bond No. 121590890-85505
Do not allow any sealant to come into con-tact with the oil gallery or crankshaft journalbearings. Do not apply sealant to within 2 3 mm of the crankshaft journal bearings.
3. Install: dowel pin
4. Install: crankshaft journal lower bearings 1
(into the lower crankcase)
Align the projections a on the crankshaftjournal lower bearings with the notches bin the crankcase.
Install each crankshaft journal lower bear-ing in its original place.
5. Set the shift drum assembly and transmis-sion gears in the neutral position.
6. Install: upper crankcase 1
(onto the lower crankcase 2 )
Before tightening the crankcase bolts,make sure that the transmission gearsshift correctly when the shift drum as-sembly is turned by hand.
4-58
CRANKCASE ENG
A
B
NOTE:
7. Install: upper crankcase bolts lower crankcase bolts
Lubricate the bolt threads with engine oil. Tighten the bolts in increasing numerical
order. Install washers on bolts 1 12 . Install the cable holder on bolt #35.
A Upper crankcaseB Lower crankcase
M8 bolt24 Nm (2.4 mkg)
M6 bolt12 Nm (1.2 mkg)
4-59
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
12345
Removing the crankshaftDisassembly the crankcaseTiming chain guide (intake side)Crankshaft assemblyOil sealTiming chainCrankshaft journal bearing
1111
12
Remove the parts in the order listed.Refer to “CRANKCASE” section.
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THECRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY” section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
CRANKSHAFT ENG
CRANKSHAFT
4-60
15 Nm (1.5 mkg) + 90
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
12345
Removing the connecting rodNutConnecting rod boltConnecting rodConnecting rod capConnecting rod big end bearing
88448
Remove the parts in the order listed.Refer to “INSTALLING THECONNECTING RODS” section.
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLINGTHE CONNECTING RODS” section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
CRANKSHAFT ENG
CONNECTING ROD
4-61
1
2
12
CRANKSHAFT ENG
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB412110
REMOVING THE CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY1. Remove: crankshaft assembly 1 crankshaft journal upper bearing 2
(from the upper crankcase) timing chain guide (intake side)
Identify the position of each crankshaft jour-nal upper bearing so that it can be reinstalledin its original place.
EB412121
REMOVING THE CONNECTING RODS1. Remove: connecting rods 1 big end bearings 2
Identify the position of each big end bearingso that it can be reinstalled in its originalplace.
EB412401
CHECKING THE CRANKSHAFT ANDCONNECTING RODS
1. Measure: crankshaft runout
Out of specification Replace the crank-shaft.
Crankshaft runoutLess than 0.03 mm
2. Check: crankshaft journal surfaces crankshaft pin surfaces bearing surfaces
Scratches/wear Replace the crank-shaft.
3. Measure: crankshaft-journal-to-crankshaft-journal-
bearing clearanceOut of specification Replace the crank-shaft journal bearings.
4-62
CRANKSHAFT ENG
2
b
a
b
a
CAUTION:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
Crankshaft-journal-to-crank-shaft-journal-bearing clearance
0.025 0.043 mmLimit 0.08 mm
Do not interchange the crankshaft jour-nal bearings. To obtain the correct crank-shaft journal-to-crankshaft-journal-bear-ing clearance and prevent enginedamage, the crankshaft journal bearingsmust be installed in their original posi-tion.
a. Clean the crankshaft journal bearings,crankshaft journals, and bearing portionsof the crankcase.
b. Place the upper crankcase upside downon a bench.
c. Install the crankshaft journal upper bear-ings 1 and the crankshaft into the uppercrankcase.
Align the projections a of the crankshaftjournal upper bearings with the notches b inthe crankcase.
d. Put a piece of Plastigauge 2 on eachcrankshaft journal.
Do not put the Plastigauge over the oil holein the crankshaft journal.
e. Install the crankshaft journal lower bear-ings into the lower crankcase and as-semble the crankcase halves.
Align the projections a of the crankshaftjournal lower bearings with the notches bin the crankcase.
Do not move the crankshaft until the clear-ance measurement has been completed.
4-63
CRANKSHAFT ENG
A
B
C
NOTE:
NOTE:
f. Tighten the bolts to specification in thetightening sequence cast on the crank-case.
Crankcase boltM8:24 Nm (2.4 mkg)M6:12 Nm (1.2 mkg)
A Upper crankcaseB Lower crankcase
Lubricate the crankcase bolt threads (M8)and (M6) with engine oil.
g. Remove the lower crankcase and thecrankshaft journal lower bearings.
h. Measure the compressed Plastigauge
width C on each crankshaft journal.If the clearance is out of specification, se-lect replacement crankshaft journal bear-ings.
4. Select: Crankshaft journal bearings (J1 J6)
The numbers A stamped into the crank-shaft web and the numbers 1 stampedinto the lower crankcase are used to deter-mine the replacement crankshaft journalbearing sizes.
“J1 J6” refer to the bearings shown inthe crankshaft illustration.
If “J1 J6” are the same, use the samesize for all of the bearings.
4-64
CRANKSHAFT ENG
A
1
1
b
a
1
1
CAUTION:
NOTE:
For example, if the crankcase “J1” andcrankshaft web “J1” numbers are “6” and “2”respectively, then the bearing size for “J1” is:
Bearing size for J1:J1 (crankcase) – J1 (crankshaft web) +1 = 6 – 2 + 1 = 5 (yellow)
CRANKSHAFTJOURNALBEARINGCOLOR CODE 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
blue black brown green yellow pink
5. Measure: crankshaft-pin-to-big-end-bearing clear-
anceOut of specification Replace the big endbearings.
Crankshaft-pin-to-big-end-bearing clearance
0.043 0.066 mmLimit 0.08 mm
The following procedure applies to all ofthe connecting rods.
Do not interchange the big end bearingsand connecting rods. To obtain the cor-rect crankshaft-pin-to-big-end-bearingclearance and prevent engine damage,the big end bearings must be installed intheir original positions.
a. Clean the big end bearings, crankshaftpins, and bearing portions of the connect-ing rods.
b. Install the big end upper bearing into theconnecting rod and the big end lowerbearing into the connecting rod cap.
Align the projections a on the big end bear-ings with the notches b in the connectingrod and connecting rod cap.
c. Put a piece of Plastigauge 1 on thecrankshaft pin.
4-65
c
e
A
CRANKSHAFT ENG
NOTE:
NOTE:
Do not move the connecting rod or crank-shaft until the clearance measurement hasbeen completed.
Apply molybdenum disulfide grease ontothe bolts, threads, and nut seats.
Make sure that the “Y” mark c on the con-necting rod faces towards the left side ofthe crankshaft.
Make sure that the characters d on boththe connecting rod and connecting rod capare aligned.
e. Tighten the connecting rod nuts.
Nut (connecting rod):15 Nm (1.5 mkg, 11 ft lb) +(turn the nut another 90 )
Refer to “INSTALLING THE CONNECT-ING RODS”.
f. Remove the connecting rod and big endbearings.Refer to “REMOVING THE CONNECT-ING RODS”.
g. Measure the compressed Plastigauge
width e on the crankshaft pin.If the clearance is out of specification, se-lect replacement big end bearings.
6. Select: big end bearings (P1 P4)
The numbers A stamped into the crank-shaft web and the numbers 1 on the con-necting rods are used to determine the re-placement big end bearing sizes.
“P1” “P4” refer to the bearings shown inthe crankshaft illustration.
4-66
CRANKSHAFT ENG
2
2
3
2
2
NOTE:
For example, if the connecting rod “P1” andthe crankshaft web “P1” numbers are “4”and “1” respectively, then the bearing sizefor “P1” is:
Bearing size for P 1:P1 (connecting rod) – P1 (crankshaft-web) = 4 – 1 = 3 (brown)
BIG ENDBEARINGCOLOR CODE
1 2 3 4
blue black brown green
EB412700
INSTALLING THE CONNECTING RODS1. Lubricate: bolt threads nut seats
(with the recommended lubricant)
Recommended lubricantMolybdenum disulfide grease
2. Lubricate: crankshaft pins big end bearings connecting rod inner surface
(with the recommended lubricant)
Recommended lubricantEngine oil
3. Install: big end bearings 1 connecting rods 2 connecting rod caps 3
(onto the crankshaft pins)
Align the projections on the big end bear-ings with the notches in the connectingrods and connecting rod caps.
Be sure to reinstall each big end bearing inits original place.
Make sure that the “Y” marks a on theconnecting rods face towards the left sideof the crankshaft.
Make sure that the characters on both theconnecting rod and connecting rod cap arealigned.
4-67
CRANKSHAFT ENG
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
NOTE:
4. Align: bolt heads 1
(with the connecting rod caps)
5. Tighten: Nuts (connecting rod)
Nut (connecting rod):15 Nm (1.5 mkg) +(turn the nut another 90 )
a. Replace the connecting rod bolts andnuts with new ones.
Tighten the connecting rod bolts usingthe plastic-region tightening angle meth-od.Always install new bolts and nuts.
b. Clean the connecting rod bolts and nuts.c. Tighten the connecting rod nuts.d. Put a mark 1 on the corner of the con-
necting rod nut 2 and the connecting rod3 .
e. Tighten the nut further to reach the speci-fied angle (90).
When the nut is tightened more than thespecified angle, do not loosen the nutand then retighten it.Replace the bolt with a new one and per-form the procedure again.
Do not use a torque wrench to tightenthe nut to the specified angle.
Tighten the nut until it is at the specifiedangles.
When using a hexagonal nut, note that theangle from one corner to another is 60.
4-68
CRANKSHAFT ENG
b
aNOTE:
NOTE:
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
EB412720
INSTALLING THE CRANKSHAFT1. Install: crankshaft journal upper bearings 1
(into the upper crankcase)
Align the projections a on the crankshaftjournal upper bearings with the notches bin the crankcase.
Be sure to install each crankshaft journalupper bearing in its original place.
2. Install: timing chain 1
(onto the crankshaft sprocket) crankshaft assembly 2
Pass the timing chain through the timingchain cavity.
To prevent the timing chain from falling intothe crankcase, fasten it with a wire.
3. Install: timing chain guide 1
4-69
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
123456789
1011
Removing the transmissionDisassembly the crankcaseMain axle assemblyCirclipBearingBearingDrive axle assemblyCirclipNozzleBearingPlate washerOil seal/collarBearing
111111111
1/11
Remove the parts in the order listed.Refer to “CRANKCASE” section.Refer to “INSTALLING THETRANSMISSION” section.
Refer to “INSTALLING THETRANSMISSION” section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
TRANSMISSION ENG
TRANSMISSION
4-70
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
Disassembling the transmission1st wheel gear5th wheel gearCirclipWasher4th wheel gear3rd wheel gear6th wheel gear2nd wheel gearWasherCirclipDrive axle2nd pinion gear6th pinion gear
1111111111111
Disassembly the parts in the order listed.
10
123456789
111213
TRANSMISSION ENG
4-71
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
3rd/4th pinion gearCirclipWasher5thMain axle
11111
For assembly, reverse the disassemblyprocedure.
1415161718
TRANSMISSION ENG
4-72
TRANSMISSION ENGEB413422
CHECKING THE TRANSMISSION1. Measure: main axle runout
(with a centering device and dial gauge1 )Out of specification Replace the mainaxle.
Main axle runout limit0.02 mm
2. Measure: drive axle runout
(with a centering device and dial gauge1 )Out of specification Replace the driveaxle.
Drive axle runout limit0.02 mm
3. Check: transmission gears
Blue discoloration/pitting/wear Re-place the defective gear(-s).
transmission gear dogsCracks/damage/rounded edges Re-place the defective gear(-s).
4. Check: transmission gear engagement
(each pinion gear to its respective wheelgear)Incorrect Reassemble the transmissionaxle assemblies.
5. Check: transmission gear movement
Rough movement Replace the defec-tive part(-s).
Transmission gear reassembling point:Press the 2nd pinion gear 1 into the mainaxle 2 , as shown in the illustration.
4-73
TRANSMISSION ENG
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB413710
INSTALLING THE TRANSMISSION1. Install: oil baffle plate 1 crankcase breather hose 2
Insert the metal clamp 3 on the crankcasebreather hose into the slots 4 in the crank-case.
2. Install: main axle assembly 1 drive axle assembly 2 oil seals circlips lock washer
Make sure that the drive axle bearing cir-clips 3 are inserted into the grooves 4 inthe upper crankcase.
The main axle bearing pin 5 must face to-wards the front of the crankcase and thedrive axle bearing pin 6 must face to-wards the rear of the crankcase.
3. Check: transmission
Rough movement Repair.
Oil each gear, shaft, and bearing thoroughly.
4-74
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “CRANKCASE” section.Refer to “TRANSMISSION” section.
Refer to “INSTALLING THE SHIFTFORKS AND SHIFT DRUM” section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
12345678
Removing the shift drum andshift forksDisassembly the crankcaseTransmissionShift fork guide bar retainerShift drum retainerShift fork guide bar 1Shift fork CShift fork guide bar 2Shift fork LShift fork RShift drum
11111111
SHIFT DRUM AND SHIFT FORKS ENG
SHIFT DRUM AND SHIFT FORKS
4-75
SHIFT DRUM AND SHIFT FORKS ENG
1
2
1
2
EB413400
CHECKING THE SHIFT FORKSThe following procedure applies to all of the shiftforks and related components.
1. Check: shift fork cam follower 1 shift fork pawl 2
Bends/damage/scoring/wear Replacethe shift fork.
2. Check: shift fork guide bar
Roll the shift fork guide bar on a flat sur-face.Bend Replace.
Do not attempt to straighten a bent shiftfork guide bar.
3. Check: shift fork movement
(on the shift fork guide bar)Rough movement Replace the shiftforks and shift fork guide bar as a set.
EB413410
CHECKING THE SHIFT DRUM ASSEMBLY1. Check: shift drum grooves
Damage/scratches/wear Replace theshift drum.
shift drum segment 1Damage/wear Replace.
shift drum bearing 2Damage/pitting Replace.
EB413701
INSTALLING THE SHIFT FORKS AND SHIFTDRUM ASSEMBLY
1. Install: shift drum assembly 1
4-76
SHIFT DRUM AND SHIFT FORKS ENG
1
1
2 3
NOTE:
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)r
2. Install: shift fork guide bars 1 shift fork “L” 2 shift fork “C” 3 shift fork “R” 4
The embossed marks on the shift forksshould face towards the left side of the en-gine and be in the following sequence: “L”,“C”, “R”.
The grooved side of the shift fork guide barshould face towards the right side of theengine.
3. Install: shift drum retainer 1
LOCKTITE
shift fork guide bar retainer 2
COOL
5
COOL
CHAPTER 5COOLING SYSTEM
RADIATOR 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE RADIATOR 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE RADIATOR 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THERMOSTAT 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE THERMOSTAT 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASSEMBLING THE THERMOSTAT 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE THERMOSTAT 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WATER PUMP 5-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING THE WATER PUMP 5-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE WATER PUMP 5-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE WATER PUMP 5-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COOL
5-1
7 Nm (0.7 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
12345
Removing the radiatorSeatFuel tank
Drain the coolant
Fan motor leadsRadiator outlet hoseRadiator inlet hoseRadiatorFan
11111
Remove the parts in the order listed.Refer to “FRONT COWLING/SEAT/SIDECOVER/FUEL TANK” section in chapter3.Refer to “CHANGING THE COOLANT”section in chapter 3.
Disconnect the coupler.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
NOTE:
RADIATOR COOL
COOLING SYSTEMRADIATOR
5-2
RADIATOR COOL
NOTE:
EB500010
CHECKING THE RADIATOR1. Check: radiator fins
Obstruction Clean.Apply compressed air to the rear of the ra-diator.Damage Repair or replace.
Straighten any flattened fins with a thin, flat-head screwdriver.
2. Check: radiator hoses radiator pipes
Cracks/damage Replace.
3. Measure: radiator cap opening pressure
Below the specified pressure Replacethe radiator cap.
Radiator cap opening pressure95 125 kPa(0.95 1.25 kg/cm 2)
a. Install the radiator cap tester 1 andadapter 2 to the radiator cap 3 .
Radiator cap tester90890-01325
Adapter90890-01352
b. Apply the specified pressure for ten se-conds and make sure that there is no dropin pressure.
4. Check: radiator fan
Damage Replace.Malfunction Check and repair.Refer to “COOLING SYSTEM” in chapter8.
5-3
RADIATOR COOLEB500020
INSTALLING THE RADIATOR1. Fill: cooling system
(with the specified amount of the recom-mended coolant)Refer to “CHANGING THE COOLANT” inchapter 3.
2. Check: cooling system
Leaks Repair or replace any faulty part.
a. Attach the radiator cap tester 1 to theradiator.
Radiator cap tester:90890-01325
b. Apply 100 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2) of pressure.c. Measure the indicated pressure with the
gauge.
5-4
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
1
23456789
Removing the thermostatSeatFuel tank
Drain the coolant
Thermo switch lead(engine temperature)Thermo switch lead (fan motor)Reservoir tank hoseCarburetor inlet hoseEngine outlet hoseEngine outlet hoseRadiator inlet hoseThermostat housingGround read
1
11111111
Remove the parts in the order listed.Refer to “FRONT COWLING/SEAT/SIDE COVER/FUEL TANK” section in chapter 3.
Refer to “CHANGING THE COOLANT”section in chapter 3.
Disconnect the lead.
Disconnect the coupler.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE:
NOTE:
THERMOSTAT COOL
THERMOSTAT
5-5
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
8 Nm (0.8 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
Disassembling the thermostatThermo switch (fan motor)Thermo switch (engine temperature)Thermostat housing coverO-ringThermostatThermostat housing
111111
Disassembly the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “ASSEMBLING THETHERMOSTAT” section.
For assembly, reverse the disassemblyprocedure.
123456
THERMOSTAT COOL
5-6
THERMOSTAT COOL
1
1
3
4
2
80.583.5 95C
8 mm
NOTE:
EB502021
CHECKING THE THERMOSTAT1. Check: thermostat 1
Does not open at 80.5 83.5C Replace.
a. Suspend the thermostat in a containerfilled with water.
b. Slowly heat the water.c. Place a thermometer in the water.d. While stirring the water, observe the ther-
mometer’s indicated temperature.
1 Thermometer2 Water3 Thermostat4 ContainerA ClosesB Opens
If the accuracy of the thermostat is in doubt,replace it. A faulty thermostat could causeserious overheating or overcooling.
2. Check: thermostat housing cover 1 thermostat housing 2
Cracks/damage Replace.
3. Measure: radiator cap opening pressure
Below the specified pressure Replacethe radiator cap.Refer to “CHECKING THE RADIATOR”.
4. Check: thermostat housing cover O-ring thermostat inlet pipe O-ring thermostat inlet pipe water pump outlet pipe
Damage Replace.
5-7
THERMOSTAT COOL
NOTE:
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
8 Nm (0.8 mkg)
CAUTION:
EB502030
ASSEMBLING THE THERMOSTAT1. Install: thermostat housing 1 thermostat 2 O-ring (New) 3 thermostat housing cover 4
Install the thermostat with its breather holea facing up.
2. Install: thermo switch (fan motor) 1
thermo switch (engine temperature) 2
Use extreme care when handling thethermo switch and temperature sender.Replace any part that was dropped orsubjected to a strong impact.
EB502040
INSTALLING THE THERMOSTAT1. Fill: cooling system
(with the specified amount of the recom-mended coolant)Refer to “CHANGING THE COOLANT” inchapter 3.
2. Check: cooling system
Leaks Repair or replace any faulty part.
3. Measure: radiator cap opening pressure
Below the specified pressure Replacethe radiator cap.Refer to “CHECKING THE RADIATOR”.
5-8
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
1234567
Removing the water pumpDrain the coolant
Shift arm, drive chain cover
Radiator outlet hoseWater pump outlet hoseWater pump outlet pipeWater pump housing coverO-ringWater pump assemblyO-ring
1111111
Remove the parts in the order listed.Refer to “CHANGING THECOOLANT” section in chapter 3.Refer to “REMOVING THE ENGINE”section in chapter 4.
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THEWATER PUMP” section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
WATER PUMP COOL
WATER PUMP
5-9
WATER PUMP COOL
1
2
NOTE:
EB503020
REMOVING THE WATER PUMP1. Remove: water pump housing 1
Tap out the water pump seal from the insideof the water pump housing.
EB503032
CHECKING THE WATER PUMP1. Check: water pump housing cover water pump housing 1 impeller 2
2. Check: water pump seal 1 oil seal 2
Cracks/damage/wear Replace.
3. Check: bearing 1
Roughness Replace.
4. Check: water pump inlet pipe radiator outlet hose
Cracks/damage/wear Replace.
EB503052
INSTALLING THE WATER PUMP1. Install: water pump housing
Always use a new O-ring
5-10
WATER PUMP COOL
ab
NOTE:
NOTE:
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
NOTE:
Align the slot a on the impeller shaft withthe projection b on the oil pump shaft.
Before installing the water pump housing,apply a thin coat of lithium soap basegrease onto the O-ring.
2. Install: water pump housing cover 1 water pump outlet pipe 2
Always use a new gasket and O-rings.
Before installing the water pump outlet pipe,apply a thin coat of lithium soap base greaseonto the O-rings.
Water pump housing cover bolt10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
3. Install: gasket dowel pins drive chain sprocket cover 1
4. Install: shift arm 1
Align the slot a on the shift arm 1 with thepunch mark b on the shift shaft 2 .
5. Fill: cooling system
(with the specified amount of the recom-mended coolant)Refer to “CHANGING THE COOLANT” inchapter 3.
6. Check: cooling system
Leaks Repair or replace any faulty part.
7. Measure: radiator cap opening pressure
Below the specified pressure Replacethe radiator cap.Refer to “CHECKING THE RADIATOR”.
CARB
6
CARB
CHAPTER 6CARBURETORS
CARBURETORS 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIR FILTER CASE 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CARBURETORS 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE CARBURETORS 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASSEMBLING THE CARBURETORS 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE CARBURETORS 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MEASURING AND ADJUSTING THE FUEL LEVEL 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE POSITIONSENSOR 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CARB
6-1
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
12345
Removing the air filter caseSeat, fueltank and sidecovers
Drain the coolant
Air filter case (left /right)Battery negative leadBattery positive leadBatteryStay
1/11111
Remove the parts in the order listed.Refer to “FRONT COWLING/SEAT/SIDE COVER/FUEL TANK” section in chapter 3.Refer to “CHANGING THE COOLANT” section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
CARBURETORS CARB
CARBURETORSCARBURETORSAIR FILTER CASE
6-2
CARBURETORS CARB
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
123456
Removing the carburetorsThrottle position sensor leadAir filter joint screwCarburetors joint screwCarburetor inlet/outlet hoseCarburetors assemblyStarter cableThrottle cable
44
1/1112
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Disconnect the coupler.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
NOTE:
CARBURETORS
6-3
CARBURETORS CARB
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
Disassembling the carburetorsStarter plunger linkCarburetors assemblyVacuum chamber coverPiston valve springPiston valveNeedle kitFloat chamberFloat chamber gasketFloat pinFloatNeedle valve assemblyMain jet
141111111111
Disassembly the parts in the order listed.
#1, #2, #3, #4
Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE CARBURETERS” section.
123456789101112
6-4
CARBURETORS CARB
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
Main jet holderNeedle jetPilot jetPilot screw set
Starter plunger kit
1111
1
Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE CARBURETORS” section.
For assembly, reverse the disassemblyprocedure.
13141516
17
6-5
CARBURETORS CARBEB600031
CHECKING THE CARBURETORSThe following procedure applies to all of the car-buretors.
1. Check: carburetor body float chamber main jet holder
Cracks/damage Replace.
2. Check: fuel passages
Obstruction Clean.
a. Wash the carburetor in a petroleumbasedsolvent. Do not use any caustic-carbure-tor-cleaning solution.
b. Blow out all of the passages and jets withcompressed air.
3. Check: float chamber body 1
Dirt Clean.
4. Check: float chamber rubber gasket 2
Cracks/damage/wear Replace.
5. Check: float 1
Damage Replace.
6. Check: needle valve 1 needle valve seat 2
Damage/obstruction/wear Replace theneedle valve, needle valve seat and O-ringas a set.
7. Check: O-ring 3
Damage/wear Replace the needlevalve, needle valve seat and O-ring as aset.
6-6
CARBURETORS CARB
8. Check: piston valve 1
Damage/scratches/wear Replace. rubber diaphragm 2
Cracks/tears Replace.
9. Check: vacuum chamber cover 1 piston valve spring 2 jet needle holder 3
Cracks/damage Replace.
10. Check: jet needle kit 1 needle jet 2 main jet 3 pilot jet 4 pilot screw 5 starter plunger 6
Bends/damage/wear Replace.Obstruction Clean.Blow out the jets with compressed air.
11. Check: piston valve movement
Insert the piston valve into the carburetorbody and move it up and down.Tightness Replace the piston valve.
12. Check: fuel feed pipes hose joint
Cracks/damage Replace.Obstruction Clean.Blow out the pipes with compressed air.
13. Check: fuel hoses
Cracks/damage/wear Replace.Obstruction Clean.Blow out the hoses with compressed air.
6-7
CARBURETORS CARB
CAUTION:
NOTE:
EB600041
ASSEMBLING THE CARBURETORSThe following procedure applies to all of the car-buretors.
Before assembling the carburetors,wash all of the parts in a petroleum-based solvent.
Always use a new gasket.
1. Install: O-ring (New) washer pilot screw spring pilot screw 1
Pilot screw2 turns out
2. Install: jet needle 1 washer 2 (0.5 mm) ring 3 clip 4 washer 5 (0.5 mm)
Standard clip position:No. 3 Groove
3. Install: piston valve jet needle kit 1 jet needle holder 2 piston valve spring 3 vacuum chamber cover
Insert the end of the piston valve springonto the spring guide on the vacuumchamber cover.
Align the tab on the piston valve dia-phragm with the recess in the carburetorbody.
6-8
CARBURETORS CARB
NOTE:
4. Install: fuel feed joints 1 hose joints 2 spacer 3 connecting bolt 4 starter plunger link 5 throttle cable holder 6 spacer 7 connecting bolt 8
Do not tighten the connecting bolts yet. Install the throttle arm 9 onto carburetors
#1, #2, and #4 between the spring 10 andsynchronizing screw 11 .
Install the starter plunger link onto eachstarter plunger.
Place the carburetor assembly on a sur-face plate with the intake manifold sidedown. Then, tighten the connecting boltswhile pushing down the carburetor assem-bly with an even force.
After tightening the connecting bolts,check that the throttle cable lever andstarter plunger link operate smoothly.
EB600051
INSTALLING THE CARBURETORS1. Adjust: carburetor synchronization
Refer to “SYNCHRONIZING THE CAR-BURETORS” in chapter 3.
2. Adjust: engine idling speed
Engine idling speed1,150 1,250 r/min
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE ENGINE ID-LING SPEED” in chapter 3.
3. Adjust: throttle cable free play
Throttle cable free play (at theflange of the throttle grip)
3 5 mm
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE THROTTLECABLE FREE PLAY” in chapter 3.
6-9
CARBURETORS CARB
23
NOTE:
EB600062
MEASURING AND ADJUSTING THE FUELLEVEL
1. Measure: fuel level a
Out of specification Adjust
Fuel level (above the floatchamber mating surface)
4.5 mm
a. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.b. Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand
to ensure that the motorcycle is standingstraight up.
c. Install the fuel level gauge 1 to the fueldrain pipe 2 .
Fuel level gauge90890-01312
d. Loosen the fuel drain screw 3 .e. Hold the fuel level gauge vertically next to
the float chamber.f. Measure the fuel level a .
Fuel level readings should be equal on bothsides of the carburetor assembly.
2. Adjust: fuel level
a. Remove the carburetor assembly.b. Check the needle valve seat and needle
valve.c. If either is worn, replace them as a set.d. If both are fine, adjust the float level by
slightly bending the float tang 1 .e. Install the carburetor assembly.f. Measure the fuel level again.g. Repeat steps (a) to (f) until the fuel level is
within specification.
6-10
CARBURETORS CARB
NOTE:
1
2
3
2
EB600070
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THETHROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Before adjusting the throttle position sen-sor, the engine idling speed should beproperly adjusted.
When installing the throttle position sen-sor, adjust its angle according to the RPMwhich is displayed on the tachometer.Refer to the adjustment procedure below.
1. Check: throttle position sensor
a. Disconnect the throttle position sensorcoupler.
b. Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1k) to thethrottle position sensor.
Tester positive lead BLUE Tester negative lead BLACK/BLUE
c. Check the throttle position sensor maxi-mum resistance.Out of specification Replace thethrottle position sensor.
Throttle position sensormaximum resistance
3.5 6.5 kΩ at 20C(BLUE — BLACK/BLUE)
d. Install the throttle position sensor onto thecarburetor.
e. Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1k) to thethrottle position sensor.
Tester positive lead YELLOW Tester negative lead BLACK/BLUE
f. While slowly opening the throttle, checkthat the throttle position sensor resis-tance is within the specified range.Out of specification Replace thethrottle position sensor.
Throttle position sensorresistance
0 5 ± 1.5 kΩ at 20C(YELLOW — BLACK/BLUE)
2. Adjust: throttle position sensor angle
a. Turn the main switch to “ON”.
6-11
CARBURETORS CARB
2
3
NOTE:
NOTE:
1
2
3
a
b
NOTE:
b. Disconnect the throttle position sensorcoupler.
c. Reconnect the throttle position sensorcoupler.
After reconnecting the throttle position sen-sor coupler, the tachometer switches to thethrottle position sensor adjustment mode.
d. Loosen the throttle position sensorscrews 1 .
e. Adjust the throttle position sensor angleaccording to the following table:
The angle of the throttle position sensor is in-dicated by the RPM which is displayed onthe tachometer.
TachometerReading
Throttleposition
sensor angle
Adjust-ment
direction
5000 rpm Correct ——
0 rpm Incorrect
10000 rpm Incorrect
f. After adjusting the throttle position sensorangle, tighten the throttle position sensorscrews.
To exit the throttle position sensor adjust-ment mode, start the engine or turn the mainswitch to “OFF”.
6-12
CARB
CHAS
7
CHAS
CHAPTER 7CHASSIS
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISCS 7-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRONT WHEEL 7-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING THE FRONT WHEEL 7-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE FRONT WHEEL 7-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE BRAKE DISCS 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE FRONT WHEEL 7-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADJUSTING THE FRONT WHEEL STATIC BALANCE 7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISC AND REAR WHEEL SPROCKET 7-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REAR WHEEL 7-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BRAKE DISC AND REAR WHEEL SPROCKET 7-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISASSEMBLY THE REAR WHEEL 7-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING THE REAR WHEEL 7-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE REAR WHEEL 7-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING AND REPLACING THE REAR WHEEL SPROCKET 7-12. . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE REAR WHEEL 7-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADJUSTING THE REAR WHEEL STATIC BALANCE 7-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES 7-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRONT BRAKE PADS 7-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REAR BRAKE PADS 7-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPLACING THE FRONT BRAKE PADS 7-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPLACING THE REAR BRAKE PADS 7-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER 7-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER 7-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER 7-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING THE REAR BREAKE MASTER CYLINDER 7-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE MASTERCYLINDERS 7-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASSEMBLING AND INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKEMASTER CYLINDER 7-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASSEMBLING AND INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER 7-27. . FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS 7-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REAR BRAKE CALIPER 7-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT BRAKE CALIPER 7-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISASSEMBLING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER 7-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE CALIPERS 7-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASSEMBLING AND INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKECALIPERS 7-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASSEMBLING AND INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKECALIPER 7-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FRONT FORK 7-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING THE FRONT FORK LEGS 7-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS 7-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE FRONT FORK LEGS 7-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASSEMBLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS 7-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS 7-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HANDLEBAR 7-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING THE HANDLEBAR 7-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE HANDLEBAR 7-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE HANDLEBAR 7-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHAS
STEERING HEAD 7-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOWER BRACKET 7-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING THE LOWER BRACKET 7-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE STEERING HEAD 7-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE STEERING HEAD 7-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND RELAY ARM 7-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HANDLING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER 7-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISPOSING OF A REAR SHOCK ABSORBER 7-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY 7-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY 7-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY 7-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN 7-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING THE SWINGARM 7-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE SWINGARM 7-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE DRIVE CHAIN 7-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE SWINGARM 7-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE DRIVE CHAIN 7-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
23 Nm(2.3 mkg)
40 Nm(4.0 mkg)
67 Nm (6.7 mkg)
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
1
2345678
Removing the flont wheel and brakediscsWheel axle pinch bolt
Brake hose horder (left /right)Brake caliper (left /right)Wheel axleFront wheel assemblySpeed sensor unitCollarBrake disc (left /right)
1
1/11/11111
1/1
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Loosen
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THEFRONT WHEEL” section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
NOTE:
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC CHAS
CHASSISFRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC
7-2
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
Disassembling the front wheelOil sealBearingSpacerBearing
1111
Disassembly the parts in the order listed.
For assembly, reverse the disassemblyprodedure.
1234
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC CHAS
FRONT WHEEL
7-3
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC CHAS
NOTE:
NOTE:
CAUTION:
NOTE:
EB700102
REMOVING THE FRONT WHEEL1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
Securely support the motorcycle so thatthere is no danger of it falling over.
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand sothat the front wheel is elevated.
2. Remove: wheel axle pinch bolt brake hose holder (left /right)
3. Remove: left brake caliper right brake caliper
Do not squeeze the brake lever when re-moving the brake calipers.
4. Remove: Wheel axle Speed sensor unit 1
Push the front wheel rearward andremove the speed sensor unit 1 from thefront wheel.
5. Elevate: front wheel
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand sothat the front wheel is elevated.
EB700400
CHECKING THE FRONT WHEEL1. Measure: wheel axle runout
Wheel axle runout<Limit> 0.25 mm
Do not attempt to straighten a bent wheelaxle.
2. Check: tire front wheel
Damage/wear Replace.Refer to “CHECKING THE TIRES” and”!CHECKING THE WHEELS” in chapter 3.
7-4
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC CHAS
2
1
NOTE:
CAUTION:
NOTE:
3. Measure: front wheel radial runout 1 front wheel lateral runout 2
Over the specified limits Replace.
Front wheel radial runout limit1.0 mm
Front wheel lateral runout limit0.5 mm
4. Check: wheel bearings
Front wheel turns roughly or is loose Replace the wheel bearings.
oil sealsDamage/wear Replace.
5. Replace: wheel bearings (New) oil seals (New)
a. Clean the outside of the front wheel hub.b. Remove the oil seals 1 with a flat-head
screwdriver.
To prevent damaging the wheel, place a rag2 between the screwdriver and the wheelsurface.
c. Remove the wheel bearings 3 with ageneral bearing puller 4 .
d. install the new wheel bearings and oilseals in the reverse order of disassembly.
Do not contact the wheel bearing centerrace 5 or balls 6 . Contact should bemade only with the outer race 7 .
Use a socket 8 that matches the diameterof the wheel bearing outer race and oil seal.
7-5
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC CHAS
NOTE:
EB700414
CHECKING THE BRAKE DISCSThe following procedure applies to all of thebrake discs.
1. Check: brake disc
Damage/galling Replace.
2. Measure: brake disc deflection a
Out of specification Correct the brakedisc deflection or replace the brake disc.
Brake disc deflection limit(maximum)
Front: 0.2 mmRear: 0.15 mm
a. Place the motorcycle on a suitable standso that the wheel is elevated.
b. Before measuring the front brake discdeflection, turn the handlebar to the left orright to ensure that the front wheel is sta-tionary.
c. Remove the brake caliper.d. Hold the dial gauge at a right angle
against the brake disc surface.e. Measure the deflection 2 3 mm below
the edge of the brake disc.
3. Measure: brake disc thickness b
Measure the brake disc thickness at a fewdifferent locations.Out of specification Replace.
Brake disc thickness limit(minimum)
Front: 3.5 mmRear: 4.5 mm
4. Adjust: brake disc deflection
a. Remove the brake disc.b. Rotate the brake disc by one bolt hole.c. Install the brake disc.
Tighten the brake disc bolts 1 in stages andin a crisscross pattern.
Brake disc bolt LOCKTITE
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
d. Measure the brake disc deflection.e. If out of specification, repeat the adjust-
ment steps until the brake disc deflectionis within specification.
f. If the brake disc deflection cannot bebrought within specification, replace thebrake disc.
7-6
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC CHAS
NOTE:
NOTE:
CAUTION:
EB700722
INSTALLING THE FRONT WHEEL1. Lubricate: wheel axle wheel bearings oil seal lips
Recommended lubricantLithium soap base grease
2. Install: Speed sensor unit
Make sure that the speed sensor unit andthe wheel hud are installed with the two pro-jections a meshed into the two slots b re-spectively.
3. Install: front wheel
Make sure that the slot a in the speed sen-sor unit fits over the stopper on the outertube b .
4. Tighten: wheel axle wheel axle pinch bolt brake caliper bolts
Wheel axle67 Nm (6.7 mkg)
Wheel axle pinch bolt20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
Brake caliper bolt40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
Make sure that the brake cable is routedproperly.
Before tightening the wheel axle nut,push down hard on the handlebar sever-al times and check if the front fork re-bounds smoothly.
7-7
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC CHAS
A
B
C
D
X1
X
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB700901
ADJUSTING THE FRONT WHEEL STATICBALANCE
After replacing the tire. wheel or both, thefront wheel static balance should be ad-justed.
Adjust the front wheel static balance withthe brake discs installed.
1. Remove: balancing weight(-s)
Place the front wheel on a suitable balancingstand.
2. Find: front wheel’s heavy spot
a. Spin the front wheelb. When the front wheel stops, put an “X1”
mark at the bottom of the wheel.c. Turn the front wheel 90 so that the “X1”
mark is positioned as shown A .d. Release the front wheel.e. When the wheel stops, put an “X2” mark
at the bottom of the wheel B .f. Repeat steps (b) through (d) several
times until all the marks come to rest atthe same spot.
g. The spot where all the marks come to restis the front wheel’s heavy spot “X”.
3. Adjust: front wheel static balance
a. Install a balancing weight 1 onto the rimexactly opposite the heavy spot “X” C .
Start with the lightest weight.
b. Turn the front wheel 90 so that the heavyspot is positioned as shown D .
c. If the heavy spot does not stay in thatposition, install a heavier weight.
d. Repeat steps (b) and (c) until the frontwheel is balanced.
4. Check: front wheel static balance
a. Turn the front wheel and make sure that itstays at each position shown.
b. If the front wheel does not remain station-ary at all of the positions, rebalance it.
7-8
117 Nm (11.7 mkg)
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
12345678
Removing the rear wheelBrake caliperNutWasherWheel axleWasherDrive chain puller (left)Drive chain puller (right)Rear wheel assembly
11111111
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THEREAR WHEEL” section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISC AND REAR WHEEL SPROCKET CHAS
REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISC AND REAR WHEEL SPROCKETREAR WHEEL
7-9
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
60 Nm (6.0 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
12345678
Removing the brake disk and rearwheel sprocketCollar (left /right)Brake discRear wheel sprocketCollarDrive hub damperRear wheel drive hubOil sealBearing
1/11116111
Remove the parts in the order listed.
For instalation, reverse the removalprocedure.
REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISC AND REAR WHEEL SPROCKET CHAS
BRAKE DISC AND REAR WHEEL SPROCKET
7-10
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
Disassembling the rear wheelOil sealBearingCollarBearing
1111
Disassembly the parts in the order listed.
For assembly, reverse the disassemblyprocedure.
1234
REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISC AND REAR WHEEL SPROCKET CHAS
DIASSEMBLY THE REAR WHEEL
7-11
1
12
3
REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISC AND REAR WHEEL SPROCKET CHAS
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB701100
REMOVING THE REAR WHEEL1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
Securely support the motorcycle so. thatthere is no danger of it falling over.
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand sothat the rear wheel is elevated.
2. Remove: brake caliper 1
Do not depress the brake pedal when re-moving the brake caliper.
3. Loosen: locknut 1 adjusting nut 2
4. Remove: wheel axle nut 3 wheel axle 4 rear wheel
Push the rear wheel forward and remove thedrive chain from the rear wheel sprocket.
5. Remove: left collar 1 rear wheel drive hub 2 rear wheel drive hub damper 3 right collar
EB701400
CHECKING THE REAR WHEEL1. Check: wheel axle rear wheel wheel bearings oil seals
Refer to “FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKEDISC”
2. Check: tire rear wheel
Damage/wear Replace.Refer to “CHECKING THE TIRES” and“CHECKING THE WHEELS” in chapter 3.
7-12
REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISC AND REAR WHEEL SPROCKET CHAS
NOTE:
3. Measure: rear wheel radial runout rear wheel lateral runout
Refer to “FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKEDISC”.
EB701440
CHECKING AND REPLACING THE REARWHEEL SPROCKET
1. Check: rear wheel sprocket
More than 1/4 tooth a wear Replacethe rear wheel sprocket.Bent teeth Replace the rear wheelsprocket.
correct b drive chain roller 1 rear wheel sprocket 2
2. Replace: rear wheel sprocket 1
a. Remove the self-locking nuts and the rearwheel sprocket.
b. Clean the rear wheel drive hub with aclean cloth, especially the surfaces thatcontact the sprocket.
c. Install the new rear wheel sprocket.
Rear wheel sprocket self-locking nut
60 Nm (6.0 mkg)
Tighten the self-locking nuts 2 in stagesand in a crisscross pattern.
EB701711
INSTALLING THE REAR WHEEL1. Lubricate: wheel axle wheel bearings oil seal lips
Recommended lubricantLithium soap base grease
2. Tighten: wheel axle nut brake caliper bolts
Wheel axle nut117 Nm (11.7 mkg)
Brake caliper bolt40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
7-13
REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISC AND REAR WHEEL SPROCKET CHAS
NOTE:
EB701900
ADJUSTING THE REAR WHEEL STATICBALANCE
After replacing the tire, wheel or both, therear wheel static balance should be ad-justed.
Adjust the rear wheel static balance withthe brake disc and rear wheel drive hubinstalled.
1. Adjust: rear wheel static balance
Refer to “FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKEDISC”.
7-14
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
12345
Removing the front brake padsBrake caliperBrake pads clipBrake pad pinBrake pad springBrake pad
12112
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “REPLACING THE FRONTBRAKE PADS” section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
FRONT AND REAR BRAKESFRONT BRAKE PADS
7-15
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
1234
Removing the rear brake padsCaliperBrake pad pinBrake pad/shimBrake pad spring
12
2/21
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “REPLACING THE REARBRAKE PADS” section.
For instalation, reverse the removalprocedure.
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
REAR BRAKE PADS
7-16
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
CAUTION:
NOTE:
EB702100
Disc brake componets rarely require dis-assembly.Tehrefore, always follow these preven-tive measures: Never disassemble brake components
unless absolutely necessary. If any connection on the hydraulic
brake system is disconnected, the en-tire brake system must be disas-sembled, drained, cleaned, properlyfilled, and bled after reassembly.
Never use solvents on internal brakecomponents.
Use only clean or new brake fluid forcleaning brake components.
Brake fluid may damage painted sur-faces and plastic parts. Therefore, al-ways clean up any spilt fluid immedi-ately.
Avoid brake fluid coming into contactwith the eyes as it can cause serious in-jury.
First aid for brake fluid entering the eyes: Flush with water for 15 minutes and get
immediate medical attention.
EB702112
REPLACING THE FRONT BRAKES PADSThe following procedure applies to both brakecalipers.
When replacing the brake pads, it is not nec-essary to disconnect the brake hose or dis-assemble the brake caliper.
1. Remove: brake hose holder 1 speedometer cable guide 2 brake caliper 3
2. Remove: brake pad clips 1 brake pad pins 2 brake pad spring 3
7-17
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
NOTE:
6 Nm (0.6 mkg)
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
NOTE:
3. Remove: brake pads 1
(along with the brake pad shims)
4. Measure: brake pad wear limit a
Out of specification Replace the brakepads as a set.
Brake pad wear limit0.5 mm
5. Install: brake pad shims
(onto the brake pads) brake pads brake pad spring
Always install new brake pads, brake padshims, and a brake pad spring as a set.
a. Connect a clear plastic hose 1 tightly tothe bleed screw 2 . Put the other end ofthe hose into an open container.
b. Loosen the bleed screw and push thebrake caliper pistons into the brake cali-per with your finger.
c. Tighten the bleed screw.
d. Install new brake pad shims onto the newbrake pads.
e. Install new brake pads and a new brakepad spring.
6. Install: brake pad spring brake pad pins 1 brake pad clips 2 brake caliper
The arrow a on the brake pad spring mustpoint in the direction of disc rotation.
7. Check: brake fluid level
Below the minimum level mark a Addthe recommended brake fluid to the properlevel.Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUIDLEVEL” in chapter 3.
8. Check: brake lever operation
Soft or spongy feeling Bleed the brakesystem.Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULICBRAKE SYSTEM” in chapter 3.
7-18
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
NOTE:
NOTE:
6 Nm (6 mkg)
EB702113
REPLACING THE REAR BRAKE PADS
When replacing the brake pads, it is not nec-essary to disconnect the brake hose or dis-assemble the brake caliper.
1. Remove: brake caliper 1
2. Remove: brake pad pins 1
3. Remove: brake pads 2
(along with the brake pad shims) brake pad spring
4. Measure: brake pad wear limit a
Out of specification Replace the brakepads as a set.
Brake pad wear limit0.5 mm
5. Install brake pad shims
(onto the brake pads) brake pads brake pad spring
Always install new brake pads, brake padshims, and a brake pad spring as a set.
a. Connect a clear plastic hose 1 tightly tothe bleed screw 2 . Put the other end ofthe hose into an open container.
b. Loosen the bleed screw and push thebrake caliper pistons into the brake cali-per with your finger.
c. Tighten the bleed screw.
d. Install a new brake pad shim 3 onto eachnew brake pad 4 .
e. Install new brake pads and a new brakepad spring.
7-19
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
6. Install: brake pad pins 1
brake caliper
7. Check: brake fluid level
Below the minimum level mark a Addthe recommended brake fluid to the properlevel.Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUIDLEVEL” in chapter 3.
8. Check: brake lever operation
Soft or spongy feeling Bleed the brakesystem.Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULICBRAKE SYSTEM” in chapter 3.
7-20
10 Nm(1.0 mkg)
30 Nm(3.0 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
1234567
Removing the front brake mastercylinderDrain the brake fluidBrake leverBrake switch leadBrake switchUnion boltCopper washer/brake hoseMaster cylinder bracketMaster cylinder
1211
2/111
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “REMOVING/ASSEMBLINGAND INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKEMASTER CYLINDER” section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
7-21
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
Disassembling the front brake master cylinderMaster cylinder bootCirclipMaster cylinder kitSpring
1111
Disassembly the parts in the order listed.
For assembly, reverse the disassemblyprocedure.
1234
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
7-22
30 Nm(3.0 mkg)
4 Nm(0.4 mkg)
23 Nm(2.3 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
123
45678
Removing the rear brake mastercylinderSide cover (right)Drain the brake fluidMaster cylinder boltUnion boltCopper washer/brake hose
Clip/hoseCotter pinPinWasherMaster cylinder
21
2/1
2/11111
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “REMOVING/ASSEMBLINGAND INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKEMASTER CYLINDER” section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
7-23
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
1234
Disassembling the rear brake mastercylinderMaster cylinder bootCirclipMaster cylinder kitSpring
1111
Disassembly the parts in the order listed.
For assembly, reverse the disassemblyprocedure.
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
7-24
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB702210
REMOVING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
Befor disassembling the front brake mastercylinder, drain the brake fluid from the entirebrake system.
1. Disconnect: brake switch coupler 1
(from the brake switch)
2. Remove: union bolt 2 copper washers 3 brake hoses 4
To collect any remaining brake fluid, place acontainer under the master cylinder and theend of the brake hose.
EB702220
REMOVING THE REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
1. Remove: side cover right
2. Remove: union bolt 1 copper washers 2 brake hose 3
To collect any remaining brake fluid, place acontainer under the master cylinder and theend of the brake hose.
7-25
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
D
A B
C
EB702242
CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKEMASTER CYLINDERSThe following procedure applies to the both ofthe brake master cylinders.
1. Check: brake master cylinder
Damage/scratches/wea Replace. brake fluid delivery passages
(brake master cylinder body)Obstruction Blow out with compressedair.
A FrontB Rear
2. Check: brake master cylinder kit 1
Damage/scratches/wear Replace.C FrontD Rear
3. Check: rear brake fluid reservoir 1
Cracks/damage Replace. rear brake fluid reservoir diaphragm 2
Cracks/damage Replace.
4. Check front brake master cylinder diaphragm 1
Damage/wear Replace.
5. Check: brake hoses 1
Cracks/damage/wear Replace.
7-26
a
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
CAUTION:
NOTE:
EB702270
ASSEMBLING AND INSTALLING THEFRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
Before installation, all internal brakecomponents should be cleaned and lu-bricated with clean or new brake fluid.
Never use solvents on internal brakecomponents.
Recommended brake fluidDOT 4
1. Install: copper washers (New) 1 brake hose 2 union bolt 3
Proper brake hose routing is essential toinsure safe motorcycle operation. Referto “CABLE ROUTING”.
When installing the brake hose onto thebrake master cylinder, make sure that thebrake pipe touches the projection a onthe brake master cylinder.
While holding the brake hose, tighten theunion bolt as shown.
Turn the handlebar to the left and to theright to make sure that the brake hosedoes not touch other parts (e.g, wire har-ness, cables, leads). Correct if necessary.
2. Fill: brake master cylinder reservoir
(with the specified amount of the recom-mended brake fluid)
Recommended brake fluidDOT 4
Use only the designated brake fluid.Other brake fluids may cause therubber seals to deteriorate, causingleakage and poor brake performance.
Refill with the same type of brake fluidthat is already in the system. Mixingbrake fluids may result in a harmfulchemical reaction, leading to poorbrake performance.
When refilling, be careful that waterdoes not enter the reservoir. Water willsignificantly lower the boiling point ofthe brake fluid and could cause vaporlock.
7-27
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
CAUTION:
30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
CAUTION:
Brake fluid may damage paintedsurfaces and plastic parts. Therefore,always clean up any spilt brake fluidimmediately.
3. Bleed: brake system
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULICBRAKE SYSTEM” in chapter 3.
4. Check: brake fluid level
Below the minimum level mark a Addthe recommended brake fluid to the properlevel.Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUIDLEVEL” in chapter 3.
5. Check: brake lever operation
Soft or spongy feeling Bleed the brakesystem.Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULICBRAKE SYSTEM” in chapter 3.
EB702292
ASSEMBLING AND INSTALLING THE REARBRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
1. Install: copper washers (New) 1 brake hose 2 union bolt 3
When installing the brake hose onto thebrake master cylinder, make sure that thebrake pipe touches the projection a onthe brake master cylinder.
Proper brake hose routing is essential toinsure safe motorcycle operation. Referto “CABLE ROUTING”.
2. Fill: brake fluid reservoir
(to the maximum level mark a )
Recommended brake fluidDOT 4
7-28
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
CAUTION:
Use only the designated brake fluid.Other brake fluids may cause therubber seals to deteriorate, causingleakage and poor brake performance.
Refill with the same type of brake fluidthat is already in the system. Mixingbrake fluids may result in a harmfulchemical reaction, leading to poorbrake performance.
When refilling, be careful that waterdoes not enter the reservoir. Water willsignificantly lower the boiling point ofthe brake fluid and could cause vaporlock.
Brake fluid may damage paintedsurfaces and plastic parts. Therefore,always clean up any spilt brake fluidimmediately.
3. Bleed: brake system
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULICBRAKE SYSTEM” in chapter 3.
4. Check: brake fluid level
Below the minimum level mark a Addthe recommended brake fluid to the properlevel.Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUIDLEVEL” in chapter 3.
5. Adjust: brake pedal position a
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE REARBRAKE” in chapter 3.
Brake pedal position (belowthe top of the rider footrest)
36.6 mm
6. Adjust: rear brake light operation timing
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKELICHT SWITCH” in chapter 3.
7-29
30 Nm(3.0 mkg)40 Nm(4.0 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
1234
Removing the front brake calipersDrain the brake fluidUnion boltCopper washerBrake hoseBrake caliper assembly
1211
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “ASSEMBLING ANDINSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKECALIPERS” section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS
7-30
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
12345678
Disassembling the front brake calipersClipPad pinBrake pad springBrake padBleed screw kitBrake caliper pistonDust sealPiston seal
21121444
Disassembly the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “REPLACING THE FRONTBRAKE PADS” section.
Refer to “DISASSEMBLING THE FRONTBRAKE CALIPER” section.
For assembly, reverse the disassemblyprocedure.
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
7-31
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
1234
Removing the rear brake caliperDrain the brake fluidUnion boltCopper washerBrake hoseRear brake caliper
1211
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “ASSEMBLING ANDINSTALLING THE REAR BRAKECALIPER” section.
For installation, revers the removalprocedure.
30 Nm(3.0 mkg)
40 Nm(4.0 mkg)
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
REAR BRAKE CALIPER
7-32
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
1234567
Disassembling the rear brake caliperPad pinPad springBrake pad assembly/shimBleed screw kitBrake caliper pistonDust sealPiston seal
21
2/22222
Disassembly the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “REPLACING THE REARBRAKE PAD” section.
Refer to “DISASSEMBLING THE REARBRAKE CARIPER” section.
For assembly, reverse the disassemblyprocedure.
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
7-33
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB702317
DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT BRAKECALIPERSThe following procedure applies to both of thebrake calipers.
Before disassembling either brake caliper,drain the brake fluid from the entire brakesystem.
1. Remove: union bolt 1 copper washers 2 brake hose 3
Put the end of the brake hose into a contain-er and pump out the brake fluid carefully.
2. Remove: brake caliper pistons 1 brake caliper piston seals 2
a. Secure the right side brake caliper pis-tons with a piece of wood a
b. Blow compressed air into the brake hosejoint opening b to force out the left sidepistons from the brake caliper.
c. Remove the brake caliper piston seals.d. Repeat the previous steps to force out the
right side pistons from the brake caliper.
Never try to pry out the caliper pistons. Do not remove the plugs 4 .
7-34
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB702322
DISASSEMBLING THE REAR BRAKECALIPER
Before disassembling the brake caliper,drain the brake fluid from the entire brakesystem.
1. Remove: union bolt 1 copper washers 2 brake hose 3
Put the end of the brake hose into a contain-er and pump out the brake fluid carefully.
2. Remove: brake caliper pistons 1 brake caliper piston seals 2
a. Secure the right side brake caliper pistonwith a piece of wood a
b. Blow compressed air into the brake hosejoint opening b to force out the left sidepiston from the brake caliper.
Never try to pry out the brake caliperpistons.
Do not loosen the bolts 3 .
c. Remove the brake caliper piston seals.d. Repeat the previous steps to force out the
right side piston from the brake caliper.
EB702343
CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKECALIPERS
Recommended brake componentreplacement schedule
Brake pads If necessary
Piston seals Every two years
Brake hoses Every four years
Brake fluid Every two years andwhenever the brake isdisassembled.
7-35
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
A
B
30 Nm (30 mkg)
1. Check: brake caliper pistons 1
Rust/scratches/wear Replace thebrake caliper.
brake caliper cylinders 2Scratches/wear Replace the brake cali-per.
brake calipers 3Cracks/damage Replace.
brake fluid delivery passages(brake caliper body)Obstruction Blow out with compressedair.
Whenever a brake caliper is disas-sembled, replace the brake caliper pistonseals.
A FrontB Rear
2. Check: brake caliper brackets 1
Cracks/damage Replace.
EB702374
ASSEMBLING AND INSTALLING THEFRONT BRAKE CALIPERSThe following procedure applies to both of thebrake calipers.
Before installation, all internal brakecomponents should be cleaned and lu-bricated with clean or new brake fluid.
Never use solvents on internal brakecomponents as they will cause the pis-ton seals to swell and distort.
Whenever a brake caliper is disas-sembled, replace the brake caliper pis-ton seals.
Recommended brake fluidDOT 4
1. Install: brake caliper 1
(temporarily) copper washers (New) 2 brake hose 3 union bolt 4
Proper brake hose routing is essential toinsure safe motorcycle operation. Referto “CABLE ROUTING”.
7-36
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
When installing the brake hose onto thebrake caliper, make sure that the brakepipe a touches the projection a on thebrake caliper.
2. Remove: brake caliper
3. Install: brake pads brake spring brake caliper pins brake caliper clips brake caliper brake hose holder
Refer to “REPLACING THE BRAKEPADS”.
Brake caliper bolt40 Nm (40 mkg)
4. Fill: brake master cylinder reservoir
(with the specified amount of the recom-mended brake fluid)
Recommended brake fluidDOT 4
Use only the designated brake fluid.Other brake fluids may cause the rub-ber seals to deteriorate, causing leak-age and poor brake performance.
Refill with the same type of brake fluidthat is already in the system. Mixingbrake fluids may result in a harmfulchemical reaction, leading to poorbrake performance.
When refilling, be careful that waterdoes not enter the reservoir. Water willsignificantly lower the boiling point ofthe brake fluid and could cause vaporlock.
Brake fluid may damage painted sur-faces and plastic parts. Therefore, al-ways clean up any spilt brake fluid im-mediately.
7-37
1 32
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
CAUTION:
5. Bleed: brake system
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULICBRAKE SYSTEM” in chapter 3.
6. Check: brake fluid level
Below the minimum level mark a Addthe recommended brake fluid to the properlevel.Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUIDLEVEL” in chapter 3.
7. Check: brake lever operation
Soft or spongy feeling Bleed the brakesystem.Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULICBRAKE SYSTEM” in chapter 3.
EB702378
ASSEMBLING AND INSTALLING THE REARBRAKE CALIPER
Before installation, all internal brakecomponents should be cleaned and lu-bricated with clean or new brake fluid.
Never use solvents on internal brakecomponents as they will cause the pis-ton seals to swell and distort.
Whenever a brake caliper is disas-sembled, replace the brake caliper pis-ton seals.
Recommended brake fluidDOT 4
1. Install: brake caliper 1
(temporarily) copper washers (New) brake hose 2 union bolt 3
Proper brake hose routing is essential toinsure safe motorcycle operation. Referto “CABLE ROUTING”.
When installing the brake hose onto thebrake caliper, make sure that the brakepipe a slot the projection a on the brakecaliper.
7-38
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
CAUTION:
2. Remove: brake caliper
3. Install: brake pad spring brake pads brake pad pins brake caliper brake hose holder
Refer to “REPLACING THE BRAKEPADS”.
Brake caliper pad pin10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Brake caliper bolt40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
4. Fill: brake fluid reservoir
(with the specified amount of the recom-mended brake fluid)
Recommended brake fluidDOT 4
Use only the designated brake fluid.Other brake fluids may cause the rub-ber seals to deteriorate, causing leak-age and poor brake performance.
Refill with the same type of brake fluidthat is already in the system. Mixingbrake fluids may result in a harmfulchemical reaction, leading to poorbrake performance.
When refilling, be careful that waterdoes not enter the reservoir. Water willsignificantly lower the boiling point ofthe brake fluid and could cause vaporlock.
Brake fluid may damage painted sur-faces and plastic parts. Therefore, al-ways clean up any spilt brake fluid im-mediately.
5. Bleed: brake system
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULICBRAKE SYSTEM” in chapter 3.
7-39
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES CHAS
6. Check: brake fluid level
Below the minimum level mark a Addthe recommended brake fluid to the properlevel.Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUIDLEVEL” in chapter 3.
7. Check: brake pedal operation
Soft or spongy feeling Bleed the brakesystem.Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULICBRAKE SYSTEM” in chapter 3.
7-40
30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
7 Nm (0.7 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
12
3
4
5
Removing the front forkFront wheel
Front brake calipers
Front fenderBolt (upper bracket)
Cap bolt
Bolt (lower bracket)
Front fork assembly (left /right)
12
2
2
1/1
Remove the parts in the order listed.Refer to “FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKEDISCS” section.Refer to “FRONT AND REAR BRAKES”section.
Loosen
Loosen
LoosenRefer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THEFRONT FORK LEGS” section.For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
NOTE:Refer to“REMOVING/INSTALLING THEFRONT FORKLEGS” section.
NOTE:
NOTE:
FRONT FORK CHAS
FRONT FORK
7-41
10
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
6
7
9
8
11
14
1312
15
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
12345678910111213
Disassembling the front forkCap boltO-ringSpacerWasherFront fork springDust sealOil seal clipBoltGasketDamper rod/rebound springInner tube/Inner tube bushingOil sealWasher
111111111
1/1111
Disassembly the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE FRONTFORK LEGS” section.
Refer to “DISASSEMBLING/ASSEMBLING THE FRONT FORKLEGS” section.
FRONT FORK CHAS
7-42
10
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
7
9
8
11
14
1312
15
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
1415
Outer tube bushingOil flow stopper
11/1
Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE FRONTFORK LEGS” section.For assembly, reverse the disassemblyprocedure.
6
FRONT FORK CHAS
7-43
FRONT FORK CHAS
NOTE:
CAUTION:
NOTE:
EB703100
REMOVING THE FRONT FORK LEGSThe following procedure applies to both of thefront fork legs.
1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
Securely support the motorcycle so thatthere is no danger of it falling over.
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand sothat the front wheel is elevated.
2. Loosen: upper bracket pinch bolt 1 cap bolt 2 lower bracket pinch bolt 3
Before loosening the upper and lowerbracket pinch bolts, support the frontfork leg.
3. Remove: front fork leg
EB703110
DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT FORK LEGSThe following procedure applies to both of thefront fork legs.
1. Remove: dust seal 1 oil seal clip 2
(with a flat-head screwdriver)
Do not scratch the inner tube.
2. Remove: damper rod bolt
While holding the damper rod with the damp-er rod holder 1 and T-handle 2 , loosen thedamper rod bolt.
Damper rod holder90890-01460
T-Handle90890-01326
7-44
FRONT FORK CHAS
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
3. Remove: inner tube
a. Hold the front fork leg horizontally.b. Securely clamp the brake caliper bracket
in a vise with soft jaws.c. Separate the inner tube from the outer
tube by pulling the inner tube forcefullybut carefully.
Excessive force will damage the oil sealand bushing. A damaged oil seal orbushing must be replaced.
Avoid bottoming the inner tube into theouter tube during the above procedure,as the oil flow stopper will be damaged.
EB703401
CHECKING THE FRONT FORK LEGSThe following procedure applies to both of thefront fork legs.
1. Check: inner tube 1 outer tube 2
Bends/damage/scratches Replace.
Do not attempt to straighten a bent innertube as this may dangerously weaken it.
2. Measure: spring free length a
Over the specified limit Replace.
Spring free length limit319 mm
3. Check: damper rod 1
Damage/wear Replace.Obstruction Blow out all of the oil pas-sages with compressed air.
oil flow stopperDamage/wear Replace.
The front fork leg has a built-in damperadjusting rod and a very sophisticatedinternal construction, which are partic-ularly sensitive to foreign material.
When disassembling and assemblingthe front fork leg, do not allow any for-eign material to enter the front fork.
7-45
FRONT FORK CHAS
1
NOTE:
CAUTION:
30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
NOTE:
4. Check: cap bolt O-ring
Damage/wear Replace.
EB703700
ASSEMBLING THE FRONT FORK LEGSThe following procedure applies to both of thefront fork legs.
Make sure that the oil levels in bothfront fork legs are equal.
Uneven oil levels can result in poorhandling and a loss of stability.
When assembling the front fork leg, besure to replace the following parts:-inner tube bushing-outer tube bushing-oil seal-dust seal
Before assembling the front fork leg, makesure that all of the components are clean.
1. Install: damper rod 1
Allow the damper rod to slide slowlydown the inner tube until it protrudesfrom the bottom of the inner tube. Becareful not to damage the inner tube.
2. Lubricate: inner tube’s outer surface
Recommended lubricantFork oil 10 W or equivalent
3. Tighten: damper rod bolt 1
While holding the damper rod with the damp-er rod holder 2 and T-handle 3 , tighten thedamper rod bolt.
Damper rod holder90890-01460
T-handle90890-01326
7-46
FRONT FORK CHAS
CAUTION:
NOTE:
NOTE:
4. Install: outer tube bushing 1
(with the fork seal driver weight 2 andadapter 3 )
Fork seal driver weight 290890-01367
Adapter 390890-01381
5. Install: washer oil seal 1
(with the fork seal driver weight 2 andadapter 3 )
Fork seal driver weight 290890-01367
Adapter 390890-01381
Make sure that the numbered side of theoil seal, faces up.
Before installing the oil seal, apply lithiumsoap base grease onto its lips.
Apply fork oil onto the outer surface of theinner tube.
6. Install: oil seal clip 1
Adjust the oil seal clip so that it fits into theouter tube’s groove.
7. Install: dust seal 1
(with the fork seal driver weight) 1
Fork seal driver weight90890-01367
8. Fill: front fork leg
(with the specified amount of the recom-mended fork oil)
Quantity (each front fork leg)0.475 L
Yamaha fork and shock oil10 W or equivalent.
Front fork leg oil level a (from the top of the inner tube, withthe inner tube fully compressedand without the fork spring)
121 mm
7-47
FRONT FORK CHAS
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
While filling the front fork leg, keep it up-right.
After filling, slowly pump the front fork legup and down to distribute the fork oil.
9. Install: spring 1 spring seat 2 spacer 3 cap bolt
Install the spring with the smaller pitch fac-ing up.
Before installing the cap bolt, apply greaseonto the O-ring.
Temporarily tighten the cap bolt.
EB703710
INSTALLING THE FRONT FORK LEGSThe following procedure applies to both of thefront fork legs.
1. Install: front fork leg
Temporarily tighten the upper and lowerbracket pinch bolts.
Make sure that the inner fork tube is flushwith the top of the handlebar holder.
2. Tighten: lower bracket pinch bolt 1 cap bolt 2 upper bracket pinch bolt 3
Lower bracket pinch bolt30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
Cap bolt23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
Upper bracket pinch bolt30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
Make sure that the brake hoses arerouted properly.
7-48
7 Nm (0.7 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
7 Nm (0.7 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
123456789
1011
1213
Removing the handle barMaster cylinder bracketMaster cylinder assemblyThrottle cable housing coverHandle bar switch (right)Throttle cable housingThrottle cableGrip endGrip assemblyClutch cableClutch switchHandle bar switch (left)
Starter cableGrip end
11111111111
11
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “INSTALLING THEHANDLEBAR” section.
Refer to “INSTALLING THEHANDLEBAR” section.
HANDLEBAR CHAS
HANDLEBAR
7-49
7 Nm (0.7 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
7 Nm (0.7 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
14151617
Grip (left)Clutch lever holderUpper handlebar holderHandle bar
1121
Refer to “REMOVING THE HANDLEBAR”section.Refer to “INSTALLING THEHANDLEBAR” section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
HANDLEBAR CHAS
7-50
HANDLEBAR CHAS
1
1
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB704100
REMOVING THE HANDLEBAR1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
Securely support the motorcycle so thatthere is no danger of it falling over.
2. Remove: throttle cable housing 1 throttle grip 2
While removing the throttle cable housing,pull back the rubber cover 3 .
3. Remove: left handlebar grip 1
Blow compressed air between the handle-bar and the handlebar grip, and graduallypush the grip off the handlebar.
EB704400
CHECKING THE HANDLEBAR1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
Securely support the motorcycle so thatthere is no danger of it falling over.
2. Check: handlebar 1
Bends/cracks/damage Replace.
Do not attempt to straighten a bent han-dlebar as this may dangerously weakenit.
3. Install: handlebar grip
a. Apply a light coat of rubber adhesive ontothe left end of the handlebar.
b. Slide the handlebar grip over the left endof the handlebar.
c. Wipe off any excess rubber adhesive witha clean rag.
Do not touch the handlebar grip until therubber adhesive has fully dried.
7-51
HANDLEBAR CHAS
b
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
CAUTION:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB704701
INSTALLING THE HANDLEBAR1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
Securely support the motorcycle so thatthere is no danger of it falling over.
2. Install: handlebar 1 upper handlebar holders 2
First, tighten the bolts on the front sidea of the handlebar holder, then on therear side.
turn the handlebar all the way to the leftand right. If there is any contact with thefuel tank, adjust the handlebar posi-tion.
The upper handlebar holders should beinstalled with the arrows facing forward.
Align the match marks b on the handlebarwith the upper surface of the lower handle-bar holders.
3. Install: clutch lever holder handlebar grip 1 left grip end 2
There should be 1.0 mm of clearance a be-tween the handlebar grip and the left gripend.
4. Install: left handlebar switch 1
Align the projection a on the left handlebarswitch with the hole b in the handlebar.
5. Install: master cylinder bracket 1
Align the mating surfaces of the master cyl-inder bracket with the punch mark (right han-dlebar switch side) a on the handlebar.
7-52
HANDLEBAR CHAS
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
6. Install: throttle grip 1 throttle cable housing 2 throttle cables 3
Apply a thin coat of lithium soap basegrease onto the inside of the throttle grip andinstall it onto the handlebar.
Align the projection a on the throttle cablehousing with the hole b in the handlebar.
7. Install: right grip end right handlebar switch 1
Make sure that the throttle grip operatessmoothly.
Align the projection a on the right handle-bar switch with the hole b in the handle-bar.
8. Adjust: clutch cable free play
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE CLUTCHCABLE FREE PLAY” in chapter 3.
Clutch cable free play (at theend of the clutch lever)
10 15 mm
9. Adjust: throttle cable free play
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE THROTTLECABLE FREE PLAY” in chapter 3.
Throttle cable free play (at theflange of the throttle grip)
3 5 mm
7-53
110 Nm (11.0 mkg)
52 Nm (5.2 mkg)1st
18 Nm (1.8 mkg)2nd
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
12345678
Removing the lower bracketFront cowling
Fuel tankFront wheelFront forkHandle barMain switch lead couplerBrake hose joint/coverSteering stem nutUpper bracketLock washerRing nut (upper)Rubber washer 1Ring nut (lower)
11/1111111
Remove the parts in the order listed.Refer to “FRONT COWUNG/SEAT/SIDE COVER/FUEL TANK” section in chapter 3
Refer to “FRONT WHEEL” section.Refer to “FRONT FORK” section.Refer to “HANDLEBAR” section.
Disconnect the coupler.
Refer to “REMOVING THE LOWERBRACKET/INSTALLING THE STEER-ING HEAD” section.
NOTE:
STEERING HEAD CHAS
STEERING HEADLOWER BRACKET
7-54
110 Nm (11.0 mkg)
52 Nm (5.2 mkg)1st
18 Nm (1.8 mkg)2nd
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
910111213
Lower bracketBall race coverBall bearingRubber washer 1Ball bearing
11111
Refer to “INSTALLING THE STEERINGHEAD” section.
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
STEERING HEAD CHAS
7-55
STEERING HEAD CHAS
NOTE:
EB705102
REMOVING THE LOWER BRACKET1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
Securely support the motorcycle so thatthere is no danger of it falling over.
2. Remove: upper ring nut lower ring nut 1
Hold the lower ring nut with the exhaust andsteering nut wrench 2 , then remove the up-per ring nut with the ring nut wrench.
Exhaust and steering nutwrench
90890-01268
Securely support the lower bracket sothat there is no danger of it falling.
EB705401
CHECKING THE STEERING HEAD1. Wash: bearing balls bearing races
Recommended cleaning solventKerosine
2. Check: bearing 1 bearing race 2
Damage/pitting Replace.
3. Replace: bearing balls bearing races
a. Remove the bearing races from the steer-ing head pipe with a long rod 1 and ham-mer.
7-56
STEERING HEAD CHAS
4
3
2
1
CAUTION:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
b. Remove the bearing race from the lowerbracket with a floor chisel 2 and hammer.
c. Install a new dust seal and new bearingraces.
If the bearing race is not installed proper-ly, the steering head pipe could be dam-aged.
Always replace the bearing balls and bear-ing races as a set.
Whenever the steering head is disas-sembled, replace the dust seal.
4. Check: upper bracket lower bracket
(along with the steering stem)Bends/cracks/damage Replace.
EB705700
INSTALLING THE STEERING HEAD1. Lubricate: upper bearing lower bearing bearing races
Recommended lubricantLithium soap base grease
2. Install: lower ring nut 1 rubber washer 2 upper ring nut 3 lock washer 4
Refer to “CHECKING AND ADJUSTINGTHE STEERING HEAD” in chapter 3.
3. Install: upper bracket steering stem nut
Temporarily tighten the steering stem nut.
4. Install: front fork legs
Refer to “FRONT FORK”.
Temporarily tighten the upper and lowerbracket pinch bolts.
7-57
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
1234567
Removing the rear shock absorberassembly and relay armSide covers
Rear wheel
Self-locking nut/washerBoltSelf-locking nut/washerBoltSelf-locking nut/boltRear shock absorber assemblySelf-locking nut
1/11
1/11
1/111
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “FRONT COWLING/SEAT/SIDE COVER/FUEL TANK” section in chapter 3Refer to “REAR WHEEL, BRAKE DISKAND REAR WHEEL SPROCKET” section.
= 120 mm
= 40 mm
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THEREAR SHOCK ABSORBER” section.
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND RELAY ARM CHAS
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND RELAY ARM
7-58
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
89
10111213141516171819
BoltRelay armSelf-locking nut/washerBoltConnecting plateSpacerSpacerSpacerOil sealBearingBearingBearing
11
1/1121212211
= 80 mm
= 120 mm
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND RELAY ARM CHAS
7-59
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND RELAY ARM CHASEB706101
HANDLING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
This rear shock absorber contain highlycompressed nitrogen gas.Before handling the rear shock absorber,read and make sure you understand thefollowing information. The manufacturercannot be held responsible for propertydamage or personal injury that may re-sult from improper handling of the rearshock absorber. Do not tamper or attempt to open the
rear shock absorber. Do not subject the rear shock absorber
to an open flame or any other source ofhigh heat. High heat can cause an ex-plosion due to excessive gas pressure.
Do not deform or damage the rearshock absorber in any way. If the rearshock absorber, or both are damaged,damping performance will suffer.
EB706111
DISPOSING OF A REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
a. Gas pressure must be released beforedisposing of a rear shock absorber. To re-lease the gas pressure, drill a 2 3 mmhole through the gas cylinder at a point 15 20 mm from its end as shown 1 .
Wear eye protection to prevent eye dam-age from released gas or metal chips.
7-60
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND RELAY ARM CHAS
NOTE:
CAUTION:
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB706204
REMOVING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBERASSEMBLY
1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
Securely support the motorcycle so thatthere is no danger of it falling over.
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand sothat the rear wheel is elevated.
2. Disconnect: battery leads
(from the battery terminals)
First, disconnect the negative lead 1 ,then the positive lead 2 .
3. Remove: battery
4. Remove: side covers connecting plate bolt 1 rear shock absorber assembly lower bolt
2
While removing the rear shock absorber as-sembly lower bolt, hold the swingarm so thatit does not drop down.
5. Remove: rear shock absorber assembly upper bolt
1 rear shock absorber assembly
Raise the swingarm and then remove therear shock absorber assembly from be-tween the swingarm and relay arm.
7-61
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND RELAY ARM CHAS
NOTE:
CAUTION:
EB706401
CHECKING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBERASSEMBLY
1. Check: rear shock absorber rod
Bends/damage Replace the rear shockabsorber assembly.
rear shock absorberoil leaks Replace the rear shock absorb-er assembly.
springDamage/wear Replace the rear shockabsorber assembly.
bushingsDamage/wear Replace.
dust sealsDamage/wear Replace.
boltsBends/damage/wear Replace.
EB706701
INSTALLING THE REAR SHOCKABSORBER ASSEMBLY
1. Lubricate: spacers bearings
Recommended lubricantMolybdenum disulfide grease
2. Install: rear shock absorber assembly
Rear shock absorber assemblyupper nut
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)Rear shock absorber assemblylower nut
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)Relay-arm-to-frame-nut
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
When installing the rear shock absorberassembly, lift up the swingarm.
Install the connecting arm front bolt fromthe right.
3. Connect: battery leads
(to the battery terminals)
First, connect the positive lead 1 , thenthe negative lead 2 .
7-62
115 Nm (11.5 mkg)
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
7 Nm (0.7 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
123456789
Removing the swingarm and drivechainRear wheel
Rear shock absorber assemblyRelay armRear wheel sprocket
Drive chain guardBrake hose holderCaliper bracketCompression barDrive chain guidePivot shaftSwingarmDrive chainCover
121111112
Removing the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “REAR WHEEL, BRAKEDISC AND REAR WHEEL SPROCKET”section.Refer to “REAR SHOCK ABSORBERAND RELAY ARM” section.
Refer to “REMOVING THE ENGINE”section in chapter 4
SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN CHAS
SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN
7-63
115 Nm (11.5 mkg)
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
7 Nm (0.7 mkg)
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
101112
SpacerBearingWasher
122
For installation, reverse the removalprocedure.
SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN CHAS
7-64
A
B
SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN CHAS
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
EB707100
Before removing the drive sprocket, drivechain, and rear wheel, measure the drivechain slack and the length of a ten-link sec-tion of the drive chain.
EB707111
REMOVING THE SWINGARM1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
Securely support the motorcycle so thatthere is no danger of it falling over.
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand sothat the rear wheel is elevated.
2. Remove: side covers connecting plate bolt 1 rear shock absorber assembly lower bolt
2
When removing the rear shock absorber as-sembly lower bolt, hold the swingarm so thatit does not drop down.
3. Check: swingarm side play swingarm vertical movement
a. Check the tightening torque of the pivotshaft nut.
Pivot shaft nut115 Nm (11.5 mkg)
b. Check the swingarm side play A by mov-ing the swingarm from side to side.
c. If the swingarm side play is out of specifi-cation, check the spacers, bearings,washers, and dust covers.
Swingarm side play (at the endof the swingarm)
1 mm
d. Check the swingarm vertical movementB by moving the swingarm up and down.If swingarm vertical movement is notsmooth or if there is binding, check thespacers, bearings, washers, and dustcovers.
7-65
SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN CHASEB707400
CHECKING THE SWINGARM1. Check: swingarm
Bends/cracks/damage Replace.
2. Check: pivot shaft
Roll the pivot shaft on a flat surface.Bends Replace.
Do not attempt to straighten a bent pivotshaft.
3. Wash: pivot shaft dust covers spacer washers bearings
Recommended cleaning solventKerosine
4. Check: dust covers 1 spacer 2 washers 3 oil seals 4
Damage/wear Replace. bearings 5
Damage/pitting Replace.
5. Check: connecting arms 6 relay arm 7
Damage/wear Replace.
7-66
SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN CHAS
NOTE:
CAUTION:
EB707410
CHECKING THE DRIVE CHAIN1. Measure: ten-link section a of the drive chain
Out of specification Replace the drivechain.
Ten-link drive chain sectionlimit (maximum)
150 mm
While measuring the ten-link section, pushdown on the drive chain to increase its ten-sion.
Measure the length between drive chainroller 1 and 11 as shown.
Perform this measurement at two or threedifferent places.
2. Check: drive chain
Stiffness Clean and lubricate or replace.
3. Clean: drive chain
a. Wipe the drive chain with a clean cloth.b. Put the drive chain in kerosine and re-
move any remaining dirt.c. Remove the drive chain from the kerosine
and completely dry it.
This motorcycle has a drive chain withsmall rubber O-rings 1 between thedrive chain side plates. Never use high-pressure water or air, steam, gasoline,certain solvents (e.g., benzine), or acoarse brush to clean the drive chain.High-pressure methods could force dirtor water into the drive chain’s internals,and solvents will deteriorate the O-rings.A coarse brush can also damage the O-rings. Therefore, use only kerosine toclean the drive chain.
4. Check: O-rings 1
Damage Replace the drive chain. drive chain rollers 2
Damage/wear Replace the drive chain. drive chain side plates 3
Damage/wear Replace the drive chain.Cracks Replace the drive chain.
7-67
SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN CHAS
NOTE:
5. Lubricate: drive chain
Recommended lubricantEngine oil or chain lubricantsuitable for O-ring chains
6. Check: drive sprocket rear wheel sprocket
More than 1/4 tooth a wear Replacethe drive chain sprockets as a set.Bent teeth Replace the drive chainsprockets as a set.
b Correct1 Drive chain roller2 Drive chain sprocket
EB707700
INSTALLING THE SWINGARM1. Lubricate: bearings spacers dust covers pivot shaft
Recommended lubricantMolybdenum disulfide grease
2. Install: drive chain swingarm 1 relay arm 2 left connecting plate 3 right connecting plate 4
Swingarm pivot shaft nut115 Nm (11.5 mkg)
Relay arm nut48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
Connecting plate nut48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
Install the swingarm bolt 5 from the left.
3. Install: rear shock absorber assembly rear wheel
Refer to “INSTALLING THE REARSHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY” and“REAR WHEEL”.
7-68
SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN CHAS
70 Nm (7.0 mkg)
NOTE:
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
4. Adjust: drive chain slack
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE DRIVE CHAINSLACK” in chapter 3.
Drive chain slack30 45 mm
EB707710
INSTALLING THE DRIVE CHAIN1. Lubricate: drive chain
Recommended lubricantEngine oil or chain lubricantsuitable for O-ring chains
2. Install: drive chain 1 drive sprocket 2 washer 3 drive sprocket nut 4
While applying the rear brake, tighten thedrive sprocket nut.
Never install a new drive chain onto worndrive chain sprockets; this will dramati-cally shorten the drive chain’s life.
5. Adjust: drive chain slack
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE DRIVE CHAINSLACK” in chapter 3.
Drive chain slack30 45 mm
A drive chain that is too tight will over-load the engine and other vital parts, andone that is too loose can skip and dam-age the swingarm or cause an accident.Therefore, keep the drive chain slackwithin the specified limits.
ELEC
8– +
ELEC
CHAPTER 8ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 8-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 8-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING SWITCHES 8-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING STEPS 8-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SWITCH CONNECTION AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL 8-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SWITCH POSITION AND TERMINAL CONNECTION 8-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IGNITION SYSTEM 8-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 8-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TROUBLESHOOTING 8-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM 8-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 8-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STARTING CIRCUIT OPERATION 8-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TROUBLESHOOTING 8-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STARTER MOTOR 8-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING THE STARTER MOTOR 8-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHARGING SYSTEM 8-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 8-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TROUBLESHOOTING 8-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIGHTING SYSTEM 8-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 8-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TROUBLESHOOTING 8-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIGHTING SYSTEM CHECK 8-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIGNAL SYSTEM 8-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 8-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TROUBLESHOOTING 8-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIGNAL SYSTEM CHECK 8-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COOLING SYSTEM 8-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 8-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TROUBLESHOOTING 8-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FUEL PUMP SYSTEM 8-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 8-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT OPERATION 8-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TROUBLESHOOTING 8-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FUEL PUMP TEST 8-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELF-DIAGNOSIS 8-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TROUBLESHOOTING 8-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELEC
8-1
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ELEC
13 Rectifier /Regulator14 Thermo switch (warning light)15 Thermo switch (fan motor)16 Horn17 Diode
7 Starting circuit cut-off relay8 Flasher relay9 Sidestand switch10 Neutral switch11 Oil level gauge12 Ignition coil
1 Main switch2 Fuel sender3 Rear brake switch4 Battery5 Ignitor unit6 Starter relay
EB800000
ELECTRICALELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
8-2
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ELEC
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
8-3
1 A.C. magneto2 Rectifier regulator3 Main switch4 Battery5 Fuse (back up)6 Fuse (main)7 Starter relay8 Starter motor9 Starting circuit cut-off relay10 Fuel pump relay11 Ignitor unit12 Ignition coil13 Spark plug14 Pickup coil15 Throttle position sensor16 Neutral switch17 Speed sensor18 Fuel sender19 Thermo switch (warning light)20 Diode21 Fuel pump22 Sidestand switch23 Speedometer24 Tachometer25 Fuel meter26 Fuel level warning light27 Engine temperature warning light28 Neutral indicator light29 Oil level warning light
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ELEC
30 High beam indicator light31 Turn indicator lights32 Meter lights33 Clutch switch34 Oil level switch35 Flasher relay36 Horn37 Pass switch38 Dimmer switch39 Horn switch40 Turn switch41 Front turn signal lights42 Rear turn signal lights43 Head light44 Tail /Brake light45 Auxiliary light46 Fan motor47 Thermo switch (fan motor)48 Fuse (fan)49 Fuse (head)50 Rear brake switch51 Fuse (signal)52 Front brake switch53 Lights switch54 Engine stop switch55 Starter switch56 Fuse (ignition)57 Alarm (option)
NOTE:
B Black
Br Brown
Ch Chocolate
Dg Dark green
G Green
L Blue
Lg Light green
O Orange
Sb Sky blue
P Pink
R Red
Y Yellow
W White
B/L Black/Blue
B/R Black/Red
B/Y Black/Yellow
Br/L Brown/Blue
Br/W Brown/White
G/R Green/Red
G/W Green/White
G/Y Green/Yellow
L/B Blue/Black
L/Y Blue/Yellow
L/W Blue/White
L/R Blue/Red
R/B Red/Black
R/Y Red/Yellow
R/W Red/White
Y/B Yellow/Black
Y/R Yellow/White
W/B White/Black
W/G White/Green
Starter switch is closed while the button (switch) is pushed. Sidestand switch is closed while the side stand is upped. Clutch switch is closed while the clutch lever is pulled. Brake switch is closed while the brake is applied.
COLOR CODE
8-4
CHECKING SWITCHES ELEC
NOTE:
YP-N
CHECKING SWITCHESCHECKING STEPSUsing pocket tester, check switches for continu-ity between their terminals to determine whetherthey are correctly connected.Replace the switch component if any of the com-binations does not produce the correct reading.
Pocket tester:90890-03112
Turn the switch to the “ON”, “OFF”positions several times.
Adjust the pocket tester to correct “0”position before checking switches.
Set the pocket tester selector to “1” Ω.
SWITCH CONNECTION AS SHOWN IN THISMANUALThis manual contains connection charts, like theone shown on the left, showing the terminal con-nections of switches (e.g. the main switch, han-dlebar switch, brake switch, lighting switch etc.)
The column on the extreme left indicates the dif-ferent switch positions, the top line indicates thecolors of the leads connected to the terminals onthe switch.
“ ” indicates terminals between whichthere is continuity, i.e. a closed circuit, in thegiven switch position.
In this chart:“Br and R” have continuity with the switch in the“ON” position.
8-5
Before checking a switch refer to the checkingswitches as shown in the left page and checkfor the correct terminal connections (closedcircuit) according to the color combinationsshown in the chart.Poor connection, fault Repair or replace.
* indicates coupler positions.
CHECKING SWITCHES ELECYP******
SWITCH POSITION AND TERMINAL CONNECTION
8-6
Fus
e (m
ain)
3 4 622
11
12 13 14 16 5654
Mai
n sw
itch
Bat
tery
Sid
esta
nd s
witc
h
Igni
tor
unit
Igni
tion
coil
Spa
rk p
lug
Pic
kup
coil
Neu
tral
sw
itch
Fus
e (ig
nitio
n)E
ng
ine
sto
p s
wit
ch
IGNITION SYSTEM ELECEB802000
IGNITION SYSTEMCIRCUIT DIAGRAM
8-7
IGNITION SYSTEM ELEC
NOTE:
EB802011
1. Fuses (main and ignition)
Remove the fuses. Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) to the
fuses. Check the fuses for continuity. Replace the fuses.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
Open-circuit voltage:12.8 V or more at 20 C
EB802012
2. Battery
Check the battery condition.Refer to “BATTERY INSPECTION” inCHAPTER 3.
Clean the battery terminals. Recharge or replace the battery.
CORRECT
INCORRECT
EB802010
TROUBLESHOOTING
IF THE IGNITION SYSTEM FAILS TO OPERATE (NO SPARK OR INTERMITTENT SPARK):
ProcedureCheck:
1. Fuses (main and ignition)2. Battery3. Spark plugs4. Ignition spark gap5. Spark plug cap resistance6. Ignition coil resistance7. Main switch
8. Engine stop switch9. Neutral switch
10. SIdestand switch11. Diode (starting circuit cut-off relay)12. Pickup coil resistance13. Wiring connection (the entire ignition
system)
Remove the following part(s) before trouble-shooting:
1) Seat2) Fuel tank3) Side cover (left) Use the following special tool(s) for trouble-
shooting.
Ignition checker:90890-06754
Pocket tester:90890-03112
8-8
EB802013
3. Spark plugs
Check the spark plug condition. Check the spark plug type. Check the spark plug gap.
Refer to “SPARK LUG INSPECTION” inCHAPTER 3.
Standard spark plug:CR9E, CR8E/U27ESR-N, U24ESR-NNGK/NIPPONDENSO
Spark plug gap:0.7 0.8 mm
CORRECT
INCORRECT
EB802014
4. Ignition spark gap
Disconnect the spark plug cap from thespark plug.
Connect the ignition checker as shown. Spark plug cap
Turn the main switch to “ON”.
1
Check the ignition spark gap . Crank the engine by pushing the starter
switch, and increase the spark gap until amisfire occurs.
The ignition system is not faulty.Minimum spark gap:6.0 mm
OUT OFSPECIFICATIONOR NO SPARK
MEETS SPECIFICATIONa
Repair or replace the spark plugs.
2
IGNITION SYSTEM ELEC
8-9
EB802015
5. Spark plug cap resistance
Remove the spark plug cap. Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1k) to the
spark plug cap.
Check if the spark plug cap has the speci-fied resistance.
Replace the spark plug cap.
Spark plug cap resistance:10 kΩ at 20C
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
6. Ignition coil resistance
Disconnect the ignition coil connector fromthe wire harness.
Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) to theignition coil.
Check if the secondary coil has the speci-fied resistance.
Replace the ignition coil.
Secondary coil resistance:12 18 kΩ at 20C
BOTH MEETSPECIFICATION
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
Check if the primary coil has the specifiedresistance.
Primary coil resistance:1.87 2.53 Ω at 20C
MEETSSPECIFICATION
EB802016
Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1k) to theignition coil.
Tester (+) lead Red/Black terminalTester (–) lead Orange (Gray) terminal
Tester (+) lead spark plug leadTester (–) lead spark plug lead
12
IGNITION SYSTEM ELEC
8-10
EB802017
7. Main switch
Disconnect the main switch couplers fromthe wire harness.
Check for continuity as follows:Red – Brown/Blue
Replace the main switch.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
1
EB802018
8. Engine stop switch
Disconnect the right handlebar switch cou-pler from the wire harness.
Check for continuity as follows:Red/White – Red/Black
Replace the right handlebar switch.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
1
EB802019
9. Neutral switch
Disconnect the neutral switch/ lead from theneutral switch.
Check for continuity as follows:Neutral switch terminal – Ground1
2
2
IGNITION SYSTEM ELEC
8-11
Replace the main switch.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
EB80201A
10. Sidestand switch
Disconnect the sidestand switch couplerfrom the wire harness.
Check for continuity as follows:Black – Black
Replace the sidestand switch.
NO CONTINUITY
1 2
CONTINUITY
11. Diode (starting circuit cut-off relay unit)
Remove the relay unit from the wire har-ness.
Check for continuity as follows:Blue/Yellow – Light green1 2
IGNITION SYSTEM ELEC
8-12
Tester lead Blue/YellowTester lead Light green
Replace the relay unit.CORRECT
INCORRECT1
Tester (+) lead Yellow terminalTester (–) lead Blue terminal
EB80201C
12. Pickup coil resistance
Disconnect the pickup coil coupler from thewire harness.
Connect the pocket tester (Ω 100) to thepickup coil terminal.
1
Check if the pickup coil has the specified re-sistance.
Replace the pickup coil.
Pickup coil resistance:189 231 Ω at 20C(Yellow – Blue)
MEETSSPECIFICATIONS
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
EB80201D
13. Wiring connection
Check the connections of the entire ignitionsystem.Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
Properly connect the ignition system.
CORRECT
POOR CONNECTION
Replace the ignitor unit.
Tester lead Blue/YellowTester lead Light green
Continuity
NoContinuity
2
12
2
IGNITION SYSTEM ELEC
8-13
5416 22 33 55 56
Eng
ine
stop
sw
itch
Sta
rter
mot
orS
tart
ing
circ
uit c
ut-o
ff re
lay
Neu
tral
sw
itch
Sid
esta
nd s
witc
hC
lutc
h sw
itch
Sta
rt s
witc
hFu
se (
ign
itio
n)
8 9
Fus
e (m
ain)
3 4 6
Mai
n sw
itch
Bat
tery
Sta
rter
rel
ay7
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM ELECEB803000
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEMCIRCUIT DIAGRAM
8-14
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM ELECEB803010
STARTING CIRCUIT OPERATIONThe starting circuit on this model consists of thestarter motor, starter relay, and the starting cir-cuit cut-off relay. If the engine stop switch is on“RUN” and the main switch is on “ON” (bothswitches are closed), the starter motor can op-erate only if.
The transmission is in neutral (the neutralswitch is closed).
or if
The clutch lever is pulled to the handlebar(the clutch switch is closed) and the side-stand is up (the sidestand switch is closed).
The starting circuit cut-off relay prevents thestarter from operating when neither of theseconditions have been met. In this instance, thestarting circuit cut-off relay is open so currentcannot reach the starter motor.
When at least one of the above conditions havebeen met however, the starting circuit cut-offrelay is closed, and the engine can be started bypressing the starter switch.
WHEN THE TRANSMISSION IS INNEUTRAL
WHEN THE SIDESTAND IS UP ANDTHE CLUTCH LEVER IS PULLED IN
1 Battery2 Fuse (main)3 Main switch4 Fuse (ignition)5 Engine stop switch6 Starting circuit cut-off relay7 Diode8 Clutch switch9 Sidestand switch10 Neutral switch11 Start switch12 Starter relay13 Starter motor
8-15
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM ELEC
NOTE:
EB802011
1. Fuses (main and ignition)
Remove the fuses. Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) to the
fuses. Check the fuses for continuity. Replace the fuses.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
Open-circuit voltage:12.8 V or more at 20 C
EB802012
2. Battery
Check the battery condition.Refer to “BATTERY INSPECTION” inCHAPTER 3.
Clean the battery terminals. Recharge or replace the battery.
CORRECT
INCORRECT
EB803020
TROUBLESHOOTING
IF THE STARTER MOTOR FAILS TO OPERATE:
ProcedureCheck:
1. Fuses (main and ignition)2. Battery3. Starter motor4. Starting circuit cut-off relay5. Starter relay6. Main switch7. Engine stop switch
8. Neutral switch9. Sidestand switch
10. Clutch switch11. Start switch12. Diode (starting circuit cut-off relay)13. Wiring connection (the entire starting
system)
Remove the following part(s) before trouble-shooting:
1) Seat2) Fuel tank3) Side cover (left) Use the following special tool(s) for trouble-
shooting.
Pocket tester:90890-03112
8-16
A wire that is used as a jumper lead musthave the equivalent capacity or more asthat of the battery lead, otherwise thejumper lead may burn.
This check is likely to reduce sparks, so besure that no flammable gas or fluid is in thevicinity.
EB803021
3. Starter motor
Connect the battery positive terminal andstarter motor cable using a jumper lead
. Check the operation of the starter motor.
Repair or replace the starter motor.
MOVES
DOES NOT MOVE
1
Battery (+) terminal
Red/Black terminal Battery (–) terminal
Black/Yellow terminal
EB803023
4. Starting circuit cut-off relay (relay unit)
Remove the relay unit from the wire har-ness.
Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) and bat-tery (12 V) to the relay unit terminals.
Check the starting circuit cut-off relay forcontinuity.
Replace the starting circuit cut-off relay.CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
Tester (+) lead Blue/White terminalTester (–) lead Black terminal
23
1
2
34
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM ELEC
8-17
EB803024
5. Starter relay
Disconnect the relay unit coupler from thewire harness.
Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) and bat-tery (12 V) to the relay unit coupler termi-nals.
Replace the starter relay.
NO CONTINUITY
CONTINUITY
EB802017
6. Main switch
Disconnect the main switch couplers fromthe wire harness.
Check for continuity as follows:Red – Brown/Blue
Replace the main switch.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
1 2
Battery (+) terminal
Red/White terminal Battery (–) terminal
Blue/White terminal
3
4
Tester (+) lead Red terminalTester (–) lead Black terminal
34
Check the starter relay for continuity.
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM ELEC
8-18
EB802018
7.Engine stop switch
Disconnect the right handlebar switch cou-pler from the wire harness.
Check for continuity as follows:Red/White – Red/White
Replace the right handlebar switch.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
1
EB802019
8. Neutral switch
Disconnect the neutral switch/ lead from theneutral switch.
Check for continuity as follows:Neutral switch terminal – Ground
Replace the neutral switch.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
1
2
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM ELEC
8-19
EB80201A
9. Sidestand switch
Disconnect the sidestand switch couplerfrom the wire harness.
Check for continuity as follows:Black – Black
Replace the sidestand switch.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
1
EB803025
10. Clutch switch
Disconnect the clutch switch coupler fromthe wire harness.
Check for continuity as follows:Black/Yellow – Blue/Yellow
Replace the clutch switch.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
1
2
2
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM ELEC
8-20
EB803027
11. Start switch
Disconnect the right handlebar switch cou-pler from the wire harness.
Check for continuity as follows:Blue/White – Black
Replace the right handlebar switch.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
1
EB803026
12. Diode (starting circuit cut-off relay)
Remove the relay unit from the wire har-ness.
Check for continuity as follows:Black/Yellow – Light green
Replace the relay unit.
CORRECT
INCORRECT
1
2
2
Tester (+) lead Black/YellowTester (–) lead Light green
1
Tester (+) lead Light greenTester (–) lead Black/Yellow
Continuity
NoContinuity
2
12
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM ELEC
8-21
EB803028
13. Wiring connection
Check the connections of the entire startingsystem.Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
Properly connect the starting system.
POOR CONNECTION
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM ELEC
8-22
Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks
12
Starter motor removalStarter motorStarter motor lead
Starter motor disassemblyFront bracketWashersRear bracketShimsBrush holder/BrushArmature ass’y
11
1121
1/11
Remove the parts in order.
Reverse the removal procedure forinstallation.
Disassembly the parts in order.
Reverse the disassembly procedure forassembly.
123456
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM ELECEB803030
STARTER MOTOR
8-23
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM ELEC
CHECKING THE STARTER MOTOR1. Measure: Brush length a
Out of specification Replace.
Brush length wear limit:4 mm
2. Measure: Brush spring force
Fatigue/out of specification Replace asa set.
Brush spring force:780 1,020 g
3. Inspect: Commutator
Dirty Clean it with #600 grit sandpaper.
4. Inspect: Armature coil resistances (insulation/con-
tinuity)Defects Replace the starter motor.
Inspection steps: Connect the pocket tester for the continuity
1 and insulation 2 checks. Measure the armature coil resistances.
Armature coil continuityresistance 1 :
0.0015 0.0025 Ω at 20CArmature coil insulationresistance 2 :
More than 1 M Ω at 20C
If the resistance is incorrect, replace thestarter motor.
8-24
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM ELEC
NOTE:
5. Measure: Commutator diameter a
Out of specification Replace the startermotor.
Commutator wear limit:27 mm
6. Measure: Mica undercut a
Out of specification Scrape the mica tothe proper measurement using a hacksawblade which has been grounded to fit thecommutator.
Mica undercut:0.7 mm
The mica insulation of the commutator mustbe undercut to ensure proper operation ofthe commutator.
8-25
Bat
tery
1 2 4
AC
mag
neto
Rec
tifie
r/re
gula
tor
Fus
e (m
ain)
6
CHARGING SYSTEM ELECEB804000
CHARGING SYSTEMCIRCUIT DIAGRAM
8-26
CHARGING SYSTEM ELEC
NOTE:
EB802011
1. Fuses (main)
Remove the fuses. Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) to the
fuses. Check the fuses for continuity. Replace the fuses.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
Open-circuit voltage:12.8 V or more at 20 C
EB802012
2. Battery
Check the battery condition.Refer to “BATTERY INSPECTION” inCHAPTER 3.
Clean the battery terminals. Recharge or replace the battery.
CORRECT
INCORRECT
EB803020
TROUBLESHOOTING
IF THE BATTERY IS NOT CHARGED:
ProcedureCheck:
1. Fuse (main)2. Battery3. Charging voltage
4. Stator coil resistance5. Wiring connections (the entire charging
system)
Remove the following part(s) before trouble-shooting:
1) Seat2) Side cover (left) Use the following special tool(s) for trouble-
shooting.
Engine tachometer:90890-03113
Pocket tester:90890-03112
8-27
Stator coil resistance:0.36 0.44 Ω at 20C
EB804011
3. Charging voltage
Connect the engine tachometer to the sparkplug lead.
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to thebattery.
The charging circuit is not faulty.
Charging voltage = measuredvoltage-terminal voltage:
0.2 2.5 V up
OUT OFSPECIFICATION
MEETS SPECIFICATION
EB804012
4. Stator coil resistance
Remove the generator cover. Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) to the
stator coils.
Replace the stator coil assembly.BOTH MEETSPECIFICATION
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
Tester (+) lead White terminalTester (–) lead White terminal
Tester (+) lead White terminalTester (–) lead White terminal
Measure the stator coil resistance.
Tester (+) lead Battery (+) terminalTester (–) lead Battery (–) terminal
Measure the battery terminal voltage. Start the engine and accelerate to about
5,000 r/min. Check the terminal voltage.
12
13
NOTE:Use a fully charged battery.
1
CHARGING SYSTEM ELEC
8-28
CHARGING SYSTEM ELEC
EB804015
5. Wiring connections
Check the connections of the entire charg-ing system.Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
Properly connect the charging system.
POOR CONNECTION
Replace the rectifier/regulator.
CORRECT
8-29
3 4
38
30 32
37 43 44M
ain
switc
hB
atte
ry
Dim
mer
sw
itch
Hig
h be
am in
dica
tor
light
Met
er li
ght
Pas
s sw
itch
Hea
dlig
htTa
il/b
rake
lig
ht
4945 53F
use
(hea
d)A
uxili
ary
light
Ligh
ts s
witc
h
6F
use
(mai
n)
LIGHTING SYSTEM ELECEB805000
LIGHTING SYSTEMCIRCUIT DIAGRAM
8-30
LIGHTING SYSTEM ELEC
NOTE:
EB802011
1. Fuses (main and head)
Remove the fuses. Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) to the
fuses. Check the fuses for continuity. Replace the fuses.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
Open-circuit voltage:12.8 V or more at 20 C
EB802012
2. Battery
Check the battery condition.Refer to “BATTERY INSPECTION” inCHAPTER 3.
Clean the battery terminals. Recharge or replace the battery.
CORRECT
INCORRECT
EB803020
TROUBLESHOOTING
IF THE HEADLIGHT, HIGH BEAM INDICATOR LIGHTS, TAILLIGHT, AUXILIARY LIGHTAND/OR METER LIGHT FAIL TO COME ON:
ProcedureCheck:
1. Fuses (main and head)2. Battery3. Main switch4. Lights switch (for Europe)
5. Dimmer switch6. Pass switch (for Europe and Australia)7. Wiring connections (the entire lighting
system)
Remove the following part(s) before trouble-shooting:
1) Seat2) Fuel tank3) Side cover (left)4) Front cowling assembly Use the following special tool(s) for trouble-
shooting.
Pocket tester:90890-03112
8-31
Disconnect the right handlebar switch cou-pler from the wire harness.
Turn the lights switch to “ON” or “PO”. Check for continuity as follows:
Red/Yellow – Blue Turn the lights switch to “ON”. Check for continuity as follows:
Red/Yellow – BlueRed/Yellow – Blue/Black1
1 2
1 2
1 221
EB802017
3. Main switch
Disconnect the main switch couplers fromthe wire harness.
Check for continuity as follows:Red – Brown/BlueBlue/Red – Blue
Replace the main switch.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
EB805011
The lights switch is faulty. Replace the righthandlebar switch.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
4. Lights switch
2
LIGHTING SYSTEM ELEC
8-32
5. Dimmer switch
Disconnect the left handlebar switch cou-plers from the wire harness.
Turn the dimmer switch to “HI”. Check for continuity as follows:
Blue/Black – Yellow
The dimmer switch is faulty.Replace the left handlebar switch.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY1
EB805012
6. Pass switch
Disconnect the left handlebar switch cou-pler from the wire harness.
Turn the pass switch to “ON”. Check for continuity as follows:
Red/Yellow – Yellow
The pass switch is faulty. Replace the lefthandlebar switch.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
2
2
EB805013
7. Wiring connections
Check the connections of the entire lightingsystem.Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”. Properly connect the lighting system.
CORRECT
POOR CONNECTION
Check the condition of each of the lightingsystem’s circuits.Refer to “LIGHTING SYSTEM CHECK”.
1
LIGHTING SYSTEM ELEC
8-33
LIGHTING SYSTEM ELEC
B
1. Bulb and bulb socket.
Check the bulb and bulb socket for continu-ity.
Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
When the dimmer switch is on “LO”.When the dimmer switch is ON “HI”.
2. Voltage
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to theheadlight and high beam indicator light cou-plers.
Headlight:Tester (+) lead
Black/Yellow lead orBlack/Blue lead
Tester (–) lead Black leadHigh beam indicator light:
Tester (+) lead Yellow leadTester (–) lead Black lead
1
Turn the main switch to “ON”. Turn the light switch to “ON”. Turn the dimmer switch to “LO” or “HI”. Check the voltage (12 V) of the “Black/Yel-
low”, “Black/Blue” and “Yellow” leads on thebulb socket connector. The wiring circuit from the main switch to the
bulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.MEETSSPECIFICATION
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
This circuit is not faulty.
Headlight connector
23
45
Meter connector
AB
EB805020
LIGHTING SYSTEM CHECK1. If the headlight and the high beam indicator
light fail to come on:
8-34
LIGHTING SYSTEM ELEC
1
1. Bulb and bulb socket
Check the bulb and bulb socket for continu-ity.
Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
Tester (+) lead Blue terminalTester (–) lead Black terminal
2. Voltage
Connect the pocket tester (20 V) to the bulbsocket coupler.
Turn the main switch to “ON”. Turn the light switch to “ON” or “PO”. Check the voltage (12 V) of the “blue” lead
on the bulb socket connector.
The wiring circuit from the main switch to thebulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.
MEETSSPECIFICATION
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
The circuit is not faulty.
2
2
1
1. Bulb and bulb socket
Check the bulb and bulb socket for continu-ity.
Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
Tester (+) lead Blue terminalTester (–) lead Black terminal
2. Voltage
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to thebulb socket connector.
12
EB805021
2. If the meter light fails to come on:
EB805022
3. If the taillight fails to come on:
8-35
LIGHTING SYSTEM ELEC
Turn the main switch to “ON”. Turn the lights switch to “ON” or “PO”. Check the voltage (12 V) of the “Blue” lead
on the bulb socket connector.
The wiring circuit from the main switch to thebulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.
MEETSSPECIFICATION
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
This circuit is not faulty.
1
1. Bulb and bulb socket
Check the bulb and bulb socket for continu-ity.
Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
Tester (+) lead Blue/Red terminalTester (–) lead Black terminal
2. Voltage
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to thebulb socket connector.
Turn the main switch is “ON”. Turn the lights switch to “ON” or “PO”. Check the voltage (12 V) of the “Blue/Red”
lead on the bulb socket connector.
The wiring circuit from the main switch to thebulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.
MEETSSPECIFICATION
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
This circuit is not faulty.
2
EB805023
4. If the auxiliary light fails to come on:
8-36
SIGNAL SYSTEM ELECEB806000
SIGNAL SYSTEMCIRCUIT DIAGRAM
8-37
3 Main switch4 Battery6 Fuse (main)16 Neutral switch18 Fuel sender20 Diode25 Fuel meter26 Fuel level warning light28 Neutral indicator light29 Oil level warning light31 Turn indicator light34 Oil level switch35 Flasher relay36 Horn39 Horn switch40 Turn switch41 Front turn signal light42 Rear turn signal light44 Tail /brake light50 Rear brake switch51 Fuse (signal)52 Front brake switch55 Start switch
SIGNAL SYSTEM ELEC
8-38
SIGNAL SYSTEM ELEC
NOTE:
EB802011
1. Fuses (main and signal)
Remove the fuses. Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) to the
fuses. Check the fuses for continuity. Replace the fuses.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
Open-circuit voltage:12.8 V or more at 20 C
EB802012
2. Battery
Check the battery condition.Refer to “BATTERY INSPECTION” inCHAPTER 3.
Clean the battery terminals. Recharge or replace the battery.
CORRECT
INCORRECT
B806010
TROUBLESHOOTING
IF THE TURN SIGNAL LIGHT, BRAKE LIGHT AND/OR INDICATOR LIGHT FAIL TO COME ON:IF THE HORN FAILS TO SOUND:
ProcedureCheck:
1. Fuses (main and signal)2. Battery3. Main switch4. Wiring connection (the entire signal system)
Remove the following part(s) before trouble-shooting:
1) Seat2) Fuel tank3) Side covers (left and right)4) Front cowling assembly Use the following special tool8s) for trouble-
shooting.
Pocket tester:90890-03112
8-39
EB802017
3. Main switch
Disconnect the main switch coupler fromthe wire harness.
Check for continuity as follows:Red – Brown/Blue
Replace the main switch.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
2
EB806011
4. Wiring connections
Check the connections of the entire signalsystem.Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”. Properly connect the signal system.
CORRECT
POOR CONNECTION
Check the condition of each of the signal sys-tem’s circuits.Refer to “SIGNAL SYSTEM CHECK”.
1
SIGNAL SYSTEM ELEC
8-40
SIGNAL SYSTEM ELEC
1
Disconnect the left handlebar switch cou-pler from the wire harness.
Disconnect the “Black/White” lead at thehorn terminal.
Check for continuity as follows:Pink – Black
Replace the left handlebar switch.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
Tester (+) lead Brown leadTester (–) lead Frame ground
2. Voltage
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to thehorn lead.
Turn the main switch to “ON”. Check the voltage (12 V) of the “Brown” lead
at the horn terminal.
The wiring circuit from the main switch to thehorn terminal is faulty, repair it.
MEETSSPECIFICATION
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
1. Horn switch
3. Horn
Disconnect the “Pink” lead at the horn termi-nal.
Connect a jumper lead to the horn termi-nal and ground the jumper lead.
Turn the main switch to “ON”.
1
1 2
EB806020
SIGNAL SYSTEM CHECK1. If the horn fails to sound:
8-41
1
The horn is not faulty.
HORN DOESNOT SOUND
HORN SOUNDS
Tester (+) lead Brown leadTester (–) lead Pink
4. Voltage
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to thehorn at the “Pink” terminal.
Turn the main switch to “ON”. Check the voltage (12 V) of the “Pink” lead
at the horn terminal.
Replace the horn.MEETSSPECIFICATION
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
Adjust or replace the horn.
SIGNAL SYSTEM ELEC
1. Bulb and bulb socket
Check the bulb and bulb socket for continu-ity.
Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
EB806022
2. If the brake light fails to come on:
8-42
BA
1
Replace the brake switch.CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
Tester (+) lead Yellow terminalTester (–) lead Black terminal
3. Voltage
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to thebulb socket connector.
Turn the main switch to “ON”. The brake lever is pulled in or the brake ped-
al is pressed down. Check the voltage (12 V) of the “Yellow” lead
on the bulb socket connector.The wiring circuit from the main switch to thebulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.MEETS
SPECIFICATION
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
This circuit is not faulty.
2. Brake switch
Disconnect the front brake switch leads. Disconnect the rear brake switch coupler
from the wire harness. Check for continuity as follows:
Brown – Green/YellowBlack – Black
1
2
Front brake switchRear brake switch
AB
3 4
2
SIGNAL SYSTEM ELEC
8-43
SIGNAL SYSTEM ELEC
Tester (+) lead Brown terminalTester (–) lead Frame ground
1
1. Bulb and bulb socket
Check the bulb and bulb socket for continu-ity.
Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
3. Voltage
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to theflasher relay coupler.
Turn the main switch to “ON”. Check the voltage (12 V) of the “Brown”
lead at the flasher relay terminal.
The wiring circuit from the main switch to theflasher relay connector is faulty, repair it.
MEETSSPECIFICATION
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
2. Turn switch
Disconnect the left handlebar switch cou-plers from the wire harness.
Check for continuity as follows:Brown/White – ChocolateBrown/White – Dark green
Replace the left handlebar switch.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
3121
1
EB806023
3. If the turn signal light and/or turn indicatorlight fails to blink:
8-44
A B
Turn the main switch to “ON”. Turn the turn switch to “L” or “R”. Check the voltage (12 V) on the
“Brown/White” lead at the flasher relayterminal.
The flasher relay is faulty, replace it.MEETSSPECIFICATION
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
At the flasher light (left):Tester (+) lead Chocolate leadTester (–) lead Frame ground
5. Voltage
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to thebulb socket connector.
Turn the main switch to “ON”. Turn the turn switch to “L” or “R”. Check the voltage (12 V) of the “Chocolate”
lead or “Dark green” lead on the bulb socketconnector.
The wiring circuit from the turn switch to thebulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.MEETS
SPECIFICATION
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
This circuit is not faulty.
1
Tester (+) lead Brown/White terminal
Tester (–) lead Frame ground
4. Voltage
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to theflasher relay coupler.
1
At the flasher light (right):Tester (+) lead Dark green leadTester (–) lead Frame ground
2
Flasher lightTurn indicator light
1
B
A
21
SIGNAL SYSTEM ELEC
8-45
SIGNAL SYSTEM ELEC
1 2
1
1. Bulb and bulb socket
Check the bulb and bulb socket for continu-ity.
Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
3. Diode
Remove the diode from the wire harness. Check for continuity as follows:
Sky blue – Light green
Replace the diode.
CORRECT
INCORRECT
2. Neutral switch
Disconnect the neutral switch lead from theneutral switch.
Check for continuity as follows:Neutral switch terminal – Ground
Replace the neutral switch.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
Tester (+) lead Sky blueTester (–) lead Light green
1
Tester (+) lead Light greenTester (–) lead Sky blue
Continuity
NoContinuity
2
12
EB806024
4. If the neutral indicator light fails to come on:
8-46
Tester (+) lead Brown terminalTester (–) lead Frame ground
4. Voltage
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to thebulb socket coupler.
Turn the main switch to “ON”. Check the voltage (12 V).
The wiring circuit from the main switch to thebulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.
MEETSSPECIFICATION
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
This circuit is not faulty.
1
1
SIGNAL SYSTEM ELEC
12
Tester (+) terminal
Black/Red terminalTester (–) terminal White/Black
8 Ω at 20C
MEETSSPECIFICATION
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
Replace the starting circuit cut-off relay.
1. Bulb and bulb socket
Check the bulb and bulb socket for continu-ity.
Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
2. Starting circuit cut-off relay
Disconnect the starting circuit cut-off relaycoupler from the wire harness.
Connect the pocket tester (Ω 100) to thestarting circuit cut-off relay coupler termi-nals.
Check the resistor for the specified resis-tance.
EB806025
5. If the oil level warning light fails to come on:
8-47
Tester (+) lead Black/Red terminalTester (–) lead Frame ground
3. Oil level switch
Drain the engine oil and remove the oil levelswitch from the oil pan.
Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) to the oillevel switch.
Check the oil level switch for continuity.
Replace the oil level switch.
NO CONTINUITY
1
4. Diode (starting circuit cut-off relay)
Remove the relay unit from the wire har-ness.
Check for continuity as follows:White/Black – Black
Replace the relay unit.
CORRECT
INCORRECT
CONTINUITY
21
Tester (+) lead White/BlackTester (–) lead Black
1
Tester (+) lead BlackTester (–) lead White/Black
Continuity
NoContinuity
2
12
SIGNAL SYSTEM ELEC
8-48
2Tester (+) lead Brown leadTester (–) lead Black/Red lead
6. Voltage
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to thebulb socket connector.
Turn the main switch to “ON”. Check the voltage (12 V).
The wiring circuit from the main switch to thebulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.
MEETSSPECIFICATION
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
This circuit is not faulty.
1
5. Start switch
Disconnect the right handlebar switch cou-pler from the wire harness.
Check for continuity as follows:Blue/White – Black
Replace the right handlebar switch.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
21
1
2
SIGNAL SYSTEM ELEC
8-49
SIGNAL SYSTEM ELEC
Fuel sender resistance : 4 10 Ω at 20C : 90 100 Ω at 20C
Tester (+) lead Green/Red terminalTester (–) lead Black terminal
1. Bulb and bulb socket
Check the bulb and bulb socket for continu-ity.
Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
2. Fuel sender
Drain the fuel and remove the fuel senderfrom the fuel tank.
Disconnect the fuel sender coupler from thewire harness.
Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) to thefuel sender.
12
MEETSSPECIFICATION
3. Fuel meter
Drain the fuel and remove the fuel senderfrom the fuel tank.
Connect the fuel sender to wireharness. Move the float to “UP” or “DOWN” .
Replace the fuel sender.
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
Replace the fuel meter.
DOES NOT MOVE
13
Tester (+) lead Green terminalTester (–) lead Black terminal
Measure the fuel sender resistance.
4
Turn the main switch to “ON”. Check the fuel gauge needle moves “F” or
“E”.
23
Check the fuel sender for continuity. Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) to the
fuel sender.
5
1 2
NOTE:Before reading the meter, stay put the float formore than three minutes respectively at “UP” or“DOWN”.
Float position Needle movesFloat “UP” “F”
Float “DOWN” “E”
6. If the fuel level warning light fails to come onor the fuel meter fails to operate:
8-50
2Tester (+) lead Brown terminalTester (–) lead Green/Red terminal
3. Voltage
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to thebulb socket connector.
Drain the fuel. Turn the main switch to “ON”. Check the voltage (12 V).
The wiring circuit from the main switch to thebulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.
MEETSSPECIFICATION
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
This circuit is not faulty.
1
1
2
SIGNAL SYSTEM ELEC
8-51
Fus
e (m
ain)
3 4 6 19
Mai
n sw
itch
Bat
tery
The
rmo
switc
h(w
arni
ng li
ght)
27 46 47 48
Fan
mot
or
Fus
e (f
an)
51F
use
(sig
nal)
The
rmo
switc
h (f
an)
Eng
ine
tem
pera
ture
war
ning
ligh
t
COOLING SYSTEM ELECEB807000
COOLING SYSTEMCIRCUIT DIAGRAM
8-52
COOLING SYSTEM ELEC
NOTE:
EB802011
1. Fuses (main, signal and fan)
Remove the fuses. Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) to the
fuses. Check the fuses for continuity. Replace the fuse(s).
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
Open-circuit voltage:12.8 V or more at 20 C
EB802012
2. Battery
Check the battery condition.Refer to “BATTERY INSPECTION” inCHAPTER 3.
Clean the batery terminals. Recharge or replace the battery.
CORRECT
INCORRECT
EB807010
TROUBLESHOOTING
IF THE FAN MOTOR FAILS TO TURN:IF THE WATER TEMPERTATURE METER FAILS TO MOVE, WHEN THE ENGINE IS WARM:
ProcedureCheck:
1. Fuses (main, signal and fan)2. Battery3. Main switch4. Fan motor5. Thermo switch
6. Engine temperature warning light7. Voltage8. Wiring connections (the entire cooling
system)
Remove the following part(s) before trouble-shooting.
1) Seat2) Fuel tank3) Front cowling assembly Use the following special tool(s) for trouble-
shooting.
Pocket tester:90890-03112
8-53
Disconnect the main switch coupler fromthe wire harness.
Check for continuity as follows:Red – Brown/Blue
Disconnect the fan motor coupler. Connect the battery (12 V) as shown.
2
EB802017
3. Main switch
Replace the main switch.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
EB807011
The fan motor is faulty, replace it.
MOVES
DOES NOT MOVE
4. Fan motor
Battery (+) lead Black terminalBattery (–) led Black terminal
Check the operation of the fan motor.
21
1
COOLING SYSTEM ELEC
8-54
Les than 98 C
3* 105 to 98C
Remove the thermo switch from the thermo-static valve housing.
Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) to thethermo switch .
Immerse the thermo switch in coolant . Check the thermo switch for continuity.
While heating the coolant use a thermome-ter to record the temperatures.
2
EB802017
5. Thermo switch (fan, engine temperature)
Replace the thermo switch.
GOODCONDITION
BAD CONDITION
THERMO SWITCH “ON”THERMO SWITCH “OFF”
1
Handle the thermo switch with special care.Never subjct it to strong shocks or allow it tobe dropped. Should it be dropped, it must bereplaced.
Tests 1 & 2; Heat-up testsTests 3* & 4*; Cool-down tests: Continuity : No continuity
AB
Teststep
Goodcondition
1 0 105C
4*
2 More than 105 C
Water temperatureThermo switch
98C
105C
3
COOLING SYSTEM ELEC
8-55
Tester (+) lead Brown leadTester (–) lead Green/White lead
7. Voltage
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to thebulb socket connector.
Turn the main switch to “ON”. Check the voltage (12 V).
The wiring circuit from the main switch to thebulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.
MEETSSPECIFICATION
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
This circuit is not faulty.
1
6. Engine temperature warning light
Check the bulb and bulb socket for continu-ity.
Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
8. Wiring connections
Check the connections of the entire coolingsystem.Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.
Properly connect the cooling system.
CORRECT
POOR CONNECTION
EB807014
2
1
2
COOLING SYSTEM ELEC
8-56
Fus
e (m
ain)
3 4 6 10 11 21 54 56
Mai
n sw
itch
Bat
tery
Fue
l pum
p re
lay
Igni
tor
unit
Fue
l pum
pE
ngin
e st
op s
witc
hF
use
(igni
tion)
FUEL PUMP SYSTEM ELECEB808000
FUEL PUMP SYSTEMCIRCUIT DIAGRAM
8-57
FUEL PUMP SYSTEM ELEC
1 Battery2 Fuse (main)3 Main switch4 Fuse (ignition)5 Engine stop switch6 Ignitor unit7 Fuel pump relay8 Fuel pump
EB808010
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT OPERATIONThe fuel pump circuit consists of the fuel pumprelay, fuel pump, engine stop switch and ignitorunit.The ignitor unit includes the control unit for thefuel pump.
8-58
COOLING SYSTEM ELEC
NOTE:
EB802011
1. Fuses (main and ignition)
Remove the fuses. Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) to the
fuses. Check the fuses for continuity. Replace the fuse(s).
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
Open-circuit voltage:12.8 V or more at 20 C
EB802012
2. Battery
Check the battery condition.Refer to “BATTERY INSPECTION” inCHAPTER 3.
Clean the battery terminals. Recharge or replace the battery.
CORRECT
INCORRECT
EB808020
TROUBLESHOOTING
IF THE FUEL PUMP FAILS TO OPERATE:
ProcedureCheck:
1. Fuses (main and ignition)2. Battery3. Main switch4. Engine stop switch
5. Fuel pump relay (starting circuit cut-off relay)6. Fuel pump resistance7. Wiring connections (the entire fuel system)
Remove the following part(s) before trouble-shooting:
1) Seat2) Fuel tank3) Side cover (left) Use the following special tool(s) for trouble-
shooting.
Pocket tester:90890-03112
8-59
Disconnect the right handlebar switch cou-pler from the wire harness.
Check for continuity as follows:Red/White – Red/White1 2
21
EB802017
3. Main switch
Disconnect the main switch coupler fromthe wire harness.
Check for continuity as follows:Red – Brown/Blue
Replace the main switch.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
EB802018
Replace the right handlebar switch.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
4. Engine stop switch
EB803023
5. Fuel pump relay (starting circuit cut-offrelay)
Remove the relay unit from the wire har-ness.
Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) and bat-tery (12 V) to the relay unit terminals.
1
FUEL PUMP SYSTEM ELEC
8-60
Battery (+) terminal
Red/Black terminalBattery (–) terminal
Blue/Red terminal
6. Fuel pump resistance
Disconnect the fuel pump coupler from thewire harness.
Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) to thefuel pump coupler terminals.
Check if the fuel pump has the specified re-sistance.
Replace the fuel pump.
MEETSSPECIFICATION
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
Replace the ignitor unit.
1
Replace the starting circuit cut-off relay.
CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
7. Wiring connections
Check the connections of the entire fuelpump system.Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
Properly connect the fuel pump system.
CORRECT
POOR CONNECTION
EB808022
2
EB808021
Fuel pump resistance:1.8 2.6 Ω at 20C
Tester (+) lead Red/Black terminalTester (–) lead Blue/Black terminal
Check the fuel pump relay for continuity.
Tester (+) lead Black/Blue terminalTester (–) lead Black terminal
13
1
3
FUEL PUMP SYSTEM ELEC
8-61
FUEL PUMP SYSTEM ELEC
21
EB808030
FUEL PUMP TEST
Gasoline is extremely flammable and un-der certain circumstances there can bedanger of an explosion or combustion.Be extremely careful and note the follow-ing points: Stop the engine before refuelling. Do not smoke and keep away from open
flames, sparks, or any other source offire.
Take care not to spill gasoline. If you doaccidentally spill some, wipe it up im-mediately with dry rags.
If gasoline touches the engine when theengine is still hot, there is a danger ofcombustion. Make sure that the engineis completely cool before performingthe following test.
1. Check: Fuel pump operation
a. Fill up the fuel tank.b. Put the end of the fuel hose into an open
container.c. Connect the battery (12 V) to the fuel
pump coupler terminals.
Battery (+) lead Black terminalBattery (–) lead Black terminal
d. If fuel flows out from the fuel hose, the fuelpump is good. If not, replace the fuelpump assembly.
8-62
Tachometer display
Engine speed
Engine speed
Tachometer display
Rev
olus
ion
Rev
olus
ion
Second
Second
SELF-DIAGNOSIS ELEC
SELF-DIAGNOSISThe YZF600R features self-diagnosis.When the main switch is turned to “ON”, the following items are monitored and the condition codes aredisplayed on the tachometer (irrespective of whether the engine is running or not).
Item Condition ResponseDisplay condition
code
Throttle positionsensor (TPS)
DisconnectedShort-circuitLocked
Enables the motorcycle to runso that the ignition timing is fixedwhen the throttle is fully opened.
Displays the condition code onthe tachometer.
3,000 r/min
Speed sensor Disconnectedshort-circuitWheel IC failsto pulse
Displays the condition code onthe tachometer.
4,000 r/min
Display order on the tachometer1. Fail to the throttle position sensor
1 0 r /min…3 seconds2 Display condition
code…2.5 seconds3 Engine speed…3 seconds
While the engine is stopped, the engine speed 3 is shown as 0 r/min.
2. Fail to speed sensor
1 0 r /min…3 seconds2 Display condition
code…2.5 seconds3 Engine speed…3 seconds
While the engine is stopped, the engine speed 3 is shown as 0 r/min.
8-63
SELF-DIAGNOSIS ELEC
NOTE:
1115
Ignitor unitThrottle position sensor (TPS)
1. Wire harness
Check the wire harness for continuity.Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
Repair or replace the wire harness.CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
2. TPS
Check the TPS for continuity. Refer to “THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
(TPS) ADJUSTMENT AND INSPECTION”in CHAPTER 6. Replace the TPS.
GOODCONDITION.
BAD CONDITION
Replace the ignitor unit.
TROUBLESHOOTING
The tachometer starts to display the self-diagnosis sequence.
Use the following special tool in this trouble-shooting.
Pocket tester:90890-03112
1. Throttle position sensor (TPS)CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
8-64
SELF-DIAGNOSIS ELEC
11 Ignitor unit17 Speed sensor
1. Wire harness
Check the wire harness for continuity.Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
Repair or replace the wire harness.CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
Replace the speed sensor.
2. Speed sensorCIRCUIT DIAGRAM
TRBLSHTG
9
TRBLSHTG
CHAPTER 9.TROUBLESHOOTING
STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING 9-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FUEL SYSTEM 9-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 9-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPRESSION SYSTEM 9-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POOR ENGINE IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE 9-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POOR ENGINE IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE 9-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POOR MEDIUM-AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE 9-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POOR MEDIUM-AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE 9-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAULTY GEAR SHIFTING 9-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD SHIFTING 9-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHIFT PEDAL DOES NOT MOVE 9-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JUMPS-OUT-OF GEAR 9-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAULTY CLUTCH PERFORMANCE 9-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLUTCH SLIPPING 9-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLUTCH DRAGGING 9-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OVERHEATING 9-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OVERHEATING 9-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OVERCOOLING 9-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OVERCOOLING 9-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POOR BRAKING 9-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POOR BRAKING EFFECT 9-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAULTY FRONT FORK LEGS 9-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MALFUNCTION 9-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OIL LEAKAGE 9-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UNSTABLE HANDLING 9-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNSTABLE HANDLING 9-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAULTY LIGHTING AND SIGNAL SYSTEMS 9-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HEADLIGHT DOES NOT LIGHT 9-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BULB BURNT OUT 9-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLASHER DOES NOT LIGHT 9-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLASHER BLINKS SLOWLY 9-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLASHER REMAINS LIT 9-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLASHER BLINKS QUICKLY 9-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HORN DOES NOT SOUND 9-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FZS600’98 WIRING DIAGRAM
TRBLSHTG
9-1
STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTINGTRBLSHTG
NOTE:
EB900000
TROUBLESHOOTING
The following guide for troubleshooting does not cover all the possible causes of problems.It should be helpful, however, as a guide to troubleshooting. Refer to the relative procedure in thismanual for inspection, adjustment and replacement of parts.
STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING
FUEL SYSTEMFuel tank Empty Clogged fuel filter Clogged fuel strainer Clogged fuel tank drain hose Clogged roll-over valve Clogged roll-over valve breather hose Deteriorated or contaminated fuelFuel cock
Clogged fuel hose
Carburetor Deteriorated or contaminated fuel Clogged pilot jet Clogged pilot air passage Sucked-in air Deformed float Worn needle valve Improperly sealed valve seat Improperly adjusted fuel level Improperly set pilot jet Clogged starter jet Faulty starter plunger Improperly adjusted starter cableAir filter Clogged air filter elementFuel pump Faulty fuel pump Faulty fuel pump relay
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSpark plug Improper plug gap Worn electrodes Wire between terminals severed Improper heat range Faulty spark plug capIgnition coil Faulty spark plug lead Broken bodyFull-transistor system Faulty ignitor unit Faulty pickup coil
Switch and wiring Faulty main switch Faulty engine stop switch Broken or shorted wiring Faulty neutral switch Faulty start switch Faulty sidestand switch Faulty clutch switchStarter motor Faulty starter motor Faulty starter relay Faulty circuit cut-off relay Faulty starter clutch
9-2
STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING/POOR ENGINE IDLE SPEEDPERFORMANCE/POOR MEDIUM-AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE
TRBLSHTG
COMPRESSION SYSTEMCylinder and cylinder head Loose spark plug Loose cylinder head or cylinder Faulty cylinder head gasket Worn, damaged or seized cylinder Improperly sealed valve Improper valve-to-valve seat contact Improper valve timing Faulty valve spring
Piston and piston ring Improperly installed piston ring Worn, fatigued or broken piston ring Seized piston ring Seized or damaged pistonCrankcase and crankshaft Improperly seated crankcase Seized crankshaft
EB901000
POOR ENGINE IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE
POOR ENGINE IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCECarburetor Improperly returned starter plunger Loose pilot jet Clogged pilot air jet Improperly synchronized carburetors Improperly adjusted idle speed
(throttle stop screw) Improper throttle cable free play Flooded carburetor
Electrical system Faulty battery Faulty spark plug Faulty ignitor unit Faulty pickup coil Faulty ignition coilValve train Improperly adjusted valve clearanceAir filter Clogged air filter element
EB902000
POOR MEDIUM-AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE
POOR MEDIUM-AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCERefer to “STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING”. (Fuel system, electrical system, compressionsystem and valve train)
Carburetor Faulty diaphragm Improperly adjusted fuel level Clogged or loose main jetAir filter Clogged air filter elementFuel pump Faulty fuel pump
9-3
FAULTY GEAR SHIFTING/FAULTY CLUTCH PERFORMANCE
TRBLSHTG
EB903000
FAULTY GEAR SHIFTING
HARD SHIFTINGRefer to “CLUTCH DRAGGING”.
SHIFT PEDAL DOES NOT MOVEShift shaft Improperly adjusted shift pedal link Bent shift shaftShift cam, shift fork Groove jammed with impurities Seized shift fork Bent shift fork guide bar
Transmission Seized transmission gear Jammed impurities Incorrectly assembled transmission
JUMPS-OUT-OF GEARShift shaft Improperly adjusted shift lever position Improperly returned stopper leverShift fork Worn shift fork
Shift cam Improper thrust play Worn shift cam grooveTransmission Worn gear dog
EB904000
FAULTY CLUTCH PERFORMANCE
CLUTCH SLIPPINGClutch Improperly adjusted clutch cable Loose clutch spring Fatigued clutch spring Worn friction plate/clutch plate Incorrectly assembled clutch
Engine oil Improper oil level Improper viscosity (low) Deterioration
CLUTCH DRAGGINGClutch Warped pressure plate Unevenly tensioned clutch springs Bent push rod Broken clutch boss Burnt primary driven gear bushing Bent clutch plate Swollen friction plate Match marks not aligned
Engine oil Improper oil level Improper viscosity (high) Deterioration
9-4
OVERHEATING/OVERCOOLING/POOR BRAKING/FAULTY FRONT FORK LEGS
TRBLSHTG
EB905000
OVERHEATING
OVERHEATINGIgnition system Improper spark plug gap Improper spark plug heat range Faulty ignitor unitFuel system Improper carburetor main jet setting Improper fuel level Clogged air filter elementCooling system Faulty cooling fan Faulty thermo stat Faulty thermo switch Improper coolant level (low) Faulty radiator Faulty radiator cap Faulty water pump
Compression system Heavy carbon build-upEngine oil Improper oil level Improper oil viscosity Inferior oil qualityBrake Brake drag
OVERCOOLINGOVERCOOLING Faulty cooling fan
Faulty thermo stat Faulty thermo switch
EB906000
POOR BRAKING
POOR BRAKING EFFECTDisc brake Worn brake pad Worn disc Air in brake fluid Leaking brake fluid Faulty cylinder cup kit Faulty caliper seal kit Loose union bolt Broken brake hose Oily or greasy brake disc/brake pad Improper brake fluid level
EB907000
FAULTY FRONT FORK LEGS
MALFUNCTION Bent, deformed or damaged inner tube Bent or deformed outer tube Damaged fork spring Worn or damaged slide metal Bent or damaged damper rod Improper oil viscosity Improper oil level
OIL LEAKAGE Bent, damaged or rusty inner tube Damaged or cracked outer tube Damaged oil seal lip Improperly installed oil seal Improper oil level (too high) Loose damper rod holding bolt Broken cap bolt O-ring Loose drain bolt Damaged drain bolt gasket
9-5
UNSTABLE HANDLING/FAULTY LIGHTING AND SIGNAL SYSTEMS
TRBLSHTG
EB908000
UNSTABLE HANDLING
UNSTABLE HANDLINGHandlebar Improperly installed or bentSteering Improperly installed handlebar crown Bent steering stem Improperly installed steering shaft
(improperly tightened ring nut) Damaged ball bearing or bearing raceSwingarm Worn bearing or busing Bent or damagedRear shock absorber Faulty spring Oil and gas leakageTire Uneven tire pressures on both sides Incorrect tire pressure Uneven tire wear
Front fork Uneven oil levels on both sides Uneven spring tension Broken spring Twisted front forkWheel Incorrect wheel balance Deformed cast wheel Damaged bearing Bent or loose wheel axle Excessive wheel runoutFrame Bent Damaged steering head tube Improperly installed bearing race
EB909000
FAULTY LIGHTING AND SIGNAL SYSTEMS
HEADLIGHT DOES NOT LIGHT Improper bulb Too many electric accessories Hard charging (broken stator coil wire, faulty
rectifier /regulator) Incorrect connection Improperly grounded Poor contacts (main or light switch)FLASHER DOES NOT LIGHT Improperly grounded Discharged battery Faulty turn switch Faulty flasher relay Faulty wire harness Loosely connected coupler Burnt-out bulb Faulty fuseFLASHER BLINKS SLOWLY Faulty flasher relay Faulty main and/or turn switch Improper bulb
BULB BURNT OUT Improper bulb Faulty battery Faulty rectifier/regulator Improperly grounded Faulty main and/or light switch Bulb life expiredFLASHER REMAINS LIT Faulty flasher relay Burnt-out bulbFLASHER BLINKS QUICKLY Improper bulb Faulty flasher relay Burnt-out bulbHORN DOES NOT SOUND Faulty battery Faulty fuse Faulty main and/or horn switch Improperly adjusted horn Faulty horn Broken wire harness
TRBLSHTG
1 A.C. magneto2 Rectifier / regulator3 Main switch4 Battery5 Fuse (back up)6 Fuse (main)7 Starter relay8 Starter motor9 Starting circuit cut-off relay10 Fuel pump relay11 Ignitor unit12 Ignition coil13 Spark plug14 Pick up coil15 Throttle position sensor16 Neutral switch17 speed sensor18 Fuel sender19 Thermo switch (engine temperature)20 Diode21 Fuel pump22 Sidestand switch23 Speedometer24 Tachometer25 Fuel meter26 Fuel level warning light27 Engine temperature warning light28 Neutral indicator light29 Oil level warning light30 High beam indicator light31 Turn indicator light32 Meter light33 Clutch switch34 Oil level switch35 Flasher relay36 Horn37 Pass switch38 Dimmer switch39 Horn switch40 Turn switch41 Front turn signal light42 Rear turn signal light43 Headlight44 Tail /Brake light45 Auxiliary light46 Fan motor47 Thermo switch (fan motor)48 Fuse (fan)49 Fuse (head)50 Rear brake switch51 Fuse (signal)52 Front brake switch53 Light switch54 Engine stop switch55 Starter switch56 Fuse (ignition)57 Alarm (option)
COLOR CODEB Black. . . . . Br Brown. . . . Ch Chocolate. . . Dg Dark green. . . G Green. . . . Gy Gray. . . L Blue. . . . .
P Pink. . . . . Lg Light green. . . . O Orange. . . . R Red. . . . . Sb Sky blue. . . . W White. . . . Y Yellow. . . . .
B/L Black/Blue. . . B/R Black/Red. . . B/W Black/. . B/Y Black/Yellow. . . Br/L Brown/Blue. . Br/W Brown/White. G/R Green/Red. .
G/W Green/White. . G/Y Green/Yellow. . L/B Blue/Black. . . L/R Blue/Red. . . L/W Blue/White. . L/Y Blue/Yellow. . . R/B Red/Black. . .
R/W Red/White. . R/Y Red/Yellow. . . W/B White/Black. . W/G White/Green. . W/R White/Red. . Y/B Yellow/Black. . . Y/R Yellow/Red. . .
FZS600 ’98 WIRING DIAGRAM